Volvo V40 Owners Manual 2013 PDF
Summary of Content for Volvo V40 Owners Manual 2013 PDF
Owners Manual V40
DEAR VOLVO OWNER THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo has also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmental requirements.
In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend that you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions and mainte- nance information contained in this owner's manual.
Table of contents
2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
00 00 Introduction
Important information................................. 6 Volvo and the environment....................... 10
01 01 Safety
Seatbelts .................................................. 14 Airbags...................................................... 17 Activating/deactivating the airbag*........... 20 Side airbags (SIPS bags) ......................... 22 Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................... 24 WHIPS ...................................................... 25 When the systems deploy ........................ 27 Safety mode.............................................. 28 Pedestrian airbag (Pedestrian Airbag)...... 29 Child safety............................................... 31 02
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade.................. 42 Battery replacement, remote control key/ PCC*......................................................... 48 Keyless*.................................................... 50 Locking/unlocking..................................... 54 Child safety locks...................................... 60 Alarm*....................................................... 61
Table of contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3
03 03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls.......................... 66 Volvo Sensus ........................................... 77 Key positions............................................ 79 Seats......................................................... 81 Steering wheel.......................................... 86 Lighting..................................................... 87 Wipers and washing.................................. 99 Windows, rearview and door mirrors...... 102 Compass*............................................... 107 Alcolock*................................................. 108 Starting the engine.................................. 112 Starting the engine external battery..... 114 Gearboxes............................................... 115 Eco Guide & Power*................................ 121 Start/Stop *............................................. 123 Foot brake............................................... 129 Parking brake.......................................... 131
HomeLink *............................................ 132
04 04 Driver support
DSTC Stability and traction control sys- tem.......................................................... 138 Road sign information - RSI*.................. 141 Speed limiter*.......................................... 143 Cruise control*........................................ 145 Adaptive cruise control*.......................... 147 Distance Warning*.................................. 158 City Safety........................................... 161 Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*............................. 167 Driver Alert System*................................ 175 Driver Alert System - DAC*..................... 176 Driver Alert System - Lane Keeping Aid* 180 Park assist syst*...................................... 184 Park assist camera*................................ 187 Park Assist Pilot - PAP*.......................... 190 BLIS and CTA*........................................ 194
05 05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages............................. 200 Menu source MY CAR............................ 203 Climate control........................................ 212 Fuel-driven engine block heater and pas- senger compartment heater*.................. 223 Additional heater*.................................... 227 Trip computer......................................... 229 Adapting driving characteristics............. 233 Comfort inside the passenger compart- ment........................................................ 234
Table of contents
4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment...... 240 Radio....................................................... 250 Media player........................................... 257 External audio source via AUX/USB* input........................................................ 261
Media Bluetooth * ................................. 264
Bluetooth handsfree*............................ 267 Voice recognition* mobile phone............ 275 TV*........................................................... 279 Remote control* ..................................... 282 07
07 During your journey
Recommendations during driving........... 286 Refuelling................................................ 289 Fuel......................................................... 291 Loading................................................... 294 Cargo area.............................................. 297 Driving with a trailer................................ 299 Towing and recovery.............................. 305
08 08 Wheels and tyres
General ................................................... 310 Changing wheels ................................... 314 Tyre pressure ......................................... 318 Warning triangle and first-aid kit*............ 319 Emergency puncture repair (TMK)* ........ 320
Table of contents
5
09 09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment............................... 328 Lamps..................................................... 335 Wiper blades and washer fluid................ 341 Battery..................................................... 344 Fuses...................................................... 348 Car care.................................................. 357
10 10 Specifications
Type designations................................... 366 Dimensions and weights......................... 368 Engine specifications.............................. 371 Engine oil................................................ 372 Fluids and lubricants............................... 374 Fuel......................................................... 376 Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pres- sure ........................................................ 378 Electrical system..................................... 379 Type approval......................................... 380 Symbols in the display............................ 392 11
11 Alphabetical Index
Alphabetical Index.................................. 396
Introduction
Important information
6 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Reading the Owner's Manual
Introduction
A good way of getting to know your new car is to read the owner's manual, ideally before your first journey. This will give you the opportunity to familiarise yourself with new functions, to see how best to handle the car in different sit- uations, and to make the best use of all the car's features. Please pay attention to the safety instructions contained in the manual.
The specifications, design features and illus- trations in this owner's manual are not binding. We reserve the right to make modifications without prior notice. Volvo Car Corporation
Option
All types of option/accessory are marked with an asterisk*.
In addition to standard equipment, this manual also describes options (factory fitted equip- ment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra equipment).
The equipment described in the owner's man- ual is not available in all cars - they have dif- ferent equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations.
In the event of uncertainty over what is stand- ard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo dealer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of injury.
IMPORTANT
"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of damage.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of features and functions for exam- ple.
Footnote
There is footnote information in the owner's manual that is located at the bottom of the page. This information is an addition to the text that it refers to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a table then letters are used instead of numbers for referral.
Message texts
There are displays in the car that show text messages. These text messages are high-
lighted in the owner's manual by means of the text being slightly larger and printed in grey. Examples of this are in menu texts and mes- sage texts on the information display (e.g. Audio settings).
Decals
The car contains different types of decal which are designed to convey important information in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the car have the following descending degree of importance for the warning/information.
Warning for personal injury
G031590
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white text/image on black message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the
Introduction
Important information
7
warning is ignored, may result in serious per- sonal injury or fatality.
Risk of property damage
G 03 15 92
White ISO symbols and white text/image on black or blue warning field and message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in damage to property.
Information
G 03 15 93
White ISO symbols and white text/image on black message field.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact rep- licas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your particular car is available on the respective decals for your car.
Procedure lists
Procedures where action must be taken in a certain sequence are numbered in the owner's manual.
When there is a series of illustrations for step-by-step instructions each step is numbered in the same way as the corres- ponding illustration.
There are numbered lists with letters adja- cent to the series of illustrations where the order of the instructions is not significant.
Arrows appear numbered and unnum- bered and are used to illustrate a move- ment.
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a movement when the reciprocal order is of no relevance.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-by- step instructions then the different steps are numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used in overview images where different com- ponents are pointed out. The number recurs in the position list featured in con- nection with the illustration that describes the item.
Introduction
Important information
8 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of points in the owner's manual.
Example:
Coolant
Engine oil
To be continued
This symbol is located furthest down to the right when a section continues on the following page.
Recording data
Your vehicle contains a number of computers whose function is to continuously check and monitor the vehicle's operation and function- ality. Some of the computers can record infor- mation during normal driving if they detect an error. In addition, information is recorded in the event of a collision or incident. Parts of the recorded information are required so that tech- nicians can diagnose and rectify faults in the vehicle during servicing and maintenance and so that Volvo can fulfil legal requirements and other regulations. In addition to this, the infor- mation is used for research purposes by Volvo in order to continually develop quality and safety, as the information can contribute to a better understanding of the factors that cause accidents and injuries. The information
includes details of the status and functionality of various systems and modules in the vehicle with regard to engine, throttle, steering and brake systems, amongst other things. This information may include details regarding the way the driver drives the vehicle, such as vehi- cle speed, brake and accelerator pedal use, steering wheel movement and whether or not the driver and passengers have used their seatbelts. For the reasons given this informa- tion may be stored in the vehicle's computers for a certain length of time, but also as a result of a collision or incident. This information may be stored by Volvo as long as it can help to further develop and further enhance safety and quality and as long as there are legal require- ments and other regulations that Volvo needs to consider.
Volvo will not contribute to the above-descri- bed information being disclosed to third parties without the vehicle owner's consent. However, due to national legislation and regulations Volvo may be required to disclose such infor- mation to authorities such as police authorities, or others who may assert a legal right to have access to it.
To be able to read and interpret the information recorded by the computers in the vehicle requires special technical equipment that Volvo, and workshops that have entered into agreements with Volvo, have access to. Volvo
is responsible that the information, which is transferred to Volvo during servicing and main- tenance, is stored and handled in a secure manner and that the handling complies with applicable legal requirements. For further infor- mation - contact a Volvo dealer.
Accessories and extra equipment
The incorrect connection and installation of accessories can negatively affect the car's electrical system. Certain accessories only function when their associated software is installed in the car's computer system. Volvo therefore recommends that you always con- tact an authorised Volvo workshop before installing accessories which are connected to or affect the electrical system.
Change of ownership for cars with Volvo On Call*
Volvo On Call is a supplemental service that consists of safety, security and comfort serv- ices. If the car has Volvo On Call and there is a change of owner, it is very important that these services are discontinued so that the former owner cannot access the services in the car. Contact the call centre by pressing the ON
CALL button in the car or contact an author- ised Volvo workshop. See also "Changing the security code" in the owner's manual for Volvo On Call.
Introduction
Important information
9
Information on the Internet
At www.volvocars.com there is further infor- mation concerning your car.
To be able to read the QR code, you need a QR code reader, which is available as an add-on for a number of mobile phones. A QR code reader can be downloaded from the App Store or Android Market.
QR code
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
10 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy
G 00 00 00
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo- ration's core values which influence all opera- tions. We also believe that our customers share our consideration for the environment.
Your Volvo complies with strict international environmental standards and is also manufac- tured in one of the cleanest and most resource- efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corpo- ration has global ISO certification, which includes the environmental standard ISO 14001 covering all factories and several of our other units. We also set requirements for our partners so that they work systematically with environmental issues.
Fuel consumption
Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower emis- sion of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con- sumption. For more information read under the heading, Reducing environmental impact.
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the con- cept "Clean inside and out" a concept that encompasses a clean interior environment as well as highly efficient emission control. In
many cases the exhaust emissions are well below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger compartment
A passenger compartment filter prevents dust and pollen from entering the passenger com- partment via the air intake.
A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Inte- rior Air Quality System) ensures that the incom- ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic out- side.
The system consists of an electronic sensor and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni- tored continuously and if there is an increase in
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 11
the level of certain unhealthy gases such as carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed. Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, queues and tunnels for example.
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon filter.
Interior
The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea- sant and comfortable, even for people with contact allergies and for asthma sufferers. Extreme attention has been given to choosing environmentally-compatible materials.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a long service life and low fuel consumption for your car. In this way you contribute to a cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops are entrusted with the service and mainte- nance of your car it becomes part of our sys- tem. Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in which our workshops are designed in order to prevent spills and discharges into the environment. Our workshop staff have the knowledge and the tools required to guarantee good environmental care.
Reducing environmental impact
You can easily help reduce environmental impact - here are a few tips:
Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the engine when stationary for longer periods. Pay attention to local regulations.
Drive economically - think ahead.
Perform service and maintenance in accordance with the owner's manual's instructions - follow the Service and War- ranty Booklet's recommended intervals.
If the car is equipped with an engine block heater*, use it before starting from cold - it improves starting capacity and reduces wear in cold weather and the engine rea- ches normal operating temperature more quickly, which lowers consumption and reduces emissions.
High speed increases consumption con- siderably due to increased wind resistance - a doubling of speed increases wind resis- tance 4 times.
Always dispose of environmentally hazar- dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in an environmentally safe manner. Consult a workshop in the event of uncertainty about how this type of waste should be discarded - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.
Following this advice can save money, the planet's resources are saved, and the car's durability is extended. For more information and further advice, see the pages 286 and 376.
Recycling
As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is important that the car is recycled in an envi- ronmentally sound manner. Almost all of the car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is therefore requested to contact a dealer for referral to a certified/approved recycling facility.
The owner's manual and the environment
The Forest Stewardship Council symbol shows that the paper pulp in this publication comes from FSC certified forests or other controlled sources.
12 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Seatbelts ................................................................................................ 14 Airbags.................................................................................................... 17 Activating/deactivating the airbag*......................................................... 20 Side airbags (SIPS bags) ....................................................................... 22 Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................................................................. 24 WHIPS .................................................................................................... 25 When the systems deploy ...................................................................... 27 Safety mode............................................................................................ 28 Pedestrian airbag (Pedestrian Airbag).................................................... 29 Child safety............................................................................................. 31
SAFETY
01 Safety
Seatbelts 01
14
General information
Heavy braking can have serious consequences if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all passengers use their seatbelts.
It is important that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can provide maximum protection. Do not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal seating position.
Putting on a seatbelt
Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by press- ing its locking tab into the seatbelt buckle. A loud "click" indicates that the belt has locked.
Correctly fitted seatbelt.
Incorrectly fitted seatbelt. The belt must rest on the shoulder.
Seatbelt height adjustment. Press the button and move the belt vertically. Position the belt as high as possible without it chafing against your throat.
The locking tab at the centre rear seat only fits into the intended seatbelt buckle.
Releasing the seatbelt
Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle and then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it in by hand so that it does not hang loose.
The seatbelt locks and cannot be with-
drawn:
if it is pulled out too quickly
during braking and acceleration
if the car leans heavily.
01 Safety
Seatbelts 01
15
Make sure that you:
do not use clips or anything else that can prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly
ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or caught on anything
the hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen)
tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the shoulder.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one per- son.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts your- self. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or dam- age. The new seatbelt must be type- approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt.
Seatbelts and pregnancy
G 02
09 98
The seatbelt should always be worn during pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the
correct way. The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the abdomen.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the abdomen. It must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as close to the body as possible. In addition, check that there are no twists in the seatbelt.
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers should adjust their seats and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive (which means that they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel). The aim should be to posi- tion the seat with as large a distance as possi- ble between abdomen and steering wheel.
01 Safety
Seatbelts 01
16
Seatbelt reminder
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual reminder. The audio reminder is speed dependent, and in some cases time depend- ent. The visual reminder is located in the roof console and the combined instrument panel.
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt reminder system.
Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two subfunctions:
Provides information on which seatbelts are being used in the rear seat. A message appears in the information display when the seatbelts are in use, or if one of the rear doors has been opened. The message is cleared automatically after driving for approximately 30 seconds or after press- ing the indicator stalk's OK button.
Provides a warning if one of the rear seat- belts is unfastened during travel. This warning takes the form of a message on the information display along with the audio/visual signal. The warning stops when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can also be acknowledged manually by press- ing the OK button.
The information display, see page 69, shows which seatbelts are in use. This information is always available.
Seatbelt tensioner
The seatbelts on the drivers side, the passen- ger side and at the outer rear seats are fitted with seatbelt tensioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a sufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then provides more effective restraint for the occupants.
WARNING
Never insert the tongue of the passenger's seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side. Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into the buckle on the correct side. Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not func- tion as intended in the event of a collision. There is a risk of serous injury.
01 Safety
Airbags 01
17
Warning symbol on the combined instrument panel
Analogue combined instrument panel.
The warning symbol in the combined instru- ment panel1 illuminates when the remote con- trol key is in key position II. The symbol clears after approx. 6 seconds provided the airbag system is fault-free.
WARNING
If the warning symbol for the airbag system remains illuminated or illuminates while driv- ing, it means that the airbag system does not have full functionality. The symbol indi- cates a fault in the airbag system, the belt tensioner system, SIPS, the IC system or some other fault in the system. Volvo rec- ommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.
As well as the warning symbol, a message may appear on the information display in appropri- ate cases. If the warning symbol malfunctions, the warning triangle illuminates and SRS
airbag Service required or SRS airbag
Service urgent appears in the display. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.
Airbag system
G 01
86 65
Airbag system viewed from above, left-hand-drive car.
G 01
86 66
Airbag system viewed from above, right-hand- drive car.
1 See also page 69 for different variants of the combined instrument panel.
01 Safety
Airbags 01
18
The system consists of airbags and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag(s) are inflated and become hot. To cushion the impact, the airbag deflates when compressed. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely nor- mal. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for repair. Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious per- sonal injury.
NOTE
The sensors react differently depending on the course of the collision and whether or not the seatbelts on the driver and passen- ger side are used.
It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli- sion. The airbag system senses the force of the collision on the car and adapts accord- ingly so that one or more airbags are deployed.
Individual airbags are also adapted to the collision force to which the vehicle is sub- jected.
Airbags on the driver's side
The car has two airbags to supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt on the driv- er's side. One of the airbags is folded up in the centre of the steering wheel (see the illustration on page 17); the steering wheel is labelled AIRBAG.
Knee airbag on the driver's side in a left-hand- drive car.
The second airbag (at knee level) is fitted in the lower part of the instrument panel on the driv- er's side; this panel is labelled AIRBAG.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the air- bags in the event of a collision.
Passenger airbag
Location of the front passenger airbag in a left- hand drive car.
Location of the front passenger airbag in a right- hand drive car.
01 Safety
Airbags 01
19
The car has an airbag to supplement the pro- tection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen- ger side. It is folded up into a compartment above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the air- bag in the event of a collision.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must be secured.
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the dashboard where the passenger airbag is located.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated.
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01
20 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Key switch off - PACOS*
General information
The airbag for the front passenger seat can be deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch, PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). For information on how to activate/deactivate, see under the heading Activating/deactivating.
Key switch off/switch
The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS) is located on the passenger end of the instru- ment panel and is accessible when the pas- senger door is open (see under the heading below, Activating/deactivating).
Check that the switch is in the required posi- tion. Volvo recommends that the remote con- trol key's key blade be used to change posi- tion.
For information on the key blade, see page 46.
WARNING
Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger the lives of passengers in the car.
WARNING
If the car is equipped with a front passenger airbag, but does not have a PACOS switch (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch), then the airbag will always be activated.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated and the symbol in the roof console is illuminated. Failure to follow this advice could endanger the life of the child.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas- senger seat if the message in the roof con- sole (see page 21) indicates that the air- bag is deactivated and if the warning sym- bol for the airbag system is also displayed in the combined instrument panel. This indi- cates that there has been a severe malfunc- tion. Visit a workshop as soon as possible. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Activating/deactivating
Position of airbag label plus switch.
The airbag is activated. With the switch in this position, persons taller than 140 cm can sit in the front passenger seat, but never children in a child seat or on a booster cushion.
The airbag is deactivated. With the switch in this position, children in a child seat or on a booster cushion can sit in the front passenger seat, but never persons taller than 140 cm.
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 21
WARNING
Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated. This applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm.
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.
NOTE
When the remote control key is in key posi- tion II the warning symbol for the airbag is displayed on the combined instrument panel for approx. 6 seconds (see page 17).
Following which, the indicator in the roof console is illuminated showing the correct status for the front passenger seat airbag. For more information about the different key positions for the remote control key, see page 79.
Activated airbag
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is activated.
A text message and a warning symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is activated (see preced- ing illustration).
Deactivated airbag
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is deactivated.
A text message and a symbol in the roof con- sole indicate that the airbag for the front pas- senger seat is deactivated (see preceding illus- tration).
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01
22
Side airbag
In a side impact collision a large proportion of the collision force is transferred by the SIPS (Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil- lars, the floor, the roof and other structural parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv- er's and front passenger seats protect the chest area and the hip and are an important part of the SIPS.
The SIPS bag system consists of two main components, side airbag and sensors. The side airbags are located in the front seat back- rests.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that repairs are only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop. Defective work in the SIPS- bag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.
Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag.
Volvo recommends the use only of car seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags.
Side airbags are a supplement the seat- belts. Always use a seatbelt.
Child seats and side airbags
The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the side airbag.
A child seat or booster cushion can be placed on the front passenger seat provided that the car does not have an activated1 passenger air- bag.
Location
Driver's seat, left-hand drive.
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips
1 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag, see page 20.
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01
23
the sensors and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag inflates between the occupant and the door panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. The side airbag is normally only deployed on the side of the collision.
01 Safety
Inflatable Curtain (IC) 01
24
Properties
The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is a part of SIPS and the airbags. It is fitted in the headlining along both sides of the roof and protects the car's occupants sitting in the outer seats. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated. The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the driver and passengers from striking their heads on the inside of the car during a collision.
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof. The hook is only designed for light clothing (not for solid objects such as umbrellas for example).
Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended pro- tection. Volvo recommends that you only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for placement in these areas.
WARNING
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under the top edge of the windows in the doors. Otherwise, the intended protection of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
01 Safety
WHIPS 01
25
Protection against whiplash injury WHIPS
The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con- sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe- cially designed head restraints in the front seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end collision, where the angle and speed of the col- lision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an influence.
WARNING
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Properties of the seat
When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front seat backrests are lowered backward to alter the seating position of the driver and front seat passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash injury.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WHIPS system and child seats/booster
cushions
The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the WHIPS system.
Correct seating position
For the best possible protection, the driver and front seat passenger should sit in the centre of the seat with as little space as possible between the head and the head restraint.
Do not obstruct the WHIPS system
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat back- rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the function of the WHIPS system.
01 Safety
WHIPS 01
26
Do not place objects on the rear seat that may prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the corresponding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not touch the folded backrest.
WARNING
If a seat has been subjected to extreme forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo recommends that it is checked by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Part of the WHIPS system's protective capacity may have been lost even if the seats appear to be undamaged.
Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys- tem checked even after a minor rear-end collision.
01 Safety
When the systems deploy 01
27
When the systems deploy
System Triggered
Seatbelt tensioner, front seat
In the event of a frontal collision, and/or side-impact collision, and/or rear-end collision and/or overturning
Seatbelt tensioner, rear seatA
In a frontal collision and/or side-impact accident and/or overturning
Airbags
(Steering wheel air- bag, knee airbag, passenger airbag)
In a frontal collisionB
Side airbags (SIPS) In a side-impact accidentB
System Triggered
Inflatable Curtain IC In the event of a side impact and/or over- turning and/or some frontal collisionsB
Whiplash protection WHIPS
In a rear-end colli- sion
A There is no seatbelt tensioner at the centre rear seat. B The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a col-
lision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.
If the airbags have deployed, the following is recommended:
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.
Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of components in the car's safety systems.
Always contact a doctor.
NOTE
The airbags and belt tensioner system are deployed only once during a collision.
WARNING
The airbag system's control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liq- uid, disconnect the battery cables. Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo rec- ommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety systems may also be damaged. The smoke and dust created when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/ injury after intensive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin burns.
01 Safety
Safety mode 01
28
Driving after a collision
Warning symbol in the analogue combined instru- ment panel1.
If the car is involved in a collision, the text Safety mode See manual may appear on the information display. This means that the car has reduced functionality. Safety mode is a protective state that is enforced when the col- lision may have damaged any of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety systems, or the brake system.
Attempting to start the car
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car. There must be no smell of fuel either.
If everything seems normal and you have checked for indications of fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the car.
Remove the remote control key and open the driver's door. If a message is now shown to the effect that the ignition is on, press the start button. Then close the door and reinsert the remote control key. The car's electronics will now try to reset themselves to normal mode. Then try to start the car.
If the message Safety mode See manual is still shown on the display then the car must not be driven or towed, but a vehicle recovery serv- ice used instead. Even if the car appears to be driveable, hidden damage may make the car impossible to control once moving.
Moving the car
If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode
See manual has been reset, the car can be moved carefully out of a dangerous position. Do not move the car further than necessary.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electronics yourself if the car has been in safety mode. This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as normal. Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to normal status after Safety mode See manual has been displayed.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode See manual message is dis- played. Leave the car at once.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its loca- tion. Volvo recommends that it is transpor- ted to an authorised Volvo workshop.
1 See also page 69 for different variants of the combined instrument panel.
01 Safety
Pedestrian airbag (Pedestrian Airbag) 01
29
Properties
The airbag (Pedestrian Airbag) is fitted under the bonnet near the windscreen. In the event of a frontal collision with a pedestrian, the sensors in the front bumper react and the airbag inflates if required based on the force of the impact. The sensors are active at a speed of approx. 20-50 km/h and an ambient temperature between -20 and +70C.
If the airbag is activated (Pedestrian Airbag):
the rear part of the bonnet is raised and locked in this position
the brake system is prepared for the upcoming emergency braking.
WARNING
Do not fit any accessories or change any- thing in the front. Incorrect intervention at the front may cause incorrect function in the system and lead to serious injury and dam- age to the car.
Volvo recommends that genuine wiper arms are used and that you only use genuine parts for them.
Handling after activation
If any of the other airbags in the passenger compartment were activated, the car remains in safety mode, see page 28.
If only the pedestrian airbag was activated:
1. Move the car to a safe location as close as possible.
2. Fold the airbag following the instructions under the next heading "Folding the airbag (Pedestrian Airbag)".
3. Seek the nearest workshop.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that, after activation of the airbag, you contact an authorised Volvo workshop as soon as possible.
Folding the airbag (Pedestrian Airbag)
Airbag (Pedestrian Airbag)
Airbag housing
Velcro strap, passenger side
Velcro strap, driver's side
The airbag may feel warm and give off smoke. This is normal. Fold the airbag as follows:
1. Find the Velcro strap on the driver's side (4).
2. Gather the airbag fabric along its length on the driver's side. Then fold the gathered fabric towards the centre. Wind the Velcro strap (double sided) around as much fabric as possible and fasten it.
01 Safety
Pedestrian airbag (Pedestrian Airbag) 01
30
3. Press the rolled up portion of the airbag into the airbag housing (2).
4. Repeat steps 1-3 for the passenger side. It may be necessary to fold the gathered fab- ric twice on this side in order to wind the Velcro strap around it.
5. The airbag housing cover will be open slightly. This is completely normal.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
31
Children should sit comfortably and safely
Volvo recommends that children travel in rear- facing child seats until as late an age as pos- sible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and then front-facing booster cushions/child seats until up to 10 years of age.
The position of a child in the car and the choice of equipment are dictated by the child's weight and size, for more information, see page 32.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to coun- try. Check what does apply.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to sit on the knee of a passenger.
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats, booster cushions & attachment devices) which is designed for your particular car. Using Vol- vo's child safety equipment provides you with optimum conditions for your child to travel safely in the car. Furthermore, the child safety equipment fits and is easy to use.
NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child safety products, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.
Child seats
G 02
07 39
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.
NOTE
When using child safety products it is important to read the installation instruc- tions included.
WARNING
Do not secure the straps of the child seat to the seat's horizontal adjustment bar, springs or the rails and beams under the seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps.
Look in the installation instructions for the child seat for the correct fitting.
Location of child seats
You may place:
a child seat/booster cushion on the pas- senger seat, provided the passenger air- bag is not activated1.
one or more child seats/booster cushions in the rear seat.
Always fit child seats/booster cushions in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated. If a child is sitting on the front passenger seat then he/she could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys.
1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 20.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
32
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.
WARNING
Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen.
Label Airbag
The label becomes visible when the passenger door is opened; see the illustration on page 20.
Recommended child seats2
Weight Front seat (with deactivated air- bag)
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 0
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system.
Type approval: E5 04301146
(L)
Group 0
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
2 With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
33
Weight Front seat (with deactivated air- bag)
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 0
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Child seats which are universally approved.
(U)
Group 1
9-18 kg
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Group 1
9-18 kg
Child seats which are universally approved.
(U)
Group 2
15-25 kg
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
01 Safety
Child safety 01
34
Weight Front seat (with deactivated air- bag)
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 2
15-25 kg
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
(L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
(L)
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest).
Type approval: E5 03139
(UF)
Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest).
Type approval: E5 03139
(UF)
L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.
B: Built-in child seats approved for this weight class.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
35
Child safety locks, rear doors
The controls for operating the rear door power windows and the rear door opening handles can be blocked from opening from the inside. For more information, see page 60.
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system are located at the lower section of the rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.
The location of the mounting points is indicated by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see pre- ceding illustration).
Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the ISOFIX mounting points.
Size classes
Child seats are in different sizes cars are in different sizes. This means that not all child seats are suitable for all seats in all car models.
Consequently, there is a size classification for child seats using the ISOFIX fixture system in order to assist users in choosing the correct child seat (see the following table).
Size class
Description
A Full size, front-facing child seat
B Reduced size (alt. 1), front- facing child seat
B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front- facing child seat
C Full size, rear-facing child seat
Size class
Description
D Reduced size, rear-facing child seat
E Rear-facing infant seat
F Transverse infant seat, left- hand
G Transverse infant seat, right- hand
WARNING
Never place the child in the passenger seat if the car is fitted with an activated airbag.
NOTE
If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi- cation, the car model must be included on the vehicle list for the child seat.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer for recommenda- tions about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
36
Types of ISOFIX child seat
Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Infant seat transverse max 10 kg F X X
G X X
Infant seat, rear-facing max 10 kg E X OK
(IL)
Infant seat, rear-facing max 13 kg E X OK
(IL)
D X OK
(IL)
C X OK
(IL)
Child seat, rear-facing 9-18 kg D X OK
(IL)
C X OK
(IL)
01 Safety
Child safety 01
37
Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg B X OKA
(IUF)
B1 X OKA
(IUF)
A X OKA
(IUF)
X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.
IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.
A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
38
Upper mounting points for child seats
The car is equipped with upper mounting points for certain front-facing child seats. These mounting points are located on the rear of the seat.
The upper mounting points are primarily intended for use with front-facing child seats. Volvo recommends that small children should sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age as possible.
NOTE
Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate fitting this type of child seat in cars with folding head restraints on the outer seats.
NOTE
In cars with a cargo cover over the luggage compartment, this must be removed before child seats can be attached to the securing points.
For detailed information on how the child seat should be tensioned in the upper mounting points, see the seat manufacturer's instruc- tions.
WARNING
The child seat's straps must always be drawn through the hole in the head restraint leg before they are tensioned at the attach- ment point.
01 Safety
01
39
40 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Remote control key/key blade................................................................ 42 Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*...................................... 48 Keyless*.................................................................................................. 50 Locking/unlocking................................................................................... 54 Child safety locks.................................................................................... 60 Alarm*...................................................................................................... 61
LOCKS AND ALARM
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
42
General
The car is supplied with 2 remote control keys or two remote control keys with keyless func- tion. They are used to start the car and for lock- ing and unlocking.
The remote control key contains a removable key blade made of metal. The visible section is available in two versions so that it is possible to distinguish between the remote control keys.
Additional remote control keys can be ordered - up to 6 can be programmed and used for the same car.
There are four remote control key variants:
Remote control key, standard1
Remote control key with Keyless start1
Remote control key with Keyless drive1
PCC with Keyless drive 2
For information on remote control key function buttons see page 44.
PCC plus remote control key with keyless func- tion has extended functionality compared to the standard remote control key. The rest of
this chapter describes functions available in all variants.
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Remember to switch off the supply to the power windows by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car.
Loss of a remote control key
If you lose a remote control key then a new one can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The remain- ing remote control keys must then be taken to the workshop. The code of the missing remote control key must be erased from the system as a theft prevention measure.
The current number of keys registered to the car can be checked in the menu system MY
CAR under Information Number of keys. For a description of the menu system, see page 203.
Key memory3 - door mirrors, drivers
seat and steering force
The settings are automatically connected to each respective remote control key, see pages 82, 104 and 233.
The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Car key memory.
For a description of the menu system, see page 203.
For remote control keys with keyless function, see page 50.
Indicator for locking/unlocking
When the car is locked or unlocked using the remote control key, the direction indicators confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly performed.
Locking - one flash and the door mirrors are folded4 in.
Unlocking - two flashes and the door mir- rors are folded4 out.
1 5-button key 2 6-button key 3 Only in combination with power driver's seat and power mirrors. 4 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
43
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key in the car.
When locking, indication is given only if all locks have been locked and all doors are closed. Indication is given when the last door has been closed.
Selecting the function
Different options for indicating locking/unlock- ing with light can be set in the car's menu sys- tem, see page 203.
Search in the menu system MY CAR for Settings Car settings Light settings
and select Door lock confirmation light and/ or Unlock confirmation light.
Lock indicator
Same LED as alarm indicator, see page 61.
A flashing LED by the windscreen verifies that the car is locked.
NOTE
Cars that are not equipped with alarm also have this indicator.
Immobiliser
Each remote control key has a unique code. The car can only be started with the correct remote control key with the correct code.
The following error messages in the combined instrument panel's information display are rela- ted to the electronic immobiliser:
Message Specification
Insert car key Error when reading the remote control key during starting - Remove the key from the ignition switch, press it in again and make a new start attempt.
Car key not found
(Applicable only to cars with Keyless.)
Error reading the remote control key during starting - Try to start again.
If the error persists: Insert the remote control key into the ignition switch and try to start again.
Immobiliser Try to
start again
Error in immobiliser system during star- ting. If the error per- sists: Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.
For starting the car, see page 112.
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
44 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Functions
5-button remote control key
Locking
Unlocking
Approach light duration
Tailgate
Panic function
Remote control key with PCC* - Personal Car Communicator.
Information
Function buttons
Locking Locks the doors and tailgate while the alarm is activated.
Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to close all windows simultaneously.
WARNING
If windows are closed using the remote con- trol key, check that nobody's hands are trapped.
Unlocking Unlocks the doors and tail- gate while the alarm is deactivated.
Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to open all windows simultaneously.
The function can be changed from unlocking all doors simultaneously, to unlocking the driv- er's door only with one press of the button and, after a further press of the button - within 10 seconds - unlocking the remaining doors.
The function can be changed in the menu sys- tem MY CAR under Settings Car settings
Lock settings Doors unlock with both the alternatives All doors and Driver door,
then all. For a description of the menu system, see page 203.
Approach light duration Used to switch on the car's lighting at a distance. For more information, see page 95.
Tailgate - Unlocks and disarms the alarm for the tailgate only. For more information, see page 56.
Panic function Used to attract attention in an emergency.
Press and hold the button for at least 3 sec- onds or press it twice within 3 seconds to acti- vate the direction indicators and the horn.
The function can be turned off with the same button once it has been active for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off automatically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds.
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 45
Range
The remote control key's functions have a range of about 20 m from the car.
If the car does not verify a button being pressed - move closer and try again.
NOTE
The remote control key functions may be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions, etc. The car can always be locked/unlocked with the key blade, see page 47.
Unique PCC functions*
Remote control key with PCC* - Personal Car Communicator.
Information button
Indicator lamps
Using the information button enables access to certain information from the car via the indica- tor lamps.
Using the information button
Press the information button .
> All indicator lamps flash for approxi- mately 7 seconds and the light travels around on the PCC. This indicates that information from the car has been read.
If any of the other buttons are pressed during this time then the reading is inter- rupted.
NOTE
If none of the indicator lamps illumi- nates with repeated use of the information button and in different locations (as well as after 7 seconds and after the light has trav- elled around on the PCC), contact a work- shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- ommended.
Indicator lamps display information in accord- ance with the following illustration:
Green continuous light the car is locked.
Yellow continuous light the car is unlocked.
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
46 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Red continuous light the alarm has been triggered since the car was locked.
Red light flashing alternately in both indi- cator lamps The alarm was triggered less than 5 minutes ago.
Range PCC
The PCC's range for locking, unlocking and tailgate is about 20 m from the car - for other functions up to about 100 m.
If the car does not verify a button being pressed - move closer and try again.
NOTE
The information button function may be dis- rupted by surrounding radio waves, build- ings, topographical conditions, etc.
Out of PCC range
If the PCC is too far away from the car for the information to be read then the status the car was last left in is shown, without the light trav- elling around on the PCC.
If several PCCs are used for the car then it is only the PCC last used for locking/unlocking that shows correct status.
NOTE
If none of the indicator lamps illumi- nates with repeated use of the information button and in different locations (as well as after 7 seconds and after the light has trav- elled around on the PCC), contact a work- shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- ommended.
Detachable key blade
A remote control key contains a detachable key blade of metal with which some functions can be activated and some operations carried out.
The key blade's unique code is provided by authorised Volvo workshops, which are rec- ommended when ordering new key blades.
Key blade functions
Using the remote control key's detachable key blade:
the left-hand front door can be opened manually if central locking cannot be acti- vated with the remote control key, see page 51.
the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks can be activated/deactivated, see page 60.
the right-hand front door and the rear doors can be locked manually, e.g. in the event of power failure, see page 54.
The glovebox lock* opens see page 56.
the airbag for front passenger seat (PACOS)* can be activated/deactivated, see page 20.
Removing the key blade
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
At the same time pull the key blade straight out backwards.
Attaching the key blade
Carefully refit the key blade into its location in the remote control key.
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
47
1. Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot.
2. Lightly press the key blade. You should hear a "click" when the key blade is locked in.
Unlocking doors with the key blade
If central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key - e.g. if the batteries are discharged - then the left-hand front door can be opened as follows:
1. Unlock the left-hand front door with the key blade in the door handle's lock cylinder.
See also the illustration and further infor- mation, see page 51.
NOTE
When the door has been unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig- gered.
2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch.
For a car with the Keyless system, see page 51.
02 Locks and alarm
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*
02
48 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Replacing the battery
The batteries should be replaced if:
the information symbol is illuminated and the display shows Low battery in remote
control. Please change batteries.
and/or
the locks repeatedly do not react to signals from the remote control key within 20 metres from the car.
Opening
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
At the same time pull the key blade straight out backwards.
Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the hole behind the spring-loaded catch and gently prize the remote control key up.
NOTE
Turn the remote control key over with the buttons facing up, this is to avoid the bat- teries falling out when it is opened.
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching new batteries and their con- tact surfaces with your fingers as this may impair their function.
Battery replacement
Closely study how the battery/batteries are secured on the inside of the cover, with regard to their (+) and () sides.
Remote control key with 1 battery
1. Carefully prize out the battery. 2. Install a new one with the (+) side down.
Remote control key and PCC* with 2
batteries
1. Carefully prize out the batteries. 2. First install one new one with the (+) side
up. 3. Position the white plastic tab in between
and finally install a second new battery with the (+) side down.
Battery type
Use batteries with designation CR2430, 3 V.
Assembly
1. Press the remote control key together.
2. Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot.
3. Lightly press the key blade. You should hear a "click" when the key blade is locked in.
02 Locks and alarm
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 49
IMPORTANT
Make sure that exhausted batteries are dis- posed of in a manner which is kind to the environment.
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless*
02
50 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Keyless lock and ignition system*
General
Below is a description of remote control keys with Keyless drive and Keyless start functions. For cars with a Keyless start function, the car can be started without the remote control key being inserted in the ignition lock. For cars with a Keyless drive function, the car can be locked and unlocked without pressing a button on the remote control key, and also be started without the key being inserted in the ignition lock. The system makes it easier and more convenient to open the car, e.g. when your hands are full.
Both of the car's remote control keys have Keyless function. It is possible to order more remote control keys, see page 42.
The car's electrical system can be set to 3 dif- ferent levels (key positions) - 0, I and II - with the remote control key, see page 79.
Remote control key range1
In order to open a door or the tailgate without pressing a button on the remote control key, a remote control key must be approx. 1.5 m from the car door handle or tailgate. This means that the person who wishes to lock or unlock a door must have the remote control key with him or her. It is not possible to lock or unlock a door if the remote control key is on the opposite side of the car.
The red rings in the preceding illustration indi- cate the range covered by the system's anten- nas.
If all remote control keys are removed from the car when the engine is running or key position I or II is active (see page 79) and a door has been opened and then closed, the information display shows a warning message while sounding an audible reminder at the same time.
When the remote control key has been returned to the car, the warning message goes off and the audible reminder ceases once either/or:
a door has been opened and closed
the remote control key has been inserted in the ignition lock
The OK button on the direction indicator stalk.
Safe operation of the remote control key
with keyless function
If a remote control key with keyless function is left in the car, it is deactivated temporarily when the car is locked. This prevents unau- thorised entry.
However, if someone breaks into the car and finds the remote control key, it is reactivated. It is therefore important to handle all remote con- trol keys with great care.
IMPORTANT
When the door has been unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig- gered.
Interference to remote control key
function
Electromagnetic fields and screening can inter- fere with the Keyless function.
1 Does not apply to cars with keyless start
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 51
NOTE
Do not place/store the remote control key with keyless function near a mobile phone or metal object - no closer than 10-15 cm.
If interference is experienced nonetheless, use the remote control key and the key blade like a traditional remote control key, see page 44.
Locking2
Cars with the Keyless-drive system have a touch- sensitive area on the outer handle of the doors and a rubberised button next to the tailgate's rubber- ised pressure plate.
Lock the doors and the tailgate by grasping one of the door handles or pressing the smaller of the tailgate's two rubberised buttons - the
lock indicator in the windscreen confirms that locking has been completed by starting to flash, see page 43.
All doors and the tailgate must be closed before the car can be locked - otherwise the car is not locked.
NOTE
In cars with automatic gearbox selectors, the gear selector must be set to the P posi- tion; otherwise the car can be neither locked nor alarmed.
Unlocking2
Unlocking with Keyless-drive takes place when a hand grasps a door handle or the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate is actuated - open the door or tailgate as normal.
NOTE
The door handles normally register a hand that takes hold of the handle, but with thick gloves on or after a very quick hand move- ment a second attempt may be required, or with the glove taken off.
Unlocking with the key blade
Hole for key blade - to loosen the cover.
If central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key - e.g. if the batteries are discharged - then the left-hand front door can be opened using the remote control key's removable key blade (see page 46).
To access the lock cylinder, the door handle's plastic cover must be removed - this is also done with the key blade:
1. Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straight up into the hole on the underside of the door handle/cover - do not prize. > The plastic cover loosens automatically
by means of the torque when the blade
2 Not applicable to remote control keys with keyless start
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless*
02
52 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
is pushed straight up and into the open- ing.
2. Then insert the key blade in the lock cylin- der and unlock the door.
3. Refit the plastic cover after unlocking.
NOTE
When the front left door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is triggered. It is switched off by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch, see page 61.
Key memory3 - drivers seat, door
mirrors and steering force
Memory function in remote control key
with keyless function
If several people each with a remote control key approach the car, then the settings for seat and mirrors are implemented for the person who opens the driver's door.
After the driver's door has been opened by person A with remote control key A, but person B with remote control key B is to drive, the set- tings can be changed as follows:
Standing by the driver's door, or sitting behind the steering wheel, person B
presses their remote control key's unlock button, see page 44.
Select one of three possible memories for seat adjustment with seat button 1-3, see page 82.
Adjust seat and mirrors manually, see page 82 and 104.
Adjust steering force in the MY CAR menu system; see see page 205.
Lock settings
The Keyless-drive function can be adapted by indicating in the menu system MY CAR which doors are to be unlocked, under Car settings
Lock settings Keyless entry - there select between All doors unlock, Any door, Doors on same side and Both front doors.
For a description of the menu system, see page 203.
Antenna location
The Keyless system has a number of integrated antennae located around the car:
Rear bumper, centre
Door handle, left rear
Cargo area, central and furthest in under the floor
Door handle, right rear
Centre console, under the rear section
Centre console, under the front section.
3 Only in combination with power driver's seat and power mirrors.
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 53
WARNING
People who have had a pacemaker opera- tion should not come closer than 22 cm to the Keyless system's antennas with their pacemaker. This is to prevent interference between the pacemaker and the Keyless system.
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
54 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
From the outside
The remote control key can lock/unlock all doors, the tailgate and the fuel filler flap. Dif- ferent sequences for unlocking can be selected, see "Unlocking with the remote con- trol key" page 44.
In order that the lock sequence can be acti- vated, the driver's door must be closed - if any of the other doors or the tailgate is open, then it/they is/are locked and the alarm is activated only when it/they are closed. With the Key- less* system all the doors and tailgate must be closed.
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key in the car.
If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the remote control key, the battery may be dis- charged - lock or unlock the left-hand front door with the detachable key blade, see page 46.
NOTE
Remember that the alarm is triggered when the door is opened after being unlocked with the key blade - the alarm is switched off when the remote control key is inserted into the ignition switch.
WARNING
Be aware of the risk of being locked in the car when it is locked from the outside using the remote control key - it is then not pos- sible to open any of the doors from the inside with the door controls. For more infor- mation, see page 58, Deadlocks.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes of unlocking, all are locked again automatically. This function reduces the risk that the car is left unlocked unintentionally. (For cars with alarm, see page 61.)
Manual locking
In certain situations the car must be lockable manually, e.g. in the event of power failure.
The left-hand front door can be locked with its lock cylinder and the remote control key's detachable key blade, see page 51.
Other doors have no lock cylinders and instead have a lock switch on the end of each door
which must be depressed using the key blade - they are then mechanically locked/blocked to prevent them being opened from outside. The doors can still be opened from the inside.
Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up with child safety locks, see page 60.
Remove the removable key blade from the remote control key, see page 46. Insert the key blade into the hole for the lock switch and press in the key until it reaches the bottom, approx. 12 mm.
The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside.
The door is blocked against opening from the outside. To return to position A, the inner door handle must be opened.
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 55
NOTE
A door's lock reset only locks that par- ticular door - not all doors simultane- ously.
A manually locked rear door with an activated manual child safety lock can- not be opened from either the outside or the inside, see page 60. A rear door that is locked in this way can only be unlocked with the remote control key or central locking button.
From the inside
Central locking
Central locking.
All of the doors and the tailgate can be locked or unlocked simultaneously using the central locking button on the driver's door.
Press one side of the button to lock - the other side to unlock.
Lamp in lock button
Central locking is available in two variants - the lamp in the central locking button for the driv- er's door has different meanings dependent on the variant.
With central locking button only in the driver's door, other doors have no button:
Illuminated lamp means that all doors are locked.
With central locking button on both front doors and electric lock button in each rear door:
Illuminated lamp means that only that par- ticular door is locked. When all buttons are illuminated all doors are locked.
Unlocking
A door can be unlocked from the inside in two different ways:
Press the central locking button .
Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to also open all the side windows* simultaneously.
Pull the door handle and open the door - the door is unlocked and opened in one operation.
Locking
Both front doors must be closed for the central locking to be activated. Press the central locking button - all doors are locked. If any of the rear doors is open, it will lock when it is closed.
Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to also close all the side windows simultaneously.
Global opening
Press and hold the central locking button (at least 4 seconds) to also open all the win- dows simultaneously - for example, to quickly ventilate the passenger compartment during hot weather.
Automatic locking
The doors and tailgate are locked automati- cally when the car starts to move.
The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Lock settings Automatic
door locking. For a description of the menu system, see page 203.
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
56 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Lock cylinder, glovebox*
The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked using the remote control key's detachable key blade. For information on the key blade, see page 46.
Locking the glovebox:
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock cylinder.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise. The keyhole is horizontal in the locked position.
Pull out the key blade.
Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order.
Tailgate
Manual opening
Rubber plate with electrical contact.
The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock. To open:
1. Push down gently on the wider of the two rubberised pressure plates under the outer handle - the lock is released.
2. Lift the outside handle in order to fully open the tailgate.
IMPORTANT
Minimal force is required to release the rear hatch lock - just gently press the rubberised panel.
Do not place the lift force on the rubber panel when opening the rear hatch - lift the handle. Using too much force may damage the electrical contacts on the rubber panel.
Unlocking with the remote control key
The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed* and the tailgate unlocked on its own by using the remote control key's button.
The lock indicator on the instrument panel stops flashing in order to show that not all of the car is locked and the alarm's* level and
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 57
movement sensors and the sensors for open- ing the tailgate are disconnected.
The doors remain locked and armed.
The tailgate can be opened in two different ways using the remote control key:
One press - The boot lid is unlocked, but remains closed - press lightly on the rubberised pressure plate under the outer handle and lift the boot lid. If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed.
Two presses - The boot lid is unlocked and the lock is disengaged at which the boot lid opens about a centimetre - lift the outer handle to open. Rain, cold, frost or snow could however prevent the tailgate from disengaging from the lock.
NOTE
When the boot lid/tailgate is unlocked with 2 presses or from the car interior, automatic relocking does not take place because the boot lid/tailgate is open - it must be closed manually.
After the boot lid/tailgate has been closed it is unlocked and the alarm is not armed - relock it and re-arm the alarm with the remote control key's lock button .
Opening the car from inside
To open the tailgate:
Press the lighting panel button.
> The lock releases and the tailgate opens by a few centimetres.
Locking with the remote control key
Press the remote control key's button for locking, , see page 44.
> The lock indicator on the instrument panel starts flashing, which means that the car is locked and the alarm* has been activated.
Fuel filler flap
The fuel filler flap is unlocked using the remote control key button. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked until the car is locked with the remote control key button. If the car is locked during travel or with the interior buttons, the fuel filler flap will remain unlocked.
The fuel filler flap locking logic also follows the locking or unlocking of the keyless-drive and the central locking system. Fuel filler flap lock- ing always occurs after a 10-minute delay.
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
58 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Deadlocks*1
Deadlocks means that all door handles are mechanically disengaged, which prevents doors being opened from the inside.
The deadlocks are activated with the remote control key and are set after an approximately 10 second delay after the doors have been locked.
NOTE
If a door is opened within the delay time then the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is deactivated.
The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock state with the remote control key. The front left door can also be unlocked with the detachable key blade.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the deadlocks in order to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.
Temporary deactivation
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
MY CAR
OK MENU
TUNE knob control
EXIT
If someone is going to stay in the car but the doors must be locked from the outside, then the deadlocks function can be temporarily switched off. This is carried out as follows:
1. Access the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings Reduced
Guard (for a detailed description of the menu system, see page 203).
2. Select Activate once. > The instrument panel display shows the
message Reduced guard See
manual and the deadlocks function is switched off when the car is locked.
or
Select Ask when exiting. > Each time the engine is switched off the
centre console display screen shows the message Activate Reduced Guard
until engine has started again? fol- lowed by the alternatives Confirm with
OK and Cancel with EXIT.
If the deadlocks function shall be switched
off
Press OK/MENU and lock the car. (Note that the alarm's movement and tilt detec- tors* are switched off at the same time, see page 61.) > The next time the engine is started, the
system is reset to zero and the instru- ment panel display shows the message Full guard at which the deadlocks function and the alarm's movement and tilt detectors are re-engaged.
1 Only in combination with alarm.
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
59
If the locking system shall not be changed
Press EXIT and lock the car.
NOTE
Remember that the alarm is activated when the car is locked.
If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm is triggered.
02 Locks and alarm
Child safety locks
02
60 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Manual blocking of the rear doors
The child safety locks prevent children from opening a rear door from the inside.
With child safety locks. Not to be mixed up with manual door locks, see page 54.
The child safety locks are located on the trailing edge of the rear doors and are only accessible when the doors are open.
To activate/deactivate the child safety locks:
Use the remote control key's detachable key blade to turn the knob - see page 46.
The door is blocked against opening from the inside.
The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside.
NOTE
A door's knob control only blocks that particular door - not both rear doors simultaneously.
Cars with an electric child safety lock do not have a manual child lock.
Electrical locking of the rear doors* and power windows
Control panel driver's door.
The child safety locks can be activated/deac- tivated in all key positions higher than 0 - see page 79. Activation/deactivation can be per- formed up to 2 minutes after switching off the engine, provided that no door is opened.
To activate the child safety locks:
1. Start the engine or choose a key position higher than 0.
2. Press the button in the driver's door control panel. > The information display shows the mes-
sage Rear child lock activated and the button's lamp illuminates - the locks are active.
When the electric child safety lock is active then the rear:
windows can only be opened with the driv- er's door control panel
doors cannot be opened from inside.
The current setting is stored when the engine is switched off - if the child safety locks are activated at engine shutdown, the function will remain activated the next time the engine is started.
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 61
General
Activated alarm is triggered if:
a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened
a movement is detected in the passenger compartment (if fitted with a movement detector*)
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with a tilt detector*)
the battery's cable is disconnected
the siren is disconnected.
If there is a fault in the alarm system, the infor- mation display shows a message. In which case, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
NOTE
The movement sensors trigger an alarm in the event of movement in the passenger compartment - air currents are also regis- tered. For this reason the alarm is triggered if the car is left with a window open or if the passenger compartment heater is used.
To avoid this: Close the window when leav- ing the car. If the car's integrated passenger compartment heater (or a portable electric heater) shall be used - direct the airflow from the air vents so that they are not pointing upwards in the passenger compartment.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or alter compo- nents in the alarm system yourself. Any such attempts may affect the terms of the insur- ance.
Alarm indicator
Same LED as lock indicator, see page 43.
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the alarm system's status:
LED not lit Alarm not armed
The LED flashes once every other second Alarm is armed
The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the alarm (and until the remote control key is inserted in the ignition switch and key posi- tion I is selected) Alarm has been trig- gered.
Arming the alarm
Press the remote control key lock button.
Deactivate the alarm
Press the remote control key unlock but- ton.
Deactivating a triggered alarm
Press the remote control key unlock button or insert the remote control key in the igni- tion switch.
Other alarm functions
Automatic re-arming of the alarm
This function prevents the car being left with the alarm disarmed unintentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes, then the alarm is automatically re- armed. The car is relocked at the same time.
Automatic alarm activation
In certain countries, the alarm is activated after a certain delay if the driver's door was opened and closed but the car was not re-locked.
Remote control key not working
If the alarm cannot be deactivated with the remote control key, e.g. if the key's battery is
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
02
62 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
discharged - the car can be unlocked, dis- armed and the engine started as follows:
1. Open the left-hand front door with the detachable key blade - see page 51. > The alarm is triggered, the direction indi-
cators flash and the siren sounds.
2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch. > The alarm is deactivated.
Alarm signals
When the alarm is triggered, the following hap- pens:
A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the alarm is switched off. The siren has its own
battery and works independently of the car battery.
The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is switched off.
Reduced alarm level
To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm - e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during transport on a car train or car ferry - temporarily deactivate the movement and tilt detectors.
The procedure is the same as with the tempo- rary disengaging of deadlocks, see page 58.
02 Locks and alarm
02
63
64 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Instruments and controls........................................................................ 66 Volvo Sensus ......................................................................................... 77 Key positions.......................................................................................... 79 Seats....................................................................................................... 81 Steering wheel........................................................................................ 86 Lighting................................................................................................... 87 Wipers and washing................................................................................ 99 Windows, rearview and door mirrors.................................................... 102 Compass*.............................................................................................. 107 Alcolock*............................................................................................... 108 Starting the engine................................................................................ 112 Starting the engine external battery................................................... 114 Gearboxes............................................................................................. 115 Eco Guide & Power*.............................................................................. 121 Start/Stop *........................................................................................... 123 Foot brake............................................................................................. 129 Parking brake........................................................................................ 131
HomeLink *.......................................................................................... 132
YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
66
Instrument overview
Left-hand drive.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 67
Function Page
Menus and mes- sages, direction indicators, main/ dipped beam, trip computer
87, 93, 200, 229
Cruise control 145, 147
Horn, airbags 18, 86
Combined instru- ment panel
69, 75
Menu, audio and phone control
203, 241, 267, 243
START/STOP ENGINE button
112
Ignition switch 79
Display for infotain- ment and menus
203, 241, 241
Door handle
Control panel 55, 60, 102, 104
Hazard warning flashers
92
Function Page
Control for infotain- ment and menu control
203, 241, 243
Control panel for climate control
215
Gear selector 115
Parking brake 131
Wipers and wash- ing
99, 100
Steering wheel adjustment
86
Bonnet opener 328
Light switch, opener for tailgate
56, 87
Seat adjustment* 82
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
68
Right-hand drive.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 69
Function Page
Wipers and wash- ing
99, 100
Menu, audio and phone control
203, 241, 267, 243
Horn, airbags 17, 86
Combined instru- ment panel
69, 75
Cruise control 145, 147
START/STOP ENGINE button
112
Ignition switch 79
Display for infotain- ment and menus
203, 241, 241
Door handle
Control panel 55, 60, 102, 104
Hazard warning flashers
92
Control for infotain- ment and menu control
203, 241, 243
Function Page
Control panel for climate control
215
Gear selector 115
Parking brake 131
Menus and mes- sages, direction indicators, main/ dipped beam, trip computer
87, 93, 200, 229
Steering wheel adjustment
86
Bonnet opener 328
Light switch and tailgate opener
56, 87
Seat adjustment* 82
Information displays
Information display, analogue instrument panel.
Information displays, digital instrument panel.
The combined instrument panel's information displays show information on some of the car's functions, e.g. cruise control, trip computer
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
70
and messages. The information is shown with text and symbols.
There are further descriptions under the func- tions that use the information displays.
Gauges and indicators, analogue instrument panel
Fuel gauge. See also Trip computer, page 229, and Refuelling, page 289.
EcoGuide. See also page 121.
Speedometer
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).
Gearchange indicator1 / Gear position indi- cator2. See also page 286.
Gauges and indicators, digital instrument panel
Various themes can be selected for the digital combined instrument panel Possible themes are Elegance, Eco and Performance.
To change to a different theme, press the left stalk switch's OK button and then select the Themes menu option by turning the thumb- wheel on the lever. Confirm your choice by pressing the OK button. For more information on menus, see page 200.
Meters and indicators, Elegance.
Fuel gauge. See also Trip computer, page 229, and Refuelling, page 289.
Temperature gauge for engine coolant
Speedometer
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).
Gearchange indicator3 / Gear position indi- cator4. See also page 286.
1 Manual gearbox 2 Automatic gearbox 3 Manual gearbox 4 Automatic gearbox
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
71
Meters and indicators, Eco.
Fuel gauge. See also Trip computer, page 229, and Refuelling, page 289.
EcoGuide. See also page 121.
Speedometer
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).
Gearchange indicator3 / Gear position indi- cator4. See also page 286.
Meters and indicators, Performance.
Fuel gauge. See also Trip computer, page 229, and Refuelling, page 289.
Temperature gauge for engine coolant
Speedometer
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).
PowerMeter. See also page 121.
Gearchange indicator3 / Gear position indi- cator4. See also page 286.
Indicator and warning symbols
Indicator and warning symbols, analogue instru- ment panel.
Indicator symbols
Indicator and warning symbols
warning symbols5
3 Manual gearbox 4 Automatic gearbox 5 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text. For information on checking the oil level, see page 329.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
72
Indicator and warning symbols, digital instrument panel.
Indicator symbols
Indicator and warning symbols
Warning symbols5
Functionality check
All indicator and warning symbols illuminate in key position II or when the engine is started. When the engine has started, all the symbols should go out except the parking brake sym- bol, which only goes out when the brake is dis- engaged.
If the engine does not start or if the functionality check is carried out in key position II then all symbols go out within 5 seconds except the
symbol for faults in the car's emissions system and the symbol for low oil pressure.
Indicator symbols
Symbol Specification
ABL fault
Emissions system
ABS fault
Rear fog lamp on
Stability system
Stability system, sport mode
Engine preheater (diesel)
Low level in fuel tank
Information, read display text
Main beam On
Symbol Specification
Left-hand direction indicators
Right-hand direction indicators
DRIVe - Start/Stop, the engine auto-stopped, see page 123
ABL fault
The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in the ABL function (Active Bending Lights).
Emissions system
If the symbol illuminates then it may be due to a fault in the car's emissions system. Drive to a workshop for checking. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
ABS fault
If this symbol illuminates then the system is not working. The car's regular brake system con- tinues to work, but without the ABS function.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine.
2. Restart the engine.
3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to a workshop to have the ABS system
5 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text. For information on checking the oil level, see page 329.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
73
checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Rear fog lamp on
This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp is on. The rear fog lamp is made up of two bulbs.
Stability system
A flashing symbol indicates that the stability system is operating. If the symbol illuminates with constant glow then there is a fault in the system.
Stability system, Sport mode
Sport mode allows for a more active driving experience. The system then detects whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel move- ments and cornering are more active than in normal driving and then allows controlled skid- ding of the rear section up to a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the car.
Engine preheater (diesel)
This symbol illuminates during engine preheat- ing. Preheating mostly takes place due to low temperature.
Low level in fuel tank
When the symbol illuminates the level in the fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.
Information, read display text
When one of the car's systems does not behave as intended, this information symbol illuminates and a text appears on the informa- tion display. The message text is cleared with the OK button, see page 200, or it disappears automatically after a time (time depending on which function is indicated). The information symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.
NOTE
When a service message is shown, the sym- bol and message are cleared using the OK button, or disappear automatically after a time.
Main beam On
The symbol illuminates when main beam is on and with main beam flash.
Left/right-hand direction indicators
Both direction indicator symbols flash when the hazard warning flashers are used.
DRIVe Start/Stop
The symbol shines when the engine is auto- stopped.
Warning symbols
Symbol Specification
Low oil pressureA
Parking brake applied
Parking brake applied, alternative symbol
Airbags SRS
Seatbelt reminder
Alternator not charging
Fault in brake sys- tem
Warning
A For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text, see pages 329 and 331.
Low oil pressure
If this symbol illuminates during driving then the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the engine immediately and check the engine oil level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illumi-
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
74
nates and the oil level is normal, contact a workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo work- shop.
Parking brake applied
This symbol illuminates with a constant glow when the parking brake is applied. The symbol is illuminated during application. For more information, see page 131.
Airbags SRS
If this symbol remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, it means a fault has been detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or IC systems. Drive immediately to a workshop to have the system checked. Volvo recom- mends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Seatbelt reminder
This symbol illuminates if someone in a front seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.
Alternator not charging
This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault has occurred in the electrical system. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo work- shop.
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see page 333.
If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake force distribution system.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine.
2. Restart the engine.
If both symbols extinguish, continue driving.
If the symbols remain illuminated, check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see page 333. If the brake fluid level is nor- mal but the symbols are still illuminated, the car can be driven, with great care, to a workshop to have the brake system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.
The loss of brake fluid must be investigated by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the same time, there is a risk that the rear end will skid during heavy braking.
Warning
The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and/or driveability of the car. An explan- atory text is shown on the information display at the same time. The symbol remains visible until the fault has been rectified but the text message can be cleared with the OK button, see page 200. The warning symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.
Action:
1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car further.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 75
2. Read the information on the information display. Implement the action in accord- ance with the message in the display. Clear the message using the OK button.
Reminder doors not closed
If one of the doors, the bonnet6 or tailgate is not closed properly then the information or warn- ing symbol illuminates together with an explan- atory text message in the combined instrument panel. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the door, bonnet or boot lid, whichever is open.
If the car is driven at a speed lower than approx. 7 km/h then the information
symbol illuminates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher than approx. 7 km/h then the warning
symbol illuminates.
Trip meter
Trip meter.
Display for trip meter7
The two trip meters T1 and T2 are used for measuring short distances. The distance is shown in the display.
Turn the left stalk switch thumbwheel to show the required meter.
One long press (more than 1 second) on the left stalk switch RESET button resets the trip meter currently displayed. A longer press (4 seconds) resets the trip computer if the car is fitted with a digital instrument panel. For more information, see page 229.
Clock
Clock, digital instrument panel.
Display for showing the time8
Set the clock
The clock can be set in the menu group MY
CAR, for more information see page 203.
6 Only cars with alarm*. 7 The appearance of the display may vary depending on variant. 8 The time is shown in the middle of the instrument panel when an analogue instrument panel is fitted.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
76 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
RSI*
The function RSI (Road Sign Identification) helps the driver to see road signs containing information on current speed, that a motorway or road is starting/ending and when overtaking is prohibited. For detailed information on RSI, see page 141.
Combined Instrument Panel Software
"Combined Instrument Panel Software: Portions of this software are copyright 2.4.3 The FreeTypeProject (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved."
03 Your driving environment
Volvo Sensus
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 77
General
Control panel in centre console
Navigation* - NAV, see separate owner's manual (Road and Traffic Information Sys- tem - RTI).
Infotainment (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*), see page 241.
Car settings - MY CAR, see page 203.
Climate control, see page 212.
Park assist camera - CAM*, see page 187.
Volvo Sensus is the car's operating system, the heart of your personal Volvo experience. Volvo Sensus combines and presents many func- tions in several of the car's systems on the centre console TV screen. With Volvo Sensus
the car can be personalised by means of an intuitive user interface. Settings can be made in Car settings, Infotainment, Climate, etc.
With the centre console buttons and controls or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad* functions can be activated or deactivated and many different settings can be made.
With a press on MY CAR all settings related to the driving and control of the car are presented, such as City Safety, Locks and alarm, setting the clock, etc.
With a press on the respective function: RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*, NAV* and CAM* other sources, systems and functions can be acti- vated, e.g. AM, FM1, CD, DVD*, TV*, Blue- tooth*, navigation* and park assist camera*.
For more information on all functions/systems, see the respective section in the owner's man- ual.
Sensus software
This software uses parts of sources from clib2 and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source (Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994), and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990, 1993), The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. (c) UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All or some portions are derived from material licensed to the University
of California by American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Neither the name of the
03 Your driving environment
Volvo Sensus
03
78
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
This software uses parts of sources from "libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL Sample Implementation, Version 1.2.1, released January 26, 2000, developed by Silicon Graphics, Inc. The Original Code is Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Copyright in any portions created by third parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. All Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000] Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright
notice including the dates of first publication and either this permission notice or a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc.
This software is based in parts on the work of the FreeType Team.
This software uses parts of SSLeay Library: Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). All rights reserved
03 Your driving environment
Key positions
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79
Insert and remove the remote control key
Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/ inserted.
NOTE
For cars with the Keyless* function the key does not need to be inserted into the ignition switch but can be stored in e.g. a pocket. For more information on Keyless functions - see page 50.
Insert the key
1. Hold the end of the remote control key with the detachable key blade and insert the key in the ignition switch.
2. Then press the key in the lock up to its end position.
IMPORTANT
Foreign objects in the ignition switch can impair the function or destroy the lock.
Do not press in the remote control key incor- rectly turned - Hold the end with the detach- able key blade, see page 46.
Withdraw the key
Push the remote control key, allow it to eject, then pull it out from the ignition switch.
Functions at different levels
In order to enable the use of a limited number of functions with the engine switched off, the car's electrical system can be set in 3 different levels (key positions) - 0, I and II - with the remote control key. Throughout this owner's manual these levels are described using the denomination "key positions".
The following table shows the functions avail- able in each key position/level.
Level Functions
0 Odometer, clock and tempera- ture gauge are illuminated.
Power seats can be adjusted.
The audio system can be used for a limited time - see page 240.
I Sun visor for glass roof, power windows, 12 V socket in the pas- senger compartment, RTI, phone, ventilation fan and windscreen wipers can be used.
II The headlamps come on.
Warning/indicator lamps illumi- nate for 5 seconds.
Several other systems are acti- vated. However, heating in seat cushions and the rear window can only be activated after the engine has been started.
This key position consumes a
lot of current from the starter
battery and should therefore be
avoided!
03 Your driving environment
Key positions
03
80 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Choosing key position/level
Key position 0
Unlock the car - this means that the car's electrical system is at level 0.
Key position I
With the remote control key fully inserted into the ignition switch1 - Briefly press START/STOP ENGINE.
NOTE
To reach level I or II without starting the engine - do not depress the brake/clutch pedal when these key positions are due to be selected.
Key position II
With the remote control key fully inserted into the ignition switch1 - Give a long2 press on START/STOP ENGINE.
Back to key position 0
To return to key position 0 from position II and I - Briefly press on START/STOP
ENGINE.
Audio system
For information on the audio system's func- tions with remote control key removed - see page 240.
Starting and stopping the engine
For information about starting/switching off the engine - see page 112.
Towing
For important information about the remote control key during towing - see page 305.
1 Not necessary for cars with the Keyless* function. 2 Approx. 2 seconds.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 81
Front seats
To adjust lumbar support*, turn the wheel1.
Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust the distance to the steering wheel and ped- als. Check that the seat is locked after changing position.
To raise/lower the front edge of seat cush- ion*, pump up/down.
Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.
Raise/lower the seat*, pump up/down.
Control panel for power seat*.
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat before setting off, never while driving. Make sure that the seat is in locked position in order to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident.
Adjusting front seat head restraints
The height of the front seat head restraints can be adjusted.
Adjust the head restraint based on the person's height so that the whole of the back of the head is covered if possible.
To adjust the height, the button (see illustration) must be pressed while the restraint is moved up or down.
The head restraint can be adjusted in three dif- ferent positions.
Lowering the front seat backrest
The passenger seat backrest can be folded forward to make room for long loads.
Move the seat as far back/down as possi- ble.
Adjust the backrest to an upright position.
Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest and fold it forward.
4. Push the seat forward so that the head restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
1 Also applies to power seat.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
03
82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
Do not use the space behind the front seat, or the rear seat's centre seat, when the front seat backrest is lowered.
WARNING
Grasp the backrest and make sure that it is properly locked after being folded up in order to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident.
Power seat*
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
Seat forward/backward and up/down
Backrest rake
The power front seats have overload protection which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object. If this happens, go to key position I or 0 and wait a short time before adjusting the seat again.
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down) can be made at a time.
Preparations
The seats can be adjusted for a certain time after unlocking the door with the remote con- trol key without the key in the ignition switch. Seat adjustment is normally made in key posi- tion I and can always be made when the engine is running.
Seat with memory function*
Store setting
Memory button
Memory button
Memory button
Button for storing settings
1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
2. Hold the button depressed to store set- tings while depressing one of the memory buttons.
Using a stored setting
Hold one of the memory buttons depressed until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If you release the button then the movement of the seat will stop.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 83
Key memory* in remote control key2
All remote control keys can be used by differ- ent drivers to store the settings for the driver's seat and door mirrors3. Proceed as follows:
Adjust the seat as you want it.
Lock the car by pressing the lock button on the remote control key that you normally use. This stores the positions of the seat and door mirrors in the remote control key's memory4.
Unlock the car (by pressing the unlock but- ton on the same remote control key) and open the driver's door. The driver's seat and door mirrors will automatically adopt the positions that are stored in the remote
control key's memory (if the seat has been moved since you locked the car).
The key memory can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Car key memory. For a description of the menu system, see page 203.
Emergency stop
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press one of the setting buttons for the seat or mem- ory buttons in order to stop the seat.
Restarting to reach the seat position stored in the key memory is performed by pressing the unlock button on the remote control key. The driver's door must then be open.
WARNING
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do not play with the controls. Check that there are no objects in front of, behind or under the seat during adjustment. Ensure that none of the rear seat passengers is in dan- ger of becoming trapped.
Heated seats
For heated seats, see page 217.
Rear seats
Head restraint, centre seat, rear
Adjust the head restraint according to passen- ger height so that the whole of the back of the head is covered if possible. Slide it up as required.
To lower the head restraint again, the button (see illustration) must be pressed while the restraint is carefully moved down.
The head restraint can be adjusted in five dif- ferent positions.
2 For key memory for Keyless function, see page 52. 3 Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and retractable power door mirrors. 4 This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat's memory function.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
03
84
NOTE
Do not sit in the centre seat with the head restraint in fully lowered position.
Manual lowering of the outer head
restraints, rear seat
Pull the locking handle closest to the head restraint to fold the head restraint forward.
The head restraint is moved back manually.
WARNING
The head restraint must be in locked posi- tion after being folded up.
Lowering the rear seat backrest
IMPORTANT
When the backrest is to be folded, the rear seat cup holder must not be open and there must be no objects in the rear seat. Nor may the seat belts be connected. Otherwise there is a risk of damage to the rear seat upholstery.
The two-section backrest can be folded in dif- ferent ways.
NOTE
The front seats may need to be pushed for- wards, and/or the backrests adjusted upwards, in order that the rear backrests can be folded forward fully.
Both sections can be folded separately.
If the entire backrest is to be folded then the different sections should be folded separately.
If the right-hand section is being lowered - release and adjust the centre seat head restraint downwards, see page 83.
The outer head restraints are lowered auto- matically when the backrests are lowered. Pull up the backrest's locking handle while folding the backrest forward at the same time. A red indicator on the lock catch shows that the backrest is no longer locked in place.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
03
85
NOTE
When the backrests have been lowered the head restraints must be moved forward slightly so as not to make contact with the seat cushion.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
NOTE
When the backrest has been raised, the red indicator should no longer be showing. If it is still showing then the backrest is not locked in place.
WARNING
Check that the backrests and head restraints in the rear seat are locked prop- erly after being folded up.
03 Your driving environment
Steering wheel
03
86 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Adjusting
Adjusting the steering wheel.
Lever - releasing the steering wheel
Possible steering wheel positions
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both height and depth:
1. Push the lever forwards to release the steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you.
3. Pull the lever back to fix the steering wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steer- ing wheel lightly at the same time as you push the lever back.
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before driving away.
With speed related power steering* the level of steering force can be adjusted, see page 233.
Keypads*
Keypads in the steering wheel.
Cruise control, see page 145
Adaptive cruise control, see page 147
Audio and phone control, see page 241.
Horn
Horn.
Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 87
Light switches
Overview, light switches.
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and instrument lighting as well as ceiling lamps, mood lights and lighting in the front door storage compartments*
Rear fog lamp
Light switches
Thumbwheel1 for headlamp levelling
Instrument lighting
Different display and instrument lighting is switched on depending on key position, see page 79.
The display lighting is automatically subdued in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the thumbwheel.
The intensity of the instrument lighting is adjusted with the thumbwheel.
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical align- ment of the headlamp beam, which could daz- zle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting the height of the beam. Lower the beam if the car is heavily laden.
1. Leave the engine running, or have the car's electrical system in key position I.
2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/ lower beam alignment.
Cars with active Xenon headlamps* have auto- matic headlamp levelling and are therefore not equipped with the thumbwheel.
Main/dipped beam
Headlamp control and stalk switch.
Position for main beam flash
Position for main beam
1 Not available for cars equipped with active Xenon headlamps*.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Posi- tion
Specification
Daytime running lights
Main beam flash operates in this position.
Daytime running lights when the car is being driven. Automatic switching to parking lights when the car is parked.
Posi- tion
Specification
Daytime running lights during daytime driving. Automatic switching to dipped beam in poor light conditions and when windscreen wipers or rear fog lamps are activated.
The "Tunnel detection*" func- tion activates dipped beam in poor light conditions.
The function for "Main beam with automatic activation*" can be used.
Main beam flash operates in this position.
Dipped beam
Main beam can be activated.
Main beam flash operates in this position.
Volvo recommends that mode is used, as long as the traffic situation or weather con- ditions are not unfavourable for the function for "Main beam with automatic activation*".
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch gently towards the steer- ing wheel to the position for main beam flash. Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is released.
Daytime running lights during the day.
DRL
Light switch in position AUTO.
With the light switch in the position, the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) are activated automatically during the daytime. This is regu- lated by a light sensor which switches from daytime running lights to dipped beam off the main headlamps at dusk or when the daylight becomes too weak. Switching to dipped beam also takes place if the windscreen wipers or rear foglights are activated.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 89
NOTE
To achieve minimal energy consumption, the rear lights are also switched off when switching automatically from dipped beam to DRLs.
WARNING
This system help to save energy - it cannot determine in all situations when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and rain.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with its lights in a cor- rect state and in accordance with applicable traffic regulations.
Dipped beam
In position, dipped beam is activated automatically at dusk or when daylight becomes too weak. Dipped beam is also acti- vated automatically if the windscreen wipers or rear foglights are activated.
In position dipped beam is always acti- vated when the engine is running or when key position II is active.
Main beam
Main beam can be activated when the head- lamp control is in position . Activate/
deactivate main beam by moving the stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the end position and release. Alternatively, the main beam can be deactivated by a light press of the stalk switch toward the steering wheel.
When main beam has been activated the sym- bol illuminates in the combined instru- ment panel.
Main beam with automatic activation -
AHB*
Main beam with automatic activation (Active High Beam - AHB) is a function which uses a camera sensor at the top edge of the wind- screen to detect the headlamp beams of oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, and then switches from main beam to dipped beam. The lights are switched back to main beam a second or so after the camera sensor no longer detects any such light.
This function can be activated when the head- lamp control is in position . For activation to take place, the engine must have been run- ning for at least 20 seconds and the speed of the car must be 20 km/h or higher.
Light switch in position AUTO.
Activate/deactivate AHB by moving the left- hand stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the end position and release. Deactivation when main beam is on means that the lights switch directly to dipped beam.
Headlamp control and stalk switch.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
90 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
In cars with analogue combined instrument
panel:
When AHB has been activated, the symbol
illuminates in the instrument panel dis- play. When main beam has been activated, the
symbol also illuminates in the instru- ment panel display.
In cars with digital combined instrument
panel:
When AHB is activated, the symbol shines white in the instrument panel display. When main beam is activated, the symbol shines blue.
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and dirt.
Do not stick or attach anything to the wind- screen in front of the camera sensor as this may reduce effectiveness or cause one or more of the systems dependent on the cam- era to stop working.
If the message Active main beam
Temporary unavailable Swicth manually is shown in the combined instrument panel's dis- play then you have to switch manually between
main and dipped beam. However, the head- lamp control may nevertheless be in position
. The same applies if the message Windscreen sensors blocked See manual
and the symbol are shown. The
symbol goes out when these mes- sages are shown.
AHB may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in sit- uations with dense fog or heavy rain. When AHB becomes available again, or the wind- screen sensors are no longer blocked, the
message goes out and the symbol illu- minates.
WARNING
AHB is an aid for using optimum light com- position when conditions are favourable.
The driver always bears responsibility for manually switching between main and dipped beam when traffic situations or weather conditions so require.
IMPORTANT
Examples of when manual switching between main and dipped beam may be required:
In heavy rain or dense fog
In freezing rain
In snow flurries or slush
In moonlight
When driving in poorly lit built-up areas
When the traffic ahead has weak light- ing
If there are pedestrians on or beside the road
If there are highly reflective objects such as signs in the vicinity of the road
When the lighting from oncoming traffic is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier
When there is traffic on connecting roads
On the brow of a hill or in a hollow
In sharp bends.
For more information on the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 171.
Tunnel detection*
In cars fitted with a rain sensor*, the rain sensor detects the change in light conditions when the
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 91
car enters a tunnel, for example. The lighting is then switched within one second from daytime running lights to the main headlamps' dipped beam. Approx. 20 seconds after the car has emerged from the tunnel, the lights return to daytime running lights. If the car is driven into another tunnel within this time period, the return to daytime running lights is cancelled. This prevents frequent changes to the car light- ing. Note! - The headlamp control must be in
position for tunnel detection to work.
Active Xenon headlamps ABL*
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and activated (right) respectively.
If the car is equipped with active Xenon head- lamps Active Bending Lights - ABL the light from the headlamps follows the steering wheel
movement in order to provide maximum light- ing in bends and junctions and so provide increased safety.
The function is activated automatically when the car is started (provided that it has not been deactivated in the menu system MY CAR). In the event of a fault in the function the symbol illuminates in the combined instrument panel at the same time as the information dis- play shows an explanatory text and a further illuminated symbol.
Symbol Display Specifica- tion
Headlamp
failure
Service
required
The system is disen- gaged. Visit a workshop if the mes- sage remains. Volvo rec- ommends that you contact an authorised Volvo work- shop.
The function is only active in twilight or dark- ness and only when the car is moving.
The function2 can be deactivated/ activated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Light settings Active
Bending Lights. For a description of the menu system, see page 204.
2 Activated on delivery from the factory.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
92
Position/parking lamps
Headlamp control in position for position/parking lamps.
Turn the light switch to the position for posi- tion/parking lights (the numberplate lights come on at the same time).
When it is dark outside and the tailgate is opened the rear position lamps illuminate to alert traffic behind. This takes place irrespec- tive of what position the headlamp control is in or what key position the car's electrical system is in.
Brake lights
The brake light automatically comes on during braking. For information on the Emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers, see page 129.
Rear fog lamp
Button for rear fog lamp.
The rear fog lamp consists of two rear lamps and can only be switched on in combination with main/dipped beam.
Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog lamp indicator symbol on the combined instrument panel and the light in the button illu- minate when the rear fog lamp is switched on.
The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically when the engine is switched off.
NOTE
Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary from country to country.
Hazard warning flashers
Button for hazard warning flashers.
Press the button to activate the hazard warning flashers. Both direction indicator symbols in the combined instrument panel flash when the hazard warning flashers are in use.
The hazard warning flashers are activated automatically when the car has been braked so suddenly that the emergency brake lights have been activated at a speed below 10 km/h. The hazard warning flashers remain on when the car has stopped and are deactivated automat- ically when the car is driven off again or the
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93
button is depressed. For more information on Emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers, see page 129.
Direction indicators/flashers
Direction indicators/flashers.
Short flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the first position and release. The direction indicators flash three times. The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car
settings Light settings Triple
indicator. For a description of the menu system, see page 204.
Continuous flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the outer position.
The stalk switch remains in its position and is moved back manually, or automatically by the steering wheel movement.
Direction indicator symbols
For direction indicator symbols, see page 72.
Interior lighting
Controls in the roof console for the front reading lamps and ceiling lamps.
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Passenger compartment lighting (floor lamps* and ceiling lamps) - On/Off
Auto function for passenger compartment lighting
Reading lamp, right-hand side
All lighting in the passenger compartment can be switched on and off manually within 30 minutes from when:
the engine has been switched off and the car's electrical system is in key position 0
the car has been unlocked but the engine has not been started.
Front reading lamps*
The reading lamps are switched on or off by briefly pressing the relevant button in the roof console.
Brightness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
94 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Rear reading lamps*
Rear reading lamps.
The lamps are switched on or off by briefly pressing the relevant button.
Brightness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.
Floor lamps* and ceiling lamps
The floor lamps and ceiling lamps are switched on and off respectively when a side door is opened or closed.
Floor lamp intensity can be changed in the MY CAR menu system under Settings Car
settings Light settings Interior light
Floor lights. Select from Off, Low and High. For more information on the MY CAR menu system, see page 205.
Lighting in the front door storage
compartments*
Lighting in the front door storage compart- ments comes on when the engine starts.
Glovebox lighting
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
Vanity mirror
The lighting for the vanity mirror, see page 236, is switched on and off respectively when the cover is opened or closed.
Lighting, cargo area
The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and off respectively when the tailgate is opened or closed.
Auto function for passenger
compartment lighting
The auto function is activated when the lamp in the AUTO button is lit.
The passenger compartment lighting is then switched on and off as indicated below.
The passenger compartment lighting is switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:
the car is unlocked with the remote control key or key blade, see pages 44 or 47
the engine has been switched off and the car's electrical system is in key position 0.
Passenger compartment lighting is switched off when:
the engine is started
the car is locked.
The passenger compartment lighting comes on and remains on for two minutes if one of the doors is open.
If any lighting is switched on manually and the car is locked then it will be switched off auto- matically after two minutes.
Mood lights
When the normal passenger compartment lighting is switched off and the engine is run- ning, an LED in the front roof console illumi- nates in order to provide a low light and enhance the mood while driving. The light also makes it better to see objects in the storage compartments, etc. when it is dark out. Light intensity can be changed in the MY CAR menu system under Settings Car settings
Light settings Interior light Ambient
light. Select from Off, Low and High. This lighting extinguishes when the engine is switched off.
If the car also has mood lights in the roof con- sole for rear reading lamps*, the colour of the lights can be set in the MY CAR menu system under Settings Car settings Light
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
95
settings Interior light Ambient light
colours. If you select Temperature, the colour shifts between warm white and cold white depending on the temperature in the car or you can choose between different colour themes. The available colour themes are Frosty
White, Toscana White, Ember Gold, Red
Sunset, Rainforest, Glacier Blue and Violet
Purple. For more information on the MY CAR
menu system, see page 205.
Home safe light duration
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept switched on to work as home safe lighting after the car has been locked.
1. Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch.
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward the steering wheel to the end position and release it. The function can be activated in the same way as with main beam flash, see page 87.
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
When the function is activated, dipped beam, parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number plate lighting, interior ceiling lamps and floor lamps are switched on.
The length of time for which the home safe lighting should be kept on can be set in the
menu system MY CAR under Settings Car
settings Light settings Home safe light
duration. For a description of the menu sys- tem, see page 204.
Approach light duration
Approach lighting is switched on with the remote control key, see page 44, and is used to switch on the car's lighting at a distance.
When the function is activated with the remote control, parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number plate lighting, interior ceiling lamps and floor lamps are switched on.
The length of time for which the approach light- ing should be kept on can be set in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car
settings Light settings Approach light
duration. For a description of the menu sys- tem, see page 204.
Adjusting headlamp pattern
G 02
11 51
Headlamp pattern, left-hand traffic.
G 02
11 52
Headlamp pattern, right-hand traffic.
The headlamp pattern must be adjusted to avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can be set for right or left-hand traffic.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
96 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Active Xenon headlamps*
The light pattern does not need to be adjusted.
Halogen headlamps
The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps is readjusted by masking the headlamp lens. The headlamp pattern may not be as good.
Masking the headlamps
1. Copy the A and B templates for left-hand drive cars or the C and D templates for right-hand drive cars see page 98. The template scale is 1:2. Use a photocopier with a zoom function to copy the templates at 200 %:
A = LHD Right (left-hand drive, right lens)
B = LHD Left (left-hand drive, left lens)
C = RHD Right (right-hand drive, right lens)
D = RHD Left (right-hand drive, left lens)
2. Transfer the template to a self-adhesive waterproof material and cut it out.
3. Start from the design lines on the head- lamp lenses; see the lines on page 97. Position the self-adhesive templates at the design lines with the help of the illustration.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
97
Aligning the templates
Upper row: left-hand drive cars, templates A and B. Lower row: right-hand drive cars, templates C and D.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
98
Templates for halogen headlamps
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washing
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 99
Windscreen wipers1
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.
Rain sensor, on/off
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
Windscreen wipers off
Move the stalk switch to position 0 to switch off the windscreen wipers.
Single sweep
Raise the stalk switch and release to make one sweep.
Intermittent wiping
Set the number of sweeps per time unit with the thumbwheel when inter-
mittent wiping is selected.
Continuous wiping
The wipers sweep at normal speed.
The wipers sweep at high speed.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers during winter ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any snow or ice on the wind- screen is scraped away.
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The wind- screen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating.
Service position wiper blade
For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades and replacement of wiper blades see see page 341 and 357.
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor automatically starts the wind- screen wipers based on how much water it detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of
the rain sensor can be adjusted using the thumbwheel.
When the rain sensor is activated a light in the button the rain sensor symbol is shown in the right-hand display in the combined instrument panel.
Activating and setting the sensitivity
When activating the rain sensor, the car must be running or the remote control key in position I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch must be in position 0 or in the position for a single sweep.
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button . The windscreen wipers make one
sweep.
Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make an extra sweep.
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensi- tivity and downward for lower sensitivity. (An extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned upward.)
Deactivate
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the but- ton or move the stalk switch down to another wiper program.
1 Replacing the wiper blades see page 341, service position, wiper blade see page 341 and filling washer fluid see page 343.
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washing
03
100 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated when the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch or five minutes after the engine has been switched off.
IMPORTANT
The windscreen wipers could start and be damaged in an automatic car wash. Switch off the rain sensor while the car is in motion or when the remote control key is in position I or II. The symbol in the combined instru- ment panel and the light in the button go out.
Washing the headlamps and windows
Washing function.
Washing the windscreen
Move the stalk switch toward the steering wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp washers.
The windscreen wipers will make several more sweeps and the headlamps are washed once the stalk switch has been released.
High-pressure headlamp washing*
High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the headlamps are washed automatically at every fifth windscreen wash cycle.
Reduced washing
If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains in the reservoir and the message that you should fill the washer fluid is shown in the combined instrument panel's display, then the supply of washer fluid to the headlamps is switched off. This is in order to prioritise cleaning the wind- screen and the visibility through it.
Wiping and washing the rear window
Rear window wiper intermittent wiping
Rear window wiper continuous speed
Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow in the illustration above) to initiate rear window washing and wiping.
NOTE
The rear window wiper is equipped with overheating protection which means that the motor is switched off if it overheats. The rear window wiper works again after a cool- ing period (30 seconds or longer, depending on the heat in the motor and the outside temperature).
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washing
03
101
Wiper reversing
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wipers are on initiates intermittent rear window wiping2. The function stops when reverse gear is disengaged.
If the rear window wiper is already on at con- tinuous speed, no change is made.
NOTE
On cars with rain sensors, the rear wiper is activated during reversing if the sensor is activated and it is raining.
2 This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
03
102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
Laminated glass
The glass is reinforced which pro- vides better protection against break-ins and improved sound insu- lation in the passenger compartment.
The windscreen and other windows* have lami- nated glass.
Water and dirt-repellent coating*
Windows are treated with a coating that improves the view in difficult
weather conditions. Maintenance, see page 358.
IMPORTANT
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice from the windows. Use the heating to remove ice from the door mirrors, see page 105.
Heat-reflecting windscreen*
Areas where IR film is not applied.
Dimensions
A 65 mm
B 150 mm
C 125 mm
The windscreen is equipped with a heat- reflecting film (IR) that reduces the solar heat radiation into the passenger compartment.
The positioning of electronic equipment, such as a transponder, behind a glass surface with heat-reflecting film may affect its function and performance.
For the optimal function of electronic equip- ment, it should be positioned on the part of the windscreen with no heat-reflecting film (see the highlighted area in the above illustration).
Power windows
Driver's door control panel.
Switch for electric child safety locks* and disengaging rear power window buttons, see page 60.
Rear window controls
Front window controls
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
03
103
WARNING
Check that no rear seat passengers are trapped when the windows are closed from the driver's door.
WARNING
Check that children or other passengers are not trapped if the windows are closed, even when the remote control key is used.
WARNING
If there are children in the car - remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by selecting key position 0 and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car. For information on key positions - see page 80.
Operating
Operating the power windows.
Operating without auto
Operating with auto
All power windows can be operated using the control panel for the driver's door - the control panels for the other doors can only each oper- ate their respective power window. Only one control panel can be operated at a time.
In order for the power windows to be used the key position must be at least I - see page 79. The power windows can be operated for a few minutes after the engine has been switched off and after the remote control key has been removed - although not after a door has been opened.
Closing of the windows is stopped and the window is opened if anything prevents its movement. It is possible to override the pinch protection when closing has been interrupted, e.g. if there is ice forming. After two successive closing interruptions the pinch protection will be forced and the automatic function deacti- vated for a short while, now it is possible to close by continually holding the button pulled up.
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly.
Operating without auto
Move one of the controls up/down gently. The power windows move up/down as long as the control is held in position.
Operating with auto
Move one of the controls up/down to the end position and release it. The window runs auto- matically to its end position.
Operating with the remote control key
and central locking
To remotely operate the power windows from the outside with the remote control key or from inside with central locking, see pages 44 and 55.
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
03
104
Resetting
If the battery is disconnected then the function for automatic opening must be reset so that it can work correctly.
1. Gently raise the front section of the button to raise the window to its end position and hold it there for one second.
2. Release the button briefly.
3. Raise the front section of the button again for one second.
WARNING
A reset must take place for pinch protection to work.
Door mirrors
Door mirror controls.
Adjusting
1. Press the L button for the left-hand door mirror or the R button for the right-hand door mirror. The light in the button illumi- nates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the centre.
3. Press the L or R button again. The light should no longer be illuminated.
WARNING
The mirror on the driver's side is the wide- angle type to provide optimal vision. Objects may appear further away than they actually are.
Storing the position1
The mirror positions are stored in the key mem- ory when the car has been locked with the remote control key. When the car is unlocked with the same remote control key the mirrors and the driver's seat adopt the stored positions when the driver's door is opened.
The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Car key memory Personal
settings in key memory. For a description of the menu system, see page 204.
Angling the door mirror when parking1
The door mirror can be angled down for the driver to view the side of the road when parking for example.
Engage reverse gear and press the L or R button.
When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror automatically returns to its original position
1 Only in combination with power seat with memory, see page 82.
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105
after about 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing the button labelled L or R respectively.
Automatic angling of the door mirror
when parking1
When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror is automatically angled down so that the driver can see the side of the road when parking for example. When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror automatically returns to its original posi- tion after a short time.
The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Side mirror settings Tilt
left mirror or Tilt right mirror. For a descrip- tion of the menu system, see page 204.
Automatic retraction when locking1
When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote control key the door mirrors are auto- matically retracted/extended.
The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Side mirror settings Fold
mirrors. For a description of the menu system, see page 204.
Resetting to neutral
Mirrors that have been moved out of position by an external force must be reset electrically to the neutral position for electric retracting/ extending to work correctly:
1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R but- tons.
2. Fold them out again with the L and R but- tons.
3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
Retractable power door mirrors*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving in narrow spaces:
1. Depress the L and R buttons simultane- ously (key position must be at least I).
2. Release them after approximately 1 second. The mirrors auto- matically stop in the fully retracted posi- tion.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully extended posi- tion.
Home safe and approach lighting
The light on the door mirrors illuminates when approach lighting or home safe lighting is selected, see page 95.
Heated windscreen*, rear window and door mirrors
Heating for windscreen (1), rear window and door mirrors (2)
Use the defroster to quickly remove misting and ice from the windscreen, rear window and door mirrors.
One press of the button starts the heating. The light in the button indicates that the function is active. Disconnect the heating as soon as the ice/misting is cleared in order not to load the
1 Only in combination with power seat with memory, see page 82.
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
03
106 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
battery unnecessarily. However, the heating is switched off automatically after a certain time.
Refer to the section "Heated windscreen and max. defroster" on page 219.
The door mirrors and rear window are demis- ted/defrosted automatically if the car is started in an outside temperature lower than +9 C. Automatic defrosting can be selected in the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Climate settings Automatic rear
defroster. Select between On or Off. For a description of the menu system, see page 204.
The compass is deactivated when the heated windscreen is activated. When the heated windscreen is deactivated, the compass is reactivated.
Interior rearview mirror
Control for dimming
Manual dimming
Bright light from behind could be reflected in the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use dimming with the dimming control when lights from behind are distracting:
1. Use dimming by moving the control in towards the passenger compartment.
2. Return to normal position by moving the control towards the windscreen.
Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control is not available in mirrors with automatic dim- ming.
The compass* can only be specified for rear- view mirrors with automatic dimming, see page 107.
Glass roof*
The glass roof is fixed, but the blind can be operated in key position I or II with the control in the roof console. For information on key positions - see page 79.
Automatic opening to end position
Manual opening until the button is released
Manual closing until the button is released
Automatic closing to end position
03 Your driving environment
Compass*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 107
Operation
Rearview mirror with compass.
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction in which the front of the car is pointing. Eight different directions are shown with English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW
(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).
The compass is activated automatically when the car is started or in key position II, see page 79. To deactivate/activate the compass - press in the button on the rear side of the mirror using a paper clip for example.
The compass is deactivated when the heated windscreen is activated. When the heated windscreen is deactivated, the compass is reactivated.
Calibration
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The compass is set for the geographic area to which the car was delivered. The compass should be calibrated if the car is moved across several magnetic zones. Proceed as follows:
1. Stop the car in a large open area free from steel structures and high-voltage power lines.
2. Start the car.
NOTE
For the best calibration, switch off all elec- trical equipment (climate control system, wipers, etc.) and makes sure that all doors are closed.
3. Hold the button on the rear of the rearview mirror depressed approx. 6 seconds (using a paper clip for example) until the character C is shown.
G 03
02 95
Magnetic zones.
4. Hold the button on the rear of the rearview mirror depressed approx. 3 seconds. The number of the current magnetic zone is shown.
5. Press the button repeatedly until the required magnetic zone (115) is shown. See the map of magnetic zones for the compass.
6. Wait until the display resumes showing the character C.
7. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 10 km/h until a compass direc- tion is shown in the display, indicating that calibration is complete. Then drive a further 2 circles to fine-tune calibration.
8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
03 Your driving environment
Alcolock*
03
108 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on the alcolock
The function of the Alcolock1 is to prevent the car from being driven by individuals under the influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be started the driver must take a breath test that verifies that he/she is not under the influence of alcohol. Alcolock calibration takes place in accordance with each market's limit value in force for driving legally.
WARNING
The Alcolock is an aid and does not exempt the driver from responsibility. It is always the responsibility of the driver to be sober and to drive the car safely.
Functions
Nozzle for breath test.
Switch.
Transmission button.
Lamp for battery status.
Lamp for result of breath test.
Lamp indicates ready for breath test.
Operation
Battery
Alcolock indicator lamp (4) shows battery sta- tus:
Indicator lamp (4)
Battery status
Green flashing Charging in pro- gress
Green Fully charged
Yellow Semi-charged
Red Discharged - fit the charger in the holder or connect the power supply cable from the glovebox.
NOTE
Store the Alcolock in its holder. This will keep the built-in battery fully charged and the Alcolock is activated automatically when the car is opened.
1 Also called Alcoguard.
03 Your driving environment
Alcolock*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 109
Storage
Handheld unit storage and charging station.
The handheld alcolock unit is released by depressing it slightly in its holder and releasing it - it then springs out and can be removed from the holder.
Replace the handheld unit in the holder by pushing it in until it engages.
Store the handheld unit in the holder - this provides it with the best protection and keeps its batteries fully charged.
Before starting the engine
The Alcolock is activated automatically and is then ready for use when the car is opened.
1. When the indicator lamp (6) is green the Alcolock is ready for use.
2. Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder. If the Alcolock is outside the car when it is
unlocked then it must first be activated with the switch (2).
3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breath and blow with an even pressure until a "click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds. The result will be one of the alternatives in the following table Result after breath
test. 4. If no message is shown then the transmis-
sion to the car may have failed - in which case, press the button (3) to transmit the result to the car manually.
5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alcolock in its holder.
6. Start the engine following an approved breath test within 5 minutes - otherwise it must be repeated.
Result after breath test
Indicator lamp (5) + Display text
Specification
Green lamp + Alco-
guard Approved
test
Start the engine - no alcohol content measured.
Yellow lamp + Alco-
guard Approved
test
Engine starting pos- sible - measured alcohol content is above 0.1 promille but below the limit value in forceA.
Red lamp + Disap-
proved test Wait 1
minute
Engine starting not possible - measured alcohol content is above the limit value in forceA.
A Limits vary between countries, so find out what limits apply. See also the section entitled General information on the Alcolock on page 108
NOTE
After a completed period of driving, the engine can be restarted within 30 minutes without a new breath test.
03 Your driving environment
Alcolock*
03
110 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
To bear in mind
Before the breath test
In order to obtain correct function and as accu- rate a measurement result as possible:
Avoid eating or drinking approx. 5 minutes before the breath test.
Avoid excess windscreen washing - the alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an incorrect measurement result.
Change of driver
In order to ensure that a new breath test is car- ried out in the event of a change of driver - depress the switch (2) and the send button (3) simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. At which point the car returns to start inhibition mode and a new approved breath test is required before starting the engine.
Calibration and service
The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated at a workshop2 every 12 months.
30 days before recalibration is necessary the display shows Alcoguard Calibr. required. If calibration is not carried out within these 30 days then normal engine starting will be blocked - only starting with the Bypass func-
tion will then be possible, see page 110 sec- tion Emergency situation.
The message can be cleared by pressing the send button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out on its own after approx. 2 minutes but then reap- pears each time the engine is started - only recalibration at a workshop2 can clear the mes- sage permanently.
Cold or hot weather
The colder the weather the longer it takes before the Alcolock is ready for use:
Temperature (C) Maximum heat- ing time (sec-
onds)
+10 to +85 10
-5 to +10 60
-40 to -5 180
At temperatures below -20 C or above +60 C the Alcolock requires additional power supply. The display shows Alcoguard insert
power cable. In which case, connect the power supply cable from the glovebox and wait until indicator lamp (6) is green.
In extremely cold weather the heating time can be reduced by taking the Alcolock indoors.
Emergency situation
In the event of an emergency situation or the Alcolock is out of order, it is possible to bypass the Alcolock in order to drive the car.
NOTE
All Bypass activation is logged and saved in memory, see page 8 in the section, Record- ing data.
After the Bypass function has been activated the display shows Alcoguard Bypass
enabled the whole time while driving and can only be reset by a workshop2.
The Bypass function can be tested without the error message being logged - in which case, carry out all the steps without starting the car. The error message is cleared when the car is locked.
When the Alcolock is installed, either the Bypass or Emergency function is selected as the bypassing option. This setting can be changed afterwards at a workshop2.
2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
03 Your driving environment
Alcolock*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 111
Activating the Bypass function
Depress and hold the left-hand stalk switch OK button and the button for haz- ard warning flashers simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds - the display first shows Bypass activated Wait 1 minute and then Alcoguard Bypass enabled - after which the engine can be started.
This function can be activated several times. The error message shown during driving can only be cleared at a workshop2.
Activating the Emergency function
Depress and hold the left-hand stalk switch OK button and the button for haz- ard warning flashers simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds - the display shows Alcoguard Bypass enabled and the engine can be started.
This function can be used once, after which a reset must be made at a workshop2.
Symbols and display messages
In addition to the previously described mes- sages, the combined instrument panel's dis- play can also show the following:
Display text Meaning/Action
Alcoguard Restart
possible
The engine has been switched off for less than 30 minutes - engine starting pos- sible without new test.
Alcoguard Service
required
Contact a work- shop2.
Alcoguard No sig-
nal
Transmission failed - send manually with button (3) or take a new breath test.
Alcoguard Invalid
test
Test failed - take a new breath test.
Alcoguard Blow
longer
Blowing too short - blow for longer.
Alcoguard Blow
softer
Blowing too hard - blow more gently.
Display text Meaning/Action
Alcoguard Blow
harder
Blowing too weak - blow harder.
Alcoguard wait
Preheating
Heating not finished - wait for text Alco-
guard Blow 5 sec-
onds.
2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
03
112 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Petrol and diesel engines
Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/ inserted. and START/STOP ENGINE button.
IMPORTANT
Do not press in the remote control key incor- rectly turned - Hold the end with the detach- able key blade, see page 46.
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and press it in to its end position. Note that if the car is equipped with an alcolock then a breath test must first be approved before the engine can be started - see page 108.
2. Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed1. (For cars with automatic gearbox - Depress the brake pedal.)
3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button and then release it.
The starter motor works until the engine starts or until its overheating protection triggers.
IMPORTANT
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts - wait for 3 minutes before making a further attempt. Starting capacity increases if the battery is allowed to recover.
WARNING
Always remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when leaving the car, and make sure that the key position is 0 - in par- ticular if there are children in the car. For information on how this works - see page 79.
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting. This is done in order that the emissions system can reach normal oper- ating temperature as quickly as possible, which minimises exhaust emissions and protects the environment.
Keyless drive*
Follow steps 23 for starting petrol and diesel engines. For more information on Keyless drive - see page 50.
NOTE
A prerequisite for the car to start is that one of the car's remote control keys with the Keyless drive* function is in the passenger compartment or cargo area.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from the car while driving or during towing.
Stop the engine
To switch off the engine:
1 If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the car.
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
03
113
Press START/STOP ENGINE - the engine stops.
If the car has an automatic gearbox and the gear selector is not in a position P or if the car is moving - Press twice or hold the START/STOP ENGINE button depressed until the engine stops.
Steering lock
A mechanical noise can be perceived when the steering lock unlocks or locks.
The steering lock unlocks when the remote control key is in the ignition switch2 and the START/STOP ENGINE button is depressed.
The steering lock locks when the driver's door is opened after the engine has been switched off.
Key positions
For information on the remote control key's dif- ferent key positions - see page 79
2 Cars with Keyless drive must have a remote control key inside the passenger compartment.
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine external battery
03
114
Jump starting
If the battery is flat then the car can be started with current from another battery.
When jump starting the car, the following steps are recommended to avoid short circuits or other damage:
1. Insert the remote control key in key posi- tion 0, see page 79.
2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage of 12 V.
3. If the donor battery is installed in another car - switch off the donor car's engine and make sure that the two cars do not touch each other.
4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment.
5. Open the clips on the front cover of the battery in your car and remove the cover.
6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp onto the car's positive terminal (2).
7. Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's negative ter- minal (3).
8. Connect the other clamp to a grounding point, e.g. right-hand engine mounting at the top, the outer screw head (4).
9. Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed securely so that there are no sparks during the starting procedure.
10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.
11. Start the engine in the car with the dis- charged battery.
IMPORTANT
Do not use the connections when attempt- ing to start, as there is a risk of sparking.
12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order - first the black and then the red. > Make sure that none of the black jump
lead's clamps comes into contact with the battery's positive terminal or the clamp connected to the red jump lead!
WARNING
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is con- nected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode.
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns.
If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention immediately.
For more information on the car's battery - see page 344.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 115
General
HSA
The HSA (Hill Start Assist) function is available for both manual and automatic transmissions.
The function means that the pedal pressure in the brake system remains for several seconds while the foot is moved from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal before setting off or reversing uphill.
The temporary braking effect releases after several seconds or when the driver acceler- ates.
IMPORTANT
The operating temperature of the gearbox is checked in order to prevent damage to any of the drive system's components. In the event of a risk of overheating a warning symbol illuminates on the instrument panel combined with a text message - In which case, follow the recommendation given.
Manual gearbox
Gearing pattern.
Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprinted on the gear lever.
Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change.
Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when park- ing on a slope - leaving the car in gear is not sufficient to hold the car in all situations.
Reverse gear inhibitor
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil- ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear during normal forward travel.
Follow the gearing pattern printed on the gear lever and start from neutral position, N then depress the gear lever before mov- ing it to R position.
Engage reverse gear only when the car is stationary.
Gear indicator*
An essential detail in connection with environ- mental driving is to drive in the right gear and to change gear in plenty of time.
As an aid, certain variants have an indicator - GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) - that informs the driver when it is appropriate to engage the next higher or lower gear to achieve the lowest pos- sible fuel consumption. However, taking into consideration characteristics such as perform- ance and vibration-free running, it may be advantageous to change gear at a higher engine speed. The framed number indicates the current gear.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
03
116 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Instrument panel "Digital" with gear indicator.
Gear indicator for manual box. Only one marker is illu- minated at a time - it is illumi- nated in the centre only during normal driving.
When gearing up/down as recommended, the upper one is illuminated at "+" or the lower at "-", marked red in the illus- tration.
With instrument panel "Ana- logue", the gear positions and indicator arrows are dis- played in the centre of the combined instrument panel.
Automatic gearbox Geartronic*
D: Automatic gear positions. +/: Manual gear positions.
Gear positions
Automatic gear positions are indicated on the right of the instrument panel in this man- ner. (Only one marker is illu- minated at a time - the one showing the current gear selector position.)
Symbol S for "Sport mode" is ORANGE when the mode is active.
P Parking position
Select P when starting the engine or when the car is parked. The brake pedal must be depressed to disengage the gear selector from the P position.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P position is engaged. Apply the parking brake as well, as a precaution - see page 131.
NOTE
The gear selector must be in P position to allow the car to be locked and alarmed.
IMPORTANT
The car must be stationary when posi- tion P is selected.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when park- ing on a slope - the automatic transmission in P is not sufficient to hold the car in all sit- uations.
R Reverse
The car must be stationary when position R is selected.
N Neutral
No gear is engaged and the engine can be started. Apply the parking brake if the car is stationary with the gear selector in position N.
D Drive
D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and down takes place automatically based on the level of acceleration and speed. The car must
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
03
117
be stationary when the gear selector is moved to position D from position R.
Geartronic Manual gear positions (+/-)
The driver can also change gear manually using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal is released.
The manual gear position is reached by moving the lever to the side from position D to the end position at "+/-". The information displays symbol "+/-" changes colour from WHITE to orange and the digits 1 6 is displayed in a box, which corresponds to the gear which has just been selected.
Move the lever forwards towards + (plus) to change up a gear and release the lever, which returns to its rest position between + and .
or
Pull the lever back towards (minus) to change down a gear and release it.
The manual gearshift mode "+/-" can be selected at any time while driving.
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the driver allows the speed to decrease lower than a level suitable for the selected gear, in order to avoid jerking and stalling.
To return to automatic driving mode:
Move the lever to the side to the end posi- tion at D.
NOTE
f the gearbox has a Sport programme then the gearbox will only become manual after the lever has been moved forwards or back- wards in its "+/-" position. The information display then shifts the indication from S to show which of the gears 1-6 is engaged.
Geartronic - Sport mode (S)
The Sport programme provides sportier cha- racteristics and allows higher engine speed for the gears. At the same time it responds more quickly to acceleration. During active driving, the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading to a delayed upshift.
Sport mode is obtained by moving the lever to the side from D position to the end position at "+/-". The information display shifts the indi- cation from D to S.
Sport mode can be selected at any time while driving.
Geartronic - Winter mode
It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads if 3rd gear is engaged manually.
1. Depress the brake pedal and move the gear lever from the D position to the end
position at "+/-" - the instrument panel dis- play shifts the indication from D to the fig- ure 1.
2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever forward towards + (plus) twice - the display shifts the indication from 1 to 3.
3. Release the brake and accelerate carefully.
The gearbox "winter mode" means that the car moves off with a lower engine speed and reduced engine power on the drive wheels.
Kick-down
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the way to the floor (beyond the position normally regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is immediately engaged. This is known as kick- down.
If the accelerator is released from the kick- down position, the gearbox automatically changes up.
Kick-down is used when maximum accelera- tion is needed, such as for overtaking.
Safety function
To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox control program has a protective downshift inhibitor which prevents the kick-down func- tion.
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick- down which would result in an engine speed
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
03
118
high enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at high engine speed the original gear remains engaged.
When kick-down is activated the car can change one or more gears at a time depending on engine speed. The car changes up when the engine reaches its maximum speed in order to prevent damage to the engine.
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
G 02
13 51
The gear selector can be moved forward and back freely between N and D. Other positions are locked with a latch that is released with the inhibitor button on the gear selector.
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever can be moved forwards or backwards between P, R, N and D.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
The automatic gearbox has special safety sys- tems:
Parking position (P)
Stationary car with engine running:
Keep your foot on the brake pedal when mov- ing the gear selector to another position.
Electric gear inhibitor Shiftlock Parking
position (P)
To be able to move the gear selector from P to other gear positions, the brake pedal must be depressed and the remote control key must be in position II, see page 79.
Shiftlock Neutral (N)
If the gear selector is in the N position and the car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds (irrespective of whether the engine is running) then the gear selector is locked.
To be able to move the gear selector from N to other gear positions, the brake pedal must be depressed and the remote control key must be in position II, see page 79.
Deactivate automatic gear selector
inhibitor
If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat battery, the gear selector must be moved from the P position so that the car can be moved.
Lift the rubber mat in the compartment behind the centre console.
Press and release the yellow button in the console.
Move the gear selector from the P position.
4. Put the rubber mat back in place.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 119
Automatic gearbox Powershift*
D: Automatic gear positions. +/: Manual gear positions.
Powershift is an automatic gearbox that has double mechanical clutch discs in contrast to a conventional automatic gearbox. An auto- matic gearbox has a hydraulic torque converter instead that transfers power from engine to gearbox.
Powershift transmission operates in the same way and has similar controls and functions as the Geartronic automatic transmission, descri- bed in the previous section.
Powershift or Geartronic?
In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not the car is equipped with Powershift transmis- sion, this can be verified by checking the des- ignation on the transmission's label under the bonnet - see page 366. The designa- tion MPS6 means that it is Powershift trans- mission otherwise it is Geartronic automatic transmission.
To bear in mind
The transmission's double clutch has overload protection that is activated if it becomes too hot, e.g. if the car is held stationary with the accelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for a long time.
Overheated transmission causes the car to shake and vibrate, and the warning symbol illu- minates and the information display shows a message. The transmission can also overheat during slow driving in queues (10 km/h or slower) on an uphill gradient, or with a trailer hitched. The transmission cools down when the car is stationary, with foot brake depressed and the engine running at idling speed.
Overheating during slow driving in queues can be avoided by driving in stages:
Stop the car and wait with your foot on the brake pedal until there is a moderate dis- tance to the traffic ahead, drive forward a short distance, and then wait another moment with your foot on the brake pedal.
IMPORTANT
Use the foot brake to hold the car stationary on an uphill gradient - do not hold the car with the accelerator pedal. The gearbox could then overheat.
For important information regarding Powershift transmission and towing - see page 305.
Text message and action
In some situations the display may show a message at the same time as a symbol is illu- minated.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
03
120
Symbol Display Driving characteristics Action
Transm. overheat brake to hold Difficulty in maintaining even speed at con- stant engine speed.
Transmission overheated. Keep the car stationary using the foot brake.A
Transm. overheat park safely Significant pulling in the car's traction. Transmission overheated. Park the car immediately in a safe manner.A
Transm. cooling let engine run No drive due to overheated gearbox. Transmission overheated. For fastest cool- ing: Run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position until the message clears.
A For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.
The table shows three steps with an increased degree of seriousness should the transmission become too hot. In parallel with the display text the driver is also advised that the car's elec- tronics are temporarily changing the driving characteristics. Follow the instructions on the information display where appropriate.
NOTE
The examples in the table are no indication of the car being defective, but show that a safety function has been activated with a view to preventing damage to any of the car's components.
WARNING
If a warning symbol combined with the text Transm. overheat park safely is ignored then the heat in the gearbox may become so high that the power transmission between engine and gearbox is temporarily halted in order to prevent the clutch from malfunctioning - the car then loses drive and is stationary until gearbox temperature has cooled to an acceptable level.
For more possible display messages with their respective proposals for solutions concerning automatic transmission, see page 200.
A display text clears automatically after the action has been carried out or after one press on the indicator stalk OK button.
03 Your driving environment
Eco Guide & Power*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 121
General
These meters help the driver to drive the car while maintaining the best possible economy.
To display or close a display of these functions, see page 70.
The car also stores statistics of journeys made, which can be viewed in the form of a block dia- gram, see page 232.
EcoGuide
This meter provides an indication of how eco- nomically the car is being driven.
Instantaneous value
Average value
Instantaneous value
The instantaneous value is displayed here - the higher the result on the scale, the better.
The instantaneous value is calculated on the basis of speed, engine speed, engine power utilised plus use of the foot brake.
Optimum speed (50-80 km/h) and low revs are encouraged. The pointers fall under accelera- tion and braking.
Very low instantaneous values illuminate the red zone on the meter, which means poor economy and hence should be avoided.
Average value
The average value slowly follows the instanta- neous value and describes how the car has been driven of late. The higher the pointers on the scale, the better the economy achieved by the driver.
Power
This meter shows how much power is being taken from the engine and how much power is available.
Available engine power
Engine power utilised
Available power
The smaller, upper pointer shows the available engine power1. The higher the result on the scale, the more power is available in the current gear.
Utilised power
The larger, lower pointer shows the engine power utilised1. The higher the result on the
1 Power is dependent on engine speed.
03 Your driving environment
Eco Guide & Power*
03
122 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
scale, the more power is being taken from the engine.
A large gap between the two pointers indicates a large power reserve.
03 Your driving environment
Start/Stop *
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 123
Quieter and cleaner
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo- ration's core values and it influences all of our operations. This target-orientation has resulted in the DRIVe vehicle series whose concept consists of an interaction between several sep- arate energy-saving functions, all with the common purpose of reducing fuel consump- tion, which in turn contributes to reduced exhaust emissions.
General information on Start/Stop
The engine is switched off - it becomes quieter and cleaner...
Some engine and gearbox combinations come fitted with a Start and Stop function which engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights - the engine is then switched off temporarily and restarts automat- ically when the journey is due to continue.
The Start/Stop function gives the driver the opportunity for a more active environmentally conscious way of driving the car by means of being able to allow the engine to stop auto- matically, whenever appropriate.
Manual or Automatic
Note that there are differences in the Start/Stop function depending on whether the gearbox is manual or automatic.
Function and operation
The Start/Stop function is activated automatically when the engine is started with the key. The driver is alerted to the function by means of this symbol on the instrument panel illuminating briefly, the
display text Auto Start-Stop ON is shown and the green lamp for the On/Off button illumi- nates.
All of the car's normal systems such as lighting, radio, etc. work as normal even with an engine that has stopped automatically, except that some equipment may have the function tem- porarily reduced, e.g. the climate control sys- tem's fan speed or extremely high volume on the audio system.
Auto-stopping the engine
In order that the engine should stop automati- cally the car must be completely stationary:
03 Your driving environment
Start/Stop *
03
124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Conditions M/AA
Declutch, set the gear lever in neutral position and release the clutch pedal - the engine is switched off.
M
Stop the car with the foot brake and then keep your foot on the pedal - the engine stops automat- ically.
A
A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
The AUTO START symbol on the information display illuminates as
verification and reminder that the engine has stopped automatically.
Auto-starting the engine
Conditions M/AA
With the gear lever in neutral posi- tion: Depress the clutch pedal or press the accelerator pedal - the engine starts. Engage a suitable gear and continue the journey.
M
The following option is also avail- able on a downhill gradient:
Release the foot brake and let the car move off - the engine starts automatically when the speed exceeds normal walking pace.
M
Release the foot pressure on the foot brake - the engine starts automatically and the journey can continue.
A
A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
Start assistance HSA
The foot brake can also be released on an uphill gradient to start the engine automatically - the HSA function means that the car does not roll backwards.
HSA (Hill Start Assist) means that the pressure in the brake system remains temporarily avail- able while the driver moves his/her foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal for
driving off with the engine having stopped automatically. The temporary braking effect releases after a couple of seconds or when the driver accelerates.
There is more information available on HSA on page 115.
Deactivating the Start/Stop function
In certain situations, it may advisable to temporarily switch off the automatic Start/Stop function - this is carried out by pressing this button once, at which point the button's lamp goes out.
Disengaged Start/Stop function is indicated by the information display's symbol going out and the message Auto Start-Stop OFF being dis- played for a few seconds. The lamp in the but- ton extinguishes at the same time.
The Start/Stop function is disengaged until it is reactivated with the button or until the next time the engine is started with the key.
Limitations
The engine does not auto-stop
Even if the Start/Stop function is activated, the engine does not stop automatically if:
03 Your driving environment
Start/Stop *
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 125
Conditions M/AA
the car has not achieved approx. 5 km/h (= fast walking pace) first after a key start or the last auto-stop.
M + A
the driver has opened the seat- belt's buckle.
M + A
the capacity of the battery is below the minimum permissible level.
M + A
the engine does not have normal operating temperature.
M + A
outside temperature is below freezing point or above approx. 30 C.
M + A
the environment in the passenger compartment differs from the preset valuesB - indicated by the ventilation fan running at a high speed.
M + A
the car is reversed. M + A
battery temperature is below freezing point or above approx. 55 C.
M + A
Conditions M/AA
the driver makes greater steering wheel movements.
M + A
the exhaust system's particulate filter is full - the temporarily dis- engaged Start/Stop function is reactivated once an automatic cleaning cycle has been per- formed (see page 293).
M + A
the road is very steep. M + A
a trailer is connected electrically to the cars electrical system.
M + A
the atmospheric air pressure is less than equivalent to 1500-2400 metres above sea level - the current air pressure varies with the prevailing weather con- ditions.
M + A
adaptive cruise control Queue Assist is activated.
A
Conditions M/AA
the drivers door has been opened with the gear selector in D position.
A
the gear selector is moved out of the D position to S positionC or "+/-".
A
A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox. B Car with ECC. C Sport mode.
The engine auto-starts
An engine that has stopped automatically may restart in some cases without the driver having decided that the journey should continue. In the following cases the engine also starts auto- matically if the driver has not depressed the clutch pedal (manual gearbox) or takes his/her foot off the brake pedal (automatic gearbox):
Conditions M/AA
Misting forms on the windows. M + A
The environment in the passen- ger compartment deviates from the preset valuesB.
M + A
03 Your driving environment
Start/Stop *
03
126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Conditions M/AA
The outside temperature falls below freezing point or exceeds approx. 30 C.
M + A
There is a temporarily high cur- rent take-off or battery capacity drops below the lowest permissi- ble level.
M + A
Repeated pumping of the brake pedal.
M + A
The car starts to roll - faster than the equivalent normal walking pace.
M
The driver's belt lock is opened with the gear selector in D or N position.
A
Steering wheel movements. A
The gear selector is moved from the D position to "+/-" or R.
A
The drivers door is opened with the gear selector in D position.
A
A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
WARNING
Do not open the bonnet when the engine has stopped automatically - the engine may suddenly start automatically. First switch off the engine as normal using the START/ STOP ENGINE button before opening the bonnet.
The engine does not auto-start
In the following cases the engine does not auto-start after having auto-stopped:
Conditions M/AA
A gear is engaged without declutching - a display text prompts the driver to set the gear lever in neutral position in order to enable automatic starting.
M
The driver is unrestrained, the gear selector is in P position and the drivers door is open - a nor- mal engine start must take place.
A
A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
Involuntary engine stop with manual
gearbox
In the event that a start-up fails and the engine stops, proceed as follows:
1. Depress the clutch pedal again - the engine starts automatically.
2. In certain cases the gear lever must be set in neutral position. The information display then shows the text Put gear in neutral
More information and settings
The MY CAR menu system in the car includes instructions which explain parts of the DRIVe concept along with several possible settings and options - see page 204.
03 Your driving environment
Start/Stop *
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 127
Text message
In combination with this indicator lamp the Start/Stop function may dis-
play text messages on the information display for certain situations. For some of them there is a recommended action that should be per-
formed. The following table shows some examples.
Symbol Message Info/Action M/AA
Auto Start-Stop ON Illuminates for a few seconds after Start/Stop has been acti- vated.
M + A
Auto Start-Stop OFF Illuminates for a few seconds after Start/Stop has been switched off.
M + A
Auto Start-Stop Service required Start/Stop is not operational. Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
M + A
Engine management system An automatic function check is carried out. M + A
AUTO-
STOP
Engine in Auto Start The engine is ready to start automatically - waiting for the brake or clutch pedal to be depressed.
M
Press Start button The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button.
M
Depress clutch pedal to start The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the clutch pedal to be depressed.
M
Depress brake pedal to start The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake pedal to be depressed.
M
Press brake and clutch to start The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake or clutch pedal to be depressed.
M
03 Your driving environment
Start/Stop *
03
128 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Symbol Message Info/Action M/AA
Put gear in neutral Gear is engaged without declutching - disengage and set the gear lever in neutral position.
M
AUTO-
STOP
Engine in Auto Start The engine is ready to start automatically - waiting for the brake pedal to be released.
A
Select P or N to start Start/Stop has been deactivated - move the gear selector to N or P position and start the engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button.
A
Press Start button The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button and the gear selector in P or N.
A
A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
If a message does not go out following com- pletion of the action then a workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
03 Your driving environment
Foot brake
03
129
General
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If one brake circuit is damaged then this will mean that the brakes engage at a deeper level and harder pressure on the pedal is needed to produce the normal braking effect.
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted by a brake servo.
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the engine is running.
If the brake is used when the engine is switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and more force must be used to brake the car.
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy load the brakes can be relieved by using engine braking. Engine braking is most efficiently used if the same gear is used downhill as up.
For more general information on heavy loads on the car, see page 372.
Anti-lock braking system
The car is equipped with ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) which prevents the wheels from locking during braking. This means the ability to steer is maintained and it is easier to swerve to avoid a hazard for example. Vibration
may be felt in the brake pedal when this is engaged and this is normal.
A short test of the ABS system is made auto- matically after the engine has been started when the driver releases the brake pedal. A further automatic test of the ABS system may be made when the car reaches 10 km/h. The test may be experienced as pulses in the brake pedal.
Emergency brake lights and automatic
hazard warning flashers
Emergency brake lights are activated to alert vehicles behind about sudden braking. The function means that the brake light flashes instead of - as in normal braking - shining with a constant glow.
Emergency brake lights are activated at speeds above 50 km/h if the ABS system is working and/or in the event of sudden braking. Once the cars speed has been braked to below 10 km/h, the brake light stops flashing and returns to a normal steady shine - hazard warning flashers are activated at the same time, which flash until the driver accelerates the car to at least 20 km/h or they are disabled with their button, see page 92.
Cleaning the brake discs
Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs may result in delayed brake function. This delay is minimised by cleaning the brake linings.
Manual cleaning is advisable with wet road sur- faces, prior to long-stay parking and after the car has been washed. Carry this out by braking gently during a short period while en route.
Emergency Brake Assistance
Emergency Brake Assistance EBA (Emergency Brake Assist) helps to increase brake force and so reduce braking distance. EBA detects the driver's braking style and increases brake force as necessary. The brake force can be rein- forced up to the level when the ABS system is engaged. The EBA function is interrupted when the pressure on the brake pedal is reduced.
NOTE
When EBA is activated the brake pedal low- ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold) the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the brake pedal is released then all braking ceases.
Maintenance
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi- ble, follow the Volvo service intervals as speci-
03 Your driving environment
Foot brake
03
130
fied in the Service and Warranty Booklet, see page 328.
IMPORTANT
The wear on the brake system's compo- nents must be checked regularly.
Contact a workshop for information about the procedure or engage a workshop to carry out the inspection - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols in the combined instrument
panel
Symbol Specification
Constant glow Check the brake fluid level. If the level is low, fill with brake fluid and check for the cause of the brake fluid loss.
Constant glow for 2 seconds when the engine is started There was a fault in the brake system's ABS function when the engine was last running.
WARNING
If and illuminate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake sys- tem.
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is nor- mal at this stage, drive carefully to the near- est workshop and have the brake system checked - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
03
131
General
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when park- ing on a slope - leaving the car in gear, or in P if it has automatic transmission, is not suf- ficient to hold the car in all situations.
The instrument panel's warning symbol.
The lever is located between the front seats.
Applying the parking brake
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2. Pull the lever firmly. > The instrument panels warning symbol
lights up.
NOTE
- The warning symbol in the com- bined instrument panel comes on irrespec- tive of whether the parking brake is applied lightly or hard.
3. Release the foot brake pedal and make sure that the car is at a standstill position.
4. If the vehicle moves then the parking brake lever must be applied at least a little more firmly.
When parking the vehicle, always engage 1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the gear selector in position P (for automatic gearbox).
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked facing uphill:
Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
Disengaging the parking brake
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2. Pull the lever up slightly, press the button, release the lever and release the button. > The instrument panels warning symbol
goes out.
If the driver forgets to release the parking brake in addition to the illuminated warning lamp a pinging sound combined with a message in the instrument panel alerts the driver of this when the car's speed exceeds 10 km/h.
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink *
03
132 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
HomeLink 1 is a programmable remote control which is integrated in the rearview mirror and can remotely control up to three different devi- ces (e.g. garage door opener, alarm system, outdoor lighting and indoor lighting etc.) and in doing so replace their remote controls. In addi- tion to the three programmable buttons, there is also an indicator lamp in the panel. HomeLink cannot be activated when the car is locked from the outside. For more informa- tion on HomeLink , visit: www.homelink.com or ring 00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium rate phone number, +49 6838 907 277).
WARNING
If HomeLink is used to operate a garage door or gate, make sure that there is no-one in the vicinity of the door or gate while it is moving.
The car should remain outside the garage while a garage door opener is being programmed.
Do not use HomeLink for any garage door that does not have safety stop and safety reverse.
Save the original remote controls for future programming (e.g. when changing to another car or for use in another vehicle). It is also rec- ommended that the programming for the but- tons is deleted if the car is sold. See the section "Resetting the HomeLink buttons" on page 133.
Programming HomeLink
NOTE
In certain vehicles the ignition must be switched on or in "accessory position" before HomeLink can be programmed or used. If possible, fit new batteries in the remote control that shall be replaced by HomeLink for faster programming and improved transmission of the radio signal. The HomeLink buttons should be reset before programming. When this has been done HomeLink is set in "learn mode" and ready for programming.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator lamp flashes yel- low. This indicates that the button is ready for programming.
2. Aim the original remote control towards the HomeLink button to be programmed and hold it 5-30 cm from the button. Do not obstruct the indicator lamp on HomeLink .
3. Press and hold the button on the original remote control. Do not release the button until the indicator lamp has changed from a yellow light to either red or green. If the indicator lamp is red make a new attempt
1 HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink *
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 133
to program the remote control, holding the original remote control at a different dis- tance from the HomeLink button. A green light indicates that programming was suc- cessful.
4. Depress the HomeLink button being
programmed, hold it depressed for
5 seconds and then release it. Repeat if necessary until the garage door is acti- vated. If the door is not activated, press the programmed HomeLink button and hold it depressed and check the indicator lamp. > Steady green light: The indicator lamp
illuminates with a constant glow when the button is kept depressed, this indi- cates that the programming is com-
plete. The garage door, gate or similar should now be activated when the pro- grammed HomeLink button is depressed.
Flashing green light: The indicator lamp flashes while the button is held depressed. In which case, continue with the programming steps 5-7 in order to complete the programming of a device with rolling code (usually a garage door opener).
5. Locate the "programming button2" on the receiver for the garage door for example, normally located close to the antenna's bracket on the receiver.
6. Depress and release the receiver's "pro- gramming button". The button flashes for approx. 30 seconds and the next step must be carried out within this period.
7. While the receiver's "programming button" is still flashing, press the button on HomeLink being programmed and hold it depressed for approx. 3 seconds and then release it. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence up to 3 times to conclude the programming.
Operation
When HomeLink is fully programmed it can be used in place of the separate original remote controls.
Press and hold the programmed button3 until the garage door, alarm system, etc. is activated (may take several seconds). Naturally the orig- inal remote controls can still be used in parallel with HomeLink if required.
NOTE
If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink will work for 30 minutes after the driver's door has been opened.
If programming problems persist, contact HomeLink on: www.homelink.com or ring 00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium rate phone number +49 6838 907 277).
Resetting the HomeLink buttons
It is only possible to reset all of the HomeLink buttons at the same time, not each button individually. However, individual but- tons can be reprogrammed, see the following section "Programming individual buttons".
1. Press and hold the two outer buttons on HomeLink . Do not release them until the indicator lamp has changed from a yellow light to either red or green.
2. Release the buttons. > HomeLink is now set in so-called
"learn mode" and is ready to be reprog- rammed, see section "Programming HomeLink" on page 132.
2 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer. 3 The indicator lamp remains lit while the button is held depressed.
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink *
03
134 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Programming individual buttons
To reprogram an individual HomeLink button, proceed as follows:
1. Depress the required button and do not
release.
2. When the indicator lamp on HomeLink starts to flash yellow (after about 10 sec- onds), release the button and start with step 2 of section "Programming Home- Link" on page 132.
For more information or to leave comments about HomeLink , visit: www.homelink.com or ring 00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium rate phone number +49 6838 907 277).
03 Your driving environment
03
135
G 00 00 00
136 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
DSTC Stability and traction control system....................................... 138 Road sign information - RSI*................................................................ 141 Speed limiter*........................................................................................ 143 Cruise control*...................................................................................... 145 Adaptive cruise control*........................................................................ 147 Distance Warning*................................................................................. 158 City Safety......................................................................................... 161 Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*................ 167 Driver Alert System*.............................................................................. 175 Driver Alert System - DAC*................................................................... 176 Driver Alert System - Lane Keeping Aid*.............................................. 180 Park assist syst*.................................................................................... 184 Park assist camera*.............................................................................. 187 Park Assist Pilot - PAP*........................................................................ 190 BLIS and CTA*...................................................................................... 194
DRIVER SUPPORT
04 Driver support
DSTC Stability and traction control system
04
138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on DSTC
The stability and traction control system, DSTC (Dynamic Stability & Traction Control) helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's traction.
The activation of the system during braking may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The car may accelerate slower than expected when the accelerator pedal is depressed.
WARNING
The stability and traction control system is a supplementary function - it cannot handle all situations in all road conditions.
The driver always bears responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable road traffic rules and regu- lations are followed.
Active Yaw Control
The function limits the driving and brake force of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the car.
Spin Control
The function reduces engine power if the drive wheels slip against the underlying surface in order to maintain stability and traction.
Traction control system
The function is active at low speed and trans- fers power from the driving wheel that is spin- ning to the one that is not.
Engine drag control - EDC
EDC (Engine Drag Control) prevents involun- tary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or engine braking when driving in low gears on slippery road surfaces.
Involuntary wheel locking while driving can, amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to steer the car.
Corner Traction Control CTC
CTC compensates for understeer and allows higher than normal acceleration in a bend with- out wheelspin on the inner wheel, e.g. on an arcing motorway entrance road to quickly reach the prevailing traffic speed.
Driver Steering Recommendation DSR
DSR (Driver Steering Recommendation) helps the driver steer the car in the right direction when there is reduced traction or when the ABS system engages.
The primary role of the DSR function is to help the driver steer in the right direction when the car is skidding.
DSR engages by applying slight torque to the steering wheel in the direction in which the car
should be steered to maintain/achieve maxi- mum possible traction and stabilise the car.
Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA
The function serves to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it begins to snake, see page 299.
NOTE
The function is deactivated if the driver selects Sport mode.
Operation
Selection of level - Sport mode
The DSTC system is always activated - it can- not be deactivated.
However, the driver can select the Sport mode, which allows for a more active driving experi- ence. In Sport mode the system detects whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements and cornering are more active than in normal driving and then allows controlled skidding with the rear section up to a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the car.
If the driver stops a controlled skid by releasing the accelerator pedal then the DSTC system intervenes and stabilises the car.
04 Driver support
DSTC Stability and traction control system
04
139
With Sport mode, maximum traction is obtained if the car has become stuck, or when driving on a loose surface - e.g. sand or deep snow.
Proceed as follows to select Sport mode:
1. Press the centre console button MY CAR
and search in the display screen's menu system and locate My V40 DSTC. (For information on the menu system, see page 203).
2. Uncheck the box and back out of the menu system with EXIT.
> The system then allows a more sporty driving style.
The Sport mode is active until the driver dese- lects it or until the engine is switched off - after the engine is started the next time the DSTC system is back in its normal mode again.
Symbols and messages in the display
SymbolA Message Specification
DSTC Temporarily OFF DSTC system temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature. - The function is reac- tivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.
DSTC Service required DSTC system disengaged.
Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
and
"Message" There is a message on the speedometer's display - Read it!
Constant glow for 2 seconds. System check when the engine is started.
04 Driver support
DSTC Stability and traction control system
04
140
SymbolA Message Specification
Flashing light. DSTC system is being activated.
Sport mode is activated.
A The symbols are schematic.
04 Driver support
Road sign information - RSI*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 141
General information on RSI
Examples of readable speed related1 signs.
The Road sign information function (RSI Road Sign Information) helps the driver to remember which road signs the car has passed through information on - among other things - the cur- rent speed, the start/end of a motorway or road, and when overtaking is prohibited.
If a sign for both a motorway/road for motor- ised traffic and a sign showing the maximum permitted speed are passed, RSI decides to show the sign symbol for maximum permitted speed.
WARNING
RSI does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsi- bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable road traffic rules and regulations are followed.
Operation
Recorded speed information.
When RSI has recorded a road sign with an imposed speed, the sign is displayed as a sym- bol on the instrument panel.
Together with the symbol for the current speed limit, a sign showing that overtaking is prohibited may also be dis- played where appropriate.
Additional signs
Examples of additional signs1.
Sometimes different speed limits are signpos- ted for the same road - an additional sign then indicates the circumstances under which the different speeds apply. The road section may be particularly susceptible to accidents in rain and/or fog, for example.
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed only if the windscreen wipers are in use.
1 Road signs which are displayed in the instrument panel are dependent on the market - the illustration shows examples only.
04 Driver support
Road sign information - RSI*
04
142 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The speed applicable on an exit is indicated by means of an additional sign containing an arrow. The arrow is dis- played under the symbol showing the speed.
Speed signs linked to this type of additional sign are displayed only if the driver is using the direction indicator.
Limited distance or time of day
Some speeds are applicable only after a specific distance or at a certain time of day. The driver's attention is drawn to the situation by means of an empty frame under the sym- bol showing the speed.
Setting in MY CAR
Options in MY CAR.
The instrument panels speed symbol display can be disabled. To deactivate the RSI func- tion:
Uncheck the option in MY CAR Settings
Car settings Road Sign
Information and go back out of the menu by pressing EXIT, see page 205.
Speed warning
The driver can opt to receive a warning (Speed Alert) when the applicable speed limit is excee- ded by 5 km/h or more. This warning is given by the symbol showing the applicable maxi- mum speed temporarily flashing when this speed is exceeded.
To activate speed warning:
Check speed warning in MY CAR
Settings Car settings Speed alert
and go back out of the menu by pressing EXIT, see page 205.
Limitations
The RSI function's camera sensor is limited - just like the human eye. Find out more about this on page 171.
Signs which indirectly provide information on a prevailing speed limit, e.g. name signs for towns/districts, are not recorded by the RSI function.
Here are some other examples of what can disrupt the function:
Faded signs
Signs positioned on bends
Rotated or damaged signs
Concealed or poorly positioned signs
Signs completely or partly covered with frost, snow and/or dirt.
04 Driver support
Speed limiter*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 143
General information on the speed limiter
A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre-selected/set speed by the speed limiter.
Operation
Steering wheel keypad and instrument panel (Dig- ital or Analogue).
Speed limiter - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.
Standby mode
Activate and adjust the max. speed.
Selected speed
Speed limiter active
Switch on and activate
When the speed limiter is active, its symbol (6) is displayed in combination with a mark (5) by the set maximum speed in the display.
Selection and storage of the highest possible speed in the memory can be made both during a journey and while stationary.
While driving
1. Press the steering wheel button to switch on the speed limiter. > The symbol (6) for the speed limiter is
illuminated on the instrument panel dis- play.
2. When the car is moving at the desired high- est possible speed: Press one of the steer- ing wheel buttons or until the instru- ment panel display shows a mark (5) next to the desired maximum speed. > The speed limiter is then active and the
selected max. speed is stored in the memory.
When stationary
1. Press the steering wheel button to switch on the speed limiter.
2. Scroll with the button until the instru- ment panel display shows a mark (5) next to the desired maximum speed. > The speed limiter is then active and the
selected max. speed is stored in the memory.
Changing the speed
To change the stored speed:
Adjust with short presses on or - every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last presses made are stored in the memory.
To adjust +/- 1 km/h:
Hold down the button and release it when the instrument panels display shows a mark (5) next to the desired maximum speed.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
To temporarily deactivate the speed limiter and set it in standby mode:
Press .
> The display mark (5) changes colour from GREEN to WHITE (Digital) or from WHITE to GREY (Analogue) and the driver can temporarily exceed the set maximum speed.
04 Driver support
Speed limiter*
04
144 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The speed limiter is reactivated with one press on . The mark (5) in the display then changes colour from WHITE to GREEN (Digital) or GREY to WHITE (Analogue) and the car's maximum speed is limited again.
Temporary deactivation with the
accelerator pedal
The speed limiter can also be set in standby mode with the accelerator pedal, e.g. for rap- idly accelerating the car out of a situation:
Depress the accelerator pedal fully. > The display shows the stored maximum
speed with a coloured mark (5) and the driver can temporarily exceed the set maximum speed the display mark (5) changes colour from GREEN to WHITE (Digital) or WHITE to GREY (Analogue) during that time.
The speed limiter is automatically re- activated after the accelerator pedal is released and the car's speed is slowed down to below the selected/stored maximum speed - the mark (5) in the display changes colour from WHITE to GREEN (Digital) or GREY to WHITE (Analogue) and the car's maximum speed is again limited.
Alarm for speed exceeded
On steep roads the engine braking effect may be inadequate and the selected maximum speed exceeded. The driver is alerted about this with an acoustic signal.
The signal is active until the driver has slowed to below the selected maximum speed.
NOTE
The alarm is only activated after 5 seconds if the speed has been exceeded by at least 3 km/h provided that none of the buttons
or has been depressed during the last half minute.
Deactivate
To deactivate the speed limiter:
Press the steering wheel button .
> The display's speed limiter symbol (6) and the set speed mark (5) are cleared. The selected and stored speed are thus deleted from the memory and cannot be resumed with the button.
The driver can then use the accelerator pedal to choose a speed without limita- tion.
04 Driver support
Cruise control*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 145
General information on CC
The cruise control (CC Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in more relaxing driving on motorways and long, straight roads with regular traffic flows.
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed and/or suitable distance.
The driver always bears ultimate responsi- bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.
Operation
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars without speed limiter1.
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars with speed limiter1.
Cruise control - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.
Standby mode
Activate and adjust the speed.
Selected speed (GREY = Standby mode).
Cruise control active - WHITE symbol (GREY = Standby mode).
Activating and setting the speed
To enable cruise control:
Press the steering wheel button
1 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
04 Driver support
Cruise control*
04
146 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
> Symbol (6) in the display changes from GREY to WHITE and shows that the cruise control is in standby mode.
To activate cruise control:
At the required speed - press the steering wheel button or .
> The current speed is stored in the memory and the display dot (5) comes on at the selected speed.
NOTE
Cruise Control cannot be enabled at speeds below 30 km/h.
Changing the speed
To change the stored speed:
Adjust with short presses on or - every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last presses made are stored in the memory.
To adjust +/- 1 km/h:
Hold down the button and release it at the required speed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accel- erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the cruise control setting - the car returns to the set speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
NOTE
If any of the Cruise Control buttons are held depressed for several minutes then it is blocked and deactivated. To be able to reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be stopped and the engine restarted.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
To temporarily disengage cruise control and set it in standby mode:
Press .
> The display dot (5) and symbol (6) change colour from WHITE to GREY.
Automatic standby mode
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set in standby mode if:
wheels lose traction
the foot brake is used
speed falls below approx. 30 km/h
the clutch pedal is depressed
the gear selector is moved to neutral posi- tion (automatic gearbox)
the driver maintains a speed higher than the set speed for longer than 1 minute.
The driver must then regulate the speed.
Resume set speed
To reactivate the cruise control from standby mode:
Press the steering wheel button .
> The display dot (5) and symbol (6) change colour from GREY to WHITE and the speed is then set to the last speed stored.
NOTE
A marked speed increase may occur once the speed has been resumed by selecting
.
Deactivate
The cruise control is switched off with the steering wheel button (1) or by switching off the engine - the set speed is deleted from the memory and cannot be resumed with the button.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 147
General information on ACC
The adaptive cruise control (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. Adaptive cruise control provides a more relaxing driving experience on long journeys on motorways and long straight main roads in smooth traffic flows.
The driver sets the desired speed and time interval to the car in front. When the radar detector detects a slower vehicle in front of the car, the speed is automatically adapted to that. When the road is clear again the car returns to the selected speed.
If the adaptive cruise control is switched off or set to the standby mode and the car comes too close to a vehicle in front, then the driver is warned instead by Distance Warning (see page 158) about the short distance.
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable dis- tance.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all traffic, weather and road conditions.
Read the whole of this section for informa- tion on the limitations of the adaptive cruise control. The driver must be familiar with this information before using the adaptive cruise control.
The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the correct distance and speed, even when the adaptive cruise control is being used.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control components must only be performed at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Automatic gearbox
Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced functionality with the adaptive cruise control's Queue Assistant, see page 152.
Function
Function overview1.
Warning lamp - braking by driver required
Steering wheel keypad
Radar sensor
Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise control system and a coordinated spacing sys- tem.
1 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may differ depending on car model.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
04
148 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver must inter- vene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals, and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehi- cles and objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/ snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads.
The distance to the vehicle ahead is mainly measured by a radar sensor. Cruise control regulates the speed with acceleration and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low sound when they are being used by the adap- tive cruise control.
WARNING
The brake pedal moves when Cruise Con- trol brakes. Do not rest your foot beneath the brake pedal as it may become trapped.
The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval set by the driver. If the radar sensor cannot see any vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain the cruise control's set speed. This also happens if the speed of the vehicle in front exceeds the cruise control's set speed.
The adaptive cruise control aims to control the speed in a smooth way. In situations that demand sudden braking the driver must brake himself/herself. This applies with large differ- ences in speed, or if the vehicle in front brakes heavily. Due to limitations in the radar sensor, braking may come unexpectedly or not at all, see page 154.
The adaptive cruise control can be activated to follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h2 up to 200 km/h. If the speed falls below 30 km/h or if the engine speed becomes too low, the cruise control is set in standby mode at which automatic braking ceases - the driver must then take over himself/herself to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead.
Warning lamp - braking by driver
required
Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity that is equivalent to more than 40% of the car's braking capacity.
If the car needs to be braked more heavily than cruise control capacity and the driver does not brake, then the cruise control uses the collision warning system's warning lamp and warning sound (see figure on page 167) to alert the driver that immediate intervention is required.
NOTE
The warning lamp may be difficult to see in strong sunlight or when wearing sun- glasses.
WARNING
Cruise Control warns only of vehicles which the radar sensor has detected. Hence the warning may not be given, or it may be given with a certain delay. Do not wait for a warn- ing without braking when so required.
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is primarily intended for use when driving on level road surfaces. It may have difficulty in keeping the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes, with a heavy load or with a trailer - in which case, be extra attentive and ready to slow down.
2 Queue Assistant (in cars with automatic gearbox) can operate in the range of 0-200 km/h, see page 152.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149
Operation
The design of the steering wheel keypad differs depending on whether the car is equipped with the speed limiter3.
WITH speed limiter
Cruise control - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.
Standby mode
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Activate and adjust the speed.
Green marking at stored speed (WHITE = standby mode).
Time distance
ACC is active at the GREEN symbol (WHITE = standby mode).
WITHOUT speed limiter
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.
Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode.
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Activate and adjust the speed.
(Not used)
Green marking at stored speed (WHITE = standby mode).
Time distance
ACC is active at the GREEN symbol (WHITE = standby mode).
Activating and setting the speed
To enable cruise control:
Press the steering wheel button - a sim- ilar WHITE symbol comes on in the display (6) which shows the cruise control is in standby mode.
To activate cruise control:
At the required speed - press the steering wheel button or .
> The current speed is stored in the memory, the display shows a "magnifying glass" around the selected speed for a second or so and its marking (6) changes from WHITE to GREEN.
When this display symbol changes colour from WHITE to GREEN, the
cruise control is active and the car maintains the stored speed.
3 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
04
150 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Only when the display shows a picture of another vehicle is the distance to the vehicle in front controlled by the cruise control.
At the same time a speed range is marked:
the higher speed with GREEN marking (6) is the pre- programmed speed
the lower speed is the speed of the car in front.
Changing the speed
To change the stored speed:
Adjust with short presses on or - every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last presses made are stored in the memory.
If speed is increased using the accelerator pedal prior to pressing the / button, then it is the car's current speed when the button is pressed that is stored in the cruise control.
To adjust +/- 1 km/h:
Hold down the button and release it at the required speed.
NOTE
If any of the Cruise Control buttons are held depressed for several minutes then it is blocked and deactivated. To be able to reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be stopped and the engine restarted.
In certain situations, cruise control cannot be activated. Then the display shows Cruise control Unavailable, see page 156.
Set time interval
Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the display as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the longer the time interval. One line corre- sponds to
approximately 1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines approximately 3 seconds.
To set/change the time distance:
Turn the steering wheel button set's thumbwheel (or use the / buttons for cars without Speed limiters).
At low speed, when the distances are short, the adaptive cruise control increases the time interval slightly.
The adaptive cruise control allows the time interval to vary noticeably in certain situations in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front smoothly and comfortably.
Note that a short time interval only allows the driver a short time to react and take action if any unforeseen traffic problem should arise.
The same symbol is also shown when Distance Warning is activated, see page 158.
NOTE
Only use the time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations.
If Cruise Control does not appear to react when activated, this may be because the time distance to the car in front is preventing an increase in speed.
The higher the speed the longer the calcu- lated distance in metres for a given time interval.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
To temporarily disengage cruise control and set it in standby mode:
Press the steering wheel button
This display symbol and stored speed marking then changes colour from GREEN to WHITE.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151
Keypad without Speed limiter*
To temporarily disengage cruise control and set it in standby mode:
Press the steering wheel button .
Standby mode due to driver intervention
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set automatically in standby mode if:
the foot brake is used
the clutch pedal is depressed for longer than 1 minute4
the gear selector is moved to N position (automatic gearbox)
the driver maintains a speed higher than the set speed for longer than 1 minute.
The driver must then regulate the speed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accel- erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the cruise control setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Automatic standby mode
The adaptive cruise control is dependent on other systems, such as DSTC (see page 138).
If any of these systems stop working then cruise control is automatically deactivated.
In the event of automatic deactivation a signal will sound and the message Cruise control
Cancelled is shown in the display. The driver must then intervene and adapt the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.
An automatic deactivation can be due to:
the driver opens the door
the driver takes off his seatbelt
engine speed is too low/high
speed falls below 30 km/h5
wheels lose traction
brake temperature is high
the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).
Resume set speed
Cruise control in standby mode is re-activated with one press on the steering wheel button
- the speed is then set to the last stored speed.
NOTE
A marked speed increase may occur once the speed has been resumed by selecting
.
Overtaking another vehicle
When the car is following another vehicle and the driver indicates an impending overtake with the direction indicator6, the cruise control helps to briefly accelerate the car towards the vehicle in front.
This function is active at speeds above 70 km/h.
WARNING
Be aware that this function can be activated in more situations other than during over- taking, e.g. when a direction indicator is used to indicate a change of lane or exit to another road - the car will then accelerate briefly.
Deactivate
Keypad with Speed limiter
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged with a short press of the steering wheel button .
4 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode. 5 Does not apply to a car with Queue Assistant - it manages right down to stationary. 6 On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
04
152 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The set speed is cleared and cannot be resumed with the button.
Keypad without Speed limiter
A short press on the steering wheel button sets cruise control to standby mode. With
a further short press the cruise control is deac- tivated. The set speed is cleared and cannot be resumed with the button.
Switch from ACC to CC
A button press can be used to deactivate the adaptive element (spacing system) in the cruise control, the car then only following the set speed.
Hold down the steering wheel button - the displays symbol changes from to
.
> This activates the standard cruise control CC (Cruise Control), see page 145.
WARNING
The car no longer brakes automatically after switching from ACC to CC - it merely follows the set speed.
Switch from CC back to ACC
Deactivate CC with 1-2 presses on as described under the heading "Switch off Key-
pad without speed limiter". ACC will be acti- vated the next time the system is switched on.
Queue Assistant
In cars with automatic gearbox the adaptive cruise control is supplemented with the Queue Assist function (also referred to as "Queue Assist").
Queue Assistant has the following functions:
Extended speed range - also below 30 km/ h and at standstill
Change of target
Automatic braking ceases when stationary
Note that the lowest programmable speed for the cruise control is 30 km/h - even though the cruise control is capable of following another vehicle down to a standstill, a lower speed cannot be selected.
Extended speed range
NOTE
In order to activate the cruise control the driver's door must be closed and the driver must be wearing the seatbelt.
With an automatic gearbox, the cruise control can follow another vehicle within the range 0-200 km/h.
NOTE
Activation of the cruise control below 30 km/h requires a vehicle in front within a reasonable distance.
For shorter stops in connection with inching in slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is auto- matically resumed if the stops do not exceed about 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the car in front starts moving again then the cruise control is set in standby mode with automatic braking. The driver must then re-activate the cruise control in one of the following ways:
Press the steering wheel button .
or
Depress the accelerator pedal.
> The cruise control will then resume follow- ing the vehicle in front.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 153
NOTE
Queue Assist can keep the car stationary for a maximum of 4 minutes - then the brakes release.
See more information under the header below, "Cessation of automatic braking when stationary".
Change of target
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there may be stationary traffic in front.
When the cruise control is following another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h and changes target from a moving to a stationary vehicle, the cruise control will slow down for the stationary vehicle.
WARNING
When the cruise control is following another vehicle at speeds in excess of 30 km/h and the target is changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the cruise control will ignore the stationary vehicle and instead select the stored speed.
The driver must intervene him/herself and brake.
Automatic standby mode with change of
target
Cruise control is disengaged and set in standby mode:
when the speed is below 5 km/h and cruise control is not sure whether the target object is a stationary vehicle or some other object, e.g. a speed bump.
when the speed is below 5 km/h and the vehicle in front turns off so the cruise con- trol no longer has a vehicle to follow.
Termination of automatic braking at a
standstill
In the following situations, Queue Assist stops automatic braking at a standstill:
the driver opens the door
the driver takes off his seatbelt
This means that the brakes are released and the car will start to roll - the driver must there- fore intervene and brake the car himself in order to maintain its position.
IMPORTANT
Queue Assist can keep the car stationary for a maximum of 4 minutes - then the brakes release.
The driver's attention is drawn to this over several stages, with increasing intensity:
1. Acoustic alarm (pinging) and text mes- sage.
2. A warning lamp in the windscreen also starts to flash.
3. "Stabbing" braking occurs.
Queue Assist releases the foot brake and is set to standby mode in these situations as well:
the driver puts his/her foot on the brake pedal
the gear selector is moved to P, N or R position
the driver sets the cruise control in standby mode
the parking brake is applied.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
04
154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The radar sensor and its limitations
The radar sensor is used - apart from by Adap- tive cruise control - by the following functions as well:
Collision Warning with Auto Brake, see page 167
Distance Warning, see page 158.
The function of the radar sensor is to detect cars or larger vehicles in the same direction, in the same lane.
Modification of the radar sensor could result in it being illegal to use.
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable dis- tance.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all traffic, weather and road conditions.
Read the whole of this section for informa- tion on the limitations of the adaptive cruise control. The driver must be familiar with this information before using the adaptive cruise control.
The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the correct distance and speed, even when the adaptive cruise control is being used.
WARNING
Accessories or other objects such as auxil- iary lamps must not be fitted in front of the grille.
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver must inter- vene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals, and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehi- cles and objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/ snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads.
The capacity of the radar sensor to detect vehi- cles in front is reduced significantly:
if the radar sensor becomes blocked and cannot detect other vehicles e.g. in heavy rain or slush, or if other objects have col- lected in front of the radar sensor.
NOTE
Keep the area in front of the radar sensor clean - see the "Maintenance" page 170
if the speed of vehicles in front is signifi- cantly different from your own speed.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 155
Examples where the cruise control does
not work optimally
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In some situations another vehicle is not detected, or the detection is made later than expected.
ACC field of vision.
Sometimes the radar sensor is late at detecting vehicles at close distances, e.g. a vehicle that drives in between the car and vehicles in front.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane can remain undetected.
In bends the radar sensor may detect the wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from view.
Fault tracing and action
If the display shows the message Radar
blocked See manual this means that the radar signals from the radar sensor are blocked and that vehicles in front of the car could not be detected.
In turn this means that - apart from Adaptive Cruise Control - Distance Warning and Colli- sion Warning with Auto Brake functions are not operating either.
The following table presents possible causes for a message being shown along with the appropriate action.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
04
156 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Cause Action
The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.
Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals. No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar sig- nals.
No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy road surface.
The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains. Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer blocked.
Symbols and messages in the display
SymbolA Message Specification
The symbol is WHITE Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.
The symbol is GREEN The car maintains the stored speed.
Standard cruise control is selected manually.
DSTC Normal to enable Cruise The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated until DSTC has been set to Normal position - see page 138.
Cruise control Cancelled The adaptive cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed him- self.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 157
SymbolA Message Specification
Cruise control Unavailable The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.
This could be due to:
brake temperature is high
the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.
Radar blocked See manual The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
The driver can then choose to switch to ordinary Cruise control (CC), see page 152 - a display text provides information on appropriate alternatives.
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 154.
Cruise control Service required The adaptive cruise control is disengaged.
Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Press Brake To hold + acoustic alarm + warning light in windscreen + "pulling" brakes
(Only with Queue Assistant)
The car is at a standstill and the adaptive cruise control will release the foot brake, which is why the car may start rolling soon.
The driver must brake himself/herself. The message remains and the alarm sounds until the driver depresses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal.
Below 30 km/h Only following
(Only with Queue Assistant)
Shown with attempts to activate the adaptive cruise control at speeds below 30 km/h without a vehicle in front within the activation distance (approx. 30 metres).
A The symbols are schematic.
04 Driver support
Distance Warning*
04
158 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a function that informs the driver about the time interval to vehicles in front.
Distance Warning is active at speeds above 30 km/h and only reacts to vehicles driving in front of the car, in the same direction. No dis- tance information is provided for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles.
Orange warning lamp1.
An orange warning lamp in the windscreen illu- minates with a constant glow if the distance to the vehicle in front is shorter than the set time interval.
NOTE
Distance warning is deactivated during the time the adaptive cruise control is active.
WARNING
Distance warning only reacts if the distance to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the pre- set value - the speed of the driver's vehicle is not affected.
Operation
Press the button in the centre console to switch the function on or off. The function is switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the button.
Some combinations of the selected equipment leave no vacant space for a button in the centre console - in which case the function is handled by the car's menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings Distance Alert. For a description of the menu system - see page 203.
Set time interval
Controls and display for time interval.
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Time interval - On (during adjustment).
1 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
04 Driver support
Distance Warning*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159
Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the display as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the longer the time interval. One line corre- sponds to
approximately 1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines approximately 3 seconds.
The same symbol is also shown when adaptive cruise control is activated.
NOTE
The higher the speed the longer the calcu- lated distance in metres for a given time interval.
The set time interval is also used by the Adaptive Cruise Control function, see page 147.
Only use the time interval permitted by the local traffic regulations.
Limitations
The function uses the same radar sensor as adaptive cruise control and the collision warn- ing system. For more information on the radar sensor and its limitations, see page 154.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia- tions in light intensity, as well as wearing sunglasses, could mean that the warning light in the windscreen cannot be seen.
Poor weather or winding roads could affect the radar sensor's capacity to detect vehi- cles in front.
The size of other vehicles could also affect detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This could mean that the warning lamp illumi- nates at a shorter distance than the setting or that the warning is temporarily absent.
Extremely high speeds can also cause the lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than that set due to limitations in sensor range.
04 Driver support
Distance Warning*
04
160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Symbols and messages in the display
SymbolA Message Specification
Radar blocked See manual Distance Warning temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 154.
Collision warn. Service required Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake fully or partially disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A The symbols are schematic.
04 Driver support
City Safety
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161
General
City Safety is a function for helping the driver to avoid a collision when driving in queues, amongst other things, when changes in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in atten- tion, could lead to an incident.
The function is active at speeds under 50 km/h and it helps the driver by automatically braking the car in the event of imminent risk of collision with vehicles in front, should the driver not react in time by braking and/or steering away.
City Safety is activated in situations where the driver should have started braking earlier, which is why it cannot help the driver in every situation.
City Safety is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention.
City Safety must not be used as an excuse for the driver to change his/her driving style. If the driver solely relies on City Safety to do the braking, there will be a collision sooner or later.
The driver or passengers normally only notice City Safety if a situation arises where the car is extremely close to being in a collision.
If the car is also equipped with a Collision Warning function with Auto Brake*, these two systems complement each other. For more information on Collision Warning function with Auto Brake, see page 167.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance and replacement of City Safety components must only be per- formed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
WARNING
City Safety does not engage in all driving situations or traffic, weather or road condi- tions.
City Safety does not react to vehicles driving in a different direction from the car, to small vehicles, motorcycles and bicycles or to humans and animals.
City Safety can prevent collision at a speed difference of less than 15 km/h - at a higher speed difference, it is only possible to reduce collision speed. In order to obtain full brake function, the driver must depress the brake pedal.
Never wait for City Safety to engage. The driver always bears responsibility for main- taining the proper distance and speed.
Function
Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window1.
City Safety detects the traffic in front of the car with a laser sensor fitted in the top edge of the windscreen. If there is an imminent risk of collision, City Safety will automatically brake the car, which may be experienced as sudden braking.
If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h in relation to the vehicle in front then City Safety can completely prevent a collision.
City Safety activates a short, sharp braking and stops the car in normal circumstances, just behind the vehicle in front. For most drivers this is well outside normal driving style and may be experienced as being uncomfortable.
1 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
04 Driver support
City Safety
04
162
If the difference in speed between the vehicles is greater than 15 km/h then City Safety may not prevent the collision on its own. To obtain full brake force, the driver must depress the brake pedal. This could then make it possible to prevent a collision, even at speed differen- ces above 15 km/h.
When the function is activated and brakes, the instrument panel display shows a message to the effect that the function is/has been active.
NOTE
When City Safety brakes, the brake lights come on.
Operation
NOTE
The City Safety function is always ena- bled after the engine has been started via key position I and II (see page 79 on key positions).
On and Off
In certain situations, it may advisable to disable City Safety, e.g. where leafy branches could sweep over the bonnet and/or windscreen.
After starting the engine City Safety can be deactivated as follows:
Using MY CAR on the centre console dis- play screen with its menu system, search and locate Settings Car settings
Driver support systems City Safety. Select the Off option. For more information on the menu system MY CAR, see page 203.
However, the function will be enabled the next time the engine is started, regardless of whether the system was enabled or dis- abled when the engine was switched off.
WARNING
The laser sensor emits laser light even when City Safety is disabled manually.
To enable City Safety again:
Follow the same procedure as for disa- bling, but select the On option.
Limitations
The sensor in City Safety is designed to detect cars and other large vehicles in front of the car irrespective of whether it is day or night.
The sensor has limitations. It does not work as well or does not work at all in e.g. heavy snowfall or rain, dense fog, dust storms or bliz- zards. Mist, dirt, ice or snow on the windscreen may disrupt the function.
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for projecting load, or accessories such as auxili- ary lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bonnet limit the function.
The laser light from the sensor in City Safety measures how the light is reflected. The sensor cannot detect objects with low reflection capacity. The rear sections of the vehicle generally reflect the light sufficiently thanks to the number plate and rear light reflec- tors.
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended, which may reduce the capacity of City Safety to avoid a collision. In such sit- uations the ABS and DSTC systems will pro- vide best possible braking force with main- tained stability.
When your own car is reversing, City Safety is temporarily deactivated.
City Safety is not activated at low speeds - under 4 km/h, which is why the system does not intervene in situations where a vehicle in front is being approached very slowly, e.g. when parking.
Driver commands are always prioritised, which is why City Safety does not intervene in sit- uations where the driver is steering or acceler- ating in a clear manner, even if a collision is unavoidable.
04 Driver support
City Safety
04
163
When City Safety has prevented a collision with a stationary object the car remains sta- tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving, then speed is reduced to the same speed as that maintained by the vehicle in front.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops when City Safety has stopped the car, unless the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal beforehand.
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the laser sensor free from ice, snow and dirt (see the illustration for sensor loca- tion, page 161).
Do not affix or mount anything on the windscreen in front of the laser sensor
Remove ice and snow from the bonnet - snow and ice must not exceed a height of 5 cm.
Fault tracing and action
If the message Windscreen Sensors
blocked is shown on the instrument panel dis- play, it indicates that the laser sensor is blocked and cannot detect vehicles in front of the car. This means that City Safety is not operational.
The Windscreen Sensors blocked message is not shown for all situations in which the laser sensor is blocked. The driver must therefore be diligent about keeping the windscreen and area in front of the laser sensor clean.
The following table presents possible causes for the message being shown, along with sug- gestions for appropriate action.
Cause Action
The windscreen sur- face in front of the laser sensor is dirty or covered with ice or snow.
Clean the wind- screen surface in front of the sensor from dirt, ice and snow.
The laser sensor field of vision is blocked.
Remove the block- ing object.
IMPORTANT
If there are cracks, scratches or stone chips in the windscreen in front of either of the laser sensor's "windows" and they cover a surface of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm (or larger), then a workshop must be contacted for repair or replacement of the windscreen (see the illustration for sensor location, page 161) - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- ommended.
Failure to take action may result in reduced performance for City Safety.
To avoid the risk of reducing City Safety performance the following also applies:
Before replacing a windscreen, contact an authorised Volvo workshop to verify that the correct windscreen is ordered and fitted. Using the wrong windscreen may result in the City Safety function failing to operate or operating incor- rectly.
The same type or Volvo-approved windscreen wipers must be fitted during replacement.
04 Driver support
City Safety
04
164
Laser sensor
The City Safety function includes a sensor which transmits laser light. Contact a qualified workshop in the event of a fault or if the laser sensor needs servicing - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. It is absolutely essential to follow the prescribed instructions when handling the laser sensor.
The following two labels are affixed directly on the laser sensor unit:
The upper label in the figure describes the laser beam's classification:
Laser radiation - Do not look into the laser beam with optical instruments - Class 1M laser product.
The lower label in the figure describes the physical data of the laser beam:
IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with FDA (U.S. Food Administration) stand- ards for laser product design with the exception of deviations in accordance with "Laser Notice No. 50" from 26 July 2001.
Radiation data for the laser sensor
The following table specifies the laser sensor's physical data.
Maximum pulse energy 2.64 J
Maximum average output 45 mW
Pulse duration 33 ns
Divergence (horizontal x verti- cal)
28 12
WARNING
If any of these instructions are not followed then there is a risk of eye injury!
Never look into the laser sensor (which emits spreading invisible laser radiation) at a distance of 100 mm or closer with magnifying optics such as a magnifying glass, microscope, lens or similar opti- cal instruments.
Testing, repair, removal, adjustment and/or replacement of the laser sen- sor's spare parts must only be carried out by a qualified workshop - we rec- ommend an authorised Volvo work- shop.
To avoid exposure to harmful radiation, do not carry out any readjustments or maintenance other than those specified here.
The repairer must follow specially drawn up workshop information for the laser sensor.
Do not remove the laser sensor (this includes removing the lenses). A removed laser sensor does not fulfil laser class 3B as per standard IEC 60825-1. Laser class 3B is not eye-safe and therefore entails a risk of injury.
04 Driver support
City Safety
04
165
The laser sensor's connector must be unplugged before removal from the windscreen.
The laser sensor must be fitted onto the windscreen before the sensor's con- nector is plugged in.
The laser sensor transmits laser light when the remote control key is in posi- tion II and also with the engine switched off (see page 79 on key positions).
Symbols and messages in the display
In conjunction with automatic braking by the City Safety system, one or more symbols may illuminate on the instrument panel and a message may appear on its display.
A text message can be acknowledged by briefly pressing the OK button on the direction indicator stalk.
04 Driver support
City Safety
04
166
SymbolA Message Meaning/Action
Auto braking by City Safety City Safety is braking or has automatically braked.
Windscreen Sensors blocked The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.
Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.
Read about the limitations of the laser sensor, see page 162.
City Safety Service required City Safety is not operational.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.
A The symbols are schematic.
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167
General
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedes- trian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedes- trian or vehicle in front that is stationary or moving in the same direction.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection is activated in situations where the driver should have started braking earlier, which is why it cannot help the driver in every situation.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary inter- vention.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection may prevent a collision or reduce the collision speed.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection must not be used as an excuse for the driver to change his/her driving style. If the driver solely relies on Collision Warning with Auto Brake to do the braking, there will be a collision sooner or later.
Two system levels
Depending on how the car equipped, the Col- lision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection function may appear in two variants: Level 1 and Level 2.
Level 1
The driver is merely warned of occurring obsta- cles by means of visual and acoustic signals - no automatic braking intervenes, the driver must himself brake.
Level 2
The driver is warned of occurring obstacles by means of visual and acoustic signals - the car is braked automatically if the driver himself does not act within a reasonable time.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of components included in Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedes- trian Detection must only be carried out in a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Function
Function overview1.
Audio-visual warning signal in the event of a collision risk.
Radar sensor2
Camera sensor
Collision Warning with Auto Brake executes three steps in the following order:
1. Collision warning
2. Brake support2
3. Auto Brake2
1 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. 2 With system Level 2 only.
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*
04
168 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The collision warning system and City Safety complement each other. For more information on City Safety, see page 161.
1 - Collision warning
The driver is first warned of a potentially immi- nent collision.
The collision warning system detects pedes- trians, stationary vehicles as well as vehicles driving in the same direction in front of the car.
If there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian or a vehicle, the driver's attention is attracted with a flashing red warning signal (no. [1] in the fig- ure on page 167) and an acoustic signal
2 - Brake support2
If the risk of collision has increased further after the collision warning then the brake support is activated.
This means that the brake system is prepared for fast braking by applying the brakes gently, which may be experienced as a slight jerk.
If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently quickly then full brake function is implemented.
Brake support also reinforces the driver's brak- ing if the system considers that the braking is not sufficient to avoid a collision.
3 - Auto Brake2
The automatic brake function is activated last.
If in this situation the driver has not yet started to take evasive action and the risk of collision is imminent then the automatic braking func- tion is deployed - this takes place irrespective of whether or not the driver brakes. Braking then takes place with full brake force in order to reduce collision speed, or with limited brake force if it is sufficient to avoid a collision.
WARNING
The collision warning system does not engage in all driving situations or traffic, weather or road conditions. The collision warning system does not react to vehicles driving in another direction to the car or to animals.
Warning only activated in the event of a high risk for collision. This section "Function" and the section "Limitations" inform about limitations that the driver must be aware of before using the Collision Warning system with Auto Brake.
Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians are switched off at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h.
Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians do not work in darkness and tunnels - not even when streetlights are lit.
The auto-brake function can prevent a col- lision or reduce collision speed. To ensure full brake performance, the driver should always depress the brake pedal - even when the car auto-brakes.
Never wait for a collision warning. The driver is always responsible that the correct dis- tance and speed are maintained - even when the collision warning system with auto-brake is used.
2 With system Level 2 only.
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169
Detection of pedestrians
Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedestrians with clear body contours.
Optimal performance of the system requires that the system function that detects pedes- trians receives as unambiguous information as possible about the contours of the body - this implies the opportunity to identify the head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body combined with a normal human pattern of movement.
If large parts of the body are not visible to the camera then the system cannot detect a pedestrian.
In order for a pedestrian to be detected he/ she must appear full-length and have a height of at least 80 cm.
The system cannot detect a pedestrian carrying larger items.
The camera sensor's ability to see pedes- trians at dusk and dawn is limited - just like the human eye.
The camera sensor's capacity to detect pedestrians is deactivated when driving in darkness and tunnels - even when street- lights are lit.
WARNING
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedes- trian Detection is an assistance tool.
This function cannot detect all pedestrians in all situations and it cannot see e.g. parti- ally obscured pedestrians, people in cloth- ing that hides the contours of the body or pedestrians shorter than 80 cm.
The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven properly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed.
Operation
Settings are made from MY CAR via the centre console display screen and menu system. For information on how the menu system is used, see page 203.
Warning signals On and Off
It is possible to choose whether the collision warning system's acoustic and visual warning systems should be on or off.
When starting the engine, the setting that was selected when the engine was switched off is obtained automatically.
NOTE
The Brake Support and Auto Brake func- tions are always activated - they cannot be deactivated.
Light and acoustic signal
To switch off both the light and the acoustic signal:
Go to Settings Car settings Driver
support systems Collision Warning. Once there, remove the mark from the box.
The warning lamp (no. [1] in the figure on page 167) is tested each time the engine is started by briefly illuminating the separate light points of the warning lamp if the light and acoustic
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*
04
170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
warnings for the collision warning system are active.
Acoustic signal
The warning sound can be activated/deacti- vated separately:
Select On or Off in the menu system under Settings Car settings Driver
support systems Collision Warning
Warning sound.
Set warning distance
The warning distance regulates the distance at which the visual and acoustic warnings are deployed.
Select Long, Normal or Short in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car
settings Driver support systems
Collision Warning Warning distance
The warning distance determines the system's sensitivity. Warning distance Long provides an earlier warning. First test with Long and if this setting produces too many warnings, which could be perceived as irritating in certain sit- uations, then change to warning distance Normal.
Only use warning distance Short in excep- tional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.
NOTE
When the adaptive cruise control is in use the warning lamp and warning sound will be used by the cruise control even if the colli- sion warning system is switched off.
The collision warning system warns the driver in the event of a risk of a collision, but the function cannot shorten driver reaction time.
In order for the collision warning system to be effective, always drive with the Distance Alert set at time interval 45, see page 158.
NOTE
Even if the warning distance has been set to Long warnings could be perceived as being late in certain situations, e.g. when there are large differences in speed or if vehicles in front brake heavily.
WARNING
No automatic system can guarantee 100 % correct function in all situations. Therefore, never test Collision Warning with Auto Brake by driving at people or vehicles - this may cause severe damage and injury and risk lives.
Checking settings
The settings required can be controlled on the centre console display screen. Search with the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car
settings Driver support systems
Collision Warning, see page 203.
Maintenance
Camera and radar sensor.
For the sensors to work correctly, they must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will reduce their function and may prevent measurement.
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171
Limitations
Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Pedes- trian Detection is active from approx. 4 km/h.
The visual warning signal (no. [1] in the illustra- tion on page 167) may be difficult to notice in the event of strong sunlight, reflections, when sunglasses are being worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead. The warning sound should therefore always be activated.
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended, which may reduce the capacity to avoid a collision. In such situations the ABS and DSTC systems will provide best possible braking force with maintained stability.
NOTE
The visual warning signal can be temporarily disengaged in the event of high passenger compartment temperature caused by strong sunlight for example. If this occurs then the warning sound is activated even if it is deactivated in the menu system.
Warnings may not appear if the dis- tance to the vehicle in front is small or if steering wheel and pedal movements are large, e.g. a very active driving style.
WARNING
Warnings and brake interventions could be implemented late or not at all if the traffic situation or external influences mean that the radar or camera sensor cannot detect a pedestrian or a vehicle in front correctly.
The sensor system has a limited range for pedestrians and the system therefore pro- vides effective warnings and brake inter- ventions at vehicle speeds up to 50 km/h. For stationary or slow-moving vehicles, warnings and brake interventions are effec- tive at vehicle speeds up to 70 km/h.
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving vehicles could be disengaged due to dark- ness or poor visibility.
Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians are switched off at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h.
The collision warning system uses the same radar sensors as adaptive cruise control. For more information on the radar sensor and its limitations, see page 154.
If warnings are perceived as being too frequent or disturbing then the warning distance can be reduced. This then leads to the system provid- ing a warning at a later stage, which reduces the total number of warnings; see the section "Set warning distance" on page 170.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is tempo- rarily deactivated with reverse gear engaged.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not acti- vated at low speeds - under 4 km/h, which is why the system does not intervene in situations where the car is approaching a vehicle in front very slowly, e.g. when parking.
In situations where the driver demonstrates active, aware driving behaviour, a collision warning may be postponed slightly in order to keep unnecessary warnings to a minimum.
When Auto Brake has prevented a collision with a stationary object the car remains sta- tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving, then speed is reduced to the same speed as that maintained by the vehicle in front.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops when Auto Brake has stopped the car, unless the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal beforehand.
Camera sensor limitations
The cars camera sensor is also used - as well as by Collision Warning with Auto Brake - by the functions:
Automatic main/dipped beam dimming - see page 89
Road sign information - see page 141.
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*
04
172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Driver Alert Control see page 176
Lane Keeping Aid - see page 180
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and dirt.
Do not stick or attach anything to the wind- screen in front of the camera sensor as this may reduce effectiveness or cause one or more of the systems dependent on the cam- era to stop working.
The camera sensors have limitations similar to the human eye, i. e. they "see" worse in dark- ness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for example. Under such conditions the functions of camera-dependent systems could be sig- nificantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the car- riageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings could also significantly reduce camera sensor func- tion when it is used to scan the carriageway and detect pedestrians and other vehicles.
The field of vision of the camera sensor is lim- ited, which is why pedestrians and vehicles cannot be detected in some situations, or they are detected later than anticipated.
During very high temperatures the camera is temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes after the engine is started in order to protect camera functionality.
Fault tracing and action
If the display shows the message Windscreen
Sensors blocked then this means that the camera sensor is blocked and cannot detect pedestrians, vehicles or road markings in front of the car.
At the same time, this means that - besides Collision Warning with Auto Brake - the Auto- matic main/dipped beam dimming, Road sign information, Driver Alert Control and Lane Keeping Aid functions will not have full func- tionality either.
The following table presents possible causes for a message being shown along with the appropriate action.
Cause Action
The windscreen sur- face in front of the camera is dirty or covered with ice or snow.
Clean the wind- screen surface in front of the camera from dirt, ice and snow.
Thick fog, heavy rain or snow means that the camera does not work sufficiently well.
No action. At times the camera does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
The windscreen sur- face in front of the camera has been cleaned but the message remains.
Wait. It may take several minutes for the camera to meas- ure the visibility.
Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera.
Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the camera cover cleaned - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173
Symbols and messages in the display
SymbolA Message Specification
Collis'n warning OFF Collision warning system switched off.
Shown when the engine is started.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Collision warn. Unavailable The collision warning system cannot be activated.
Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Auto braking was activated Auto Brake has been active.
The message clears after one press of the OK button.
Windscreen Sensors blocked The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 171.
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection*
04
174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
SymbolA Message Specification
Radar blocked See manual Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 154.
Collision warn. Service required Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.
A The symbols are schematic.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 175
General information on Driver Alert System
The Driver Alert System is intended to assist drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are driving on.
The Driver Alert System consists of different functions which can either be switched on at the same time or individually:
Driver Alert Control DAC, see page 176.
Lane Keeping Aid - LKA, see page 180.
A switched-on function is set in standby mode and is not activated automatically until speed exceeds 65 km/h.
The function is deactivated again when speed decreases to below 60 km/h.
The functions use a camera which is depend- ent on the lane having side markings painted on each side.
WARNING
Driver Alert System does not work in all sit- uations but is designed merely as a supple- mentary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsi- bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.
Driver aid status
The current status for all driver aids can be checked in MY CAR, see page 205.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - DAC*
04
176 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on DAC
The DAC (Driver Alert Control) function is intended to attract the driver's attention when he/she starts to drive less consistently, e.g. if he/she becomes distracted or starts to fall asleep.
A camera detects the side markings painted on the carriageway and compares the section of the road with the driver's steering wheel move- ments. The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow the carriageway evenly.
NOTE
The camera sensor has certain limitations - see page 171.
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly dete- riorating driving ability and it is primarily intended for major roads. The function is not intended for city traffic.
In some cases driving ability is not affected despite driver fatigue. In which case there may not be any warning issued for the driver. For this reason it is always important to stop and take a break in the event of any signs of driver fatigue, irrespective of whether or not DAC issues a warning.
NOTE
The function must not be used to extend a period of driving. Always plan breaks at reg- ular intervals, and make sure you are well rested.
Limitation
In some cases the system may issue a warning despite driving ability not deteriorating, for example:
in strong side winds.
on rutted road surfaces.
Operation
Settings are made from the centre console dis- play screen and its menu system. For informa- tion on how the menu system is used, see page 203.
On/Off
To set Driver Alert in standby mode:
In MY CAR, search for Car settings
Driver support systems Driver Alert
and check the box - No check in the box: Function disengaged.
Function
Driver Alert is activated when speed exceeds 65 km/h and remains active as long as the speed is over 60 km/h.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - DAC*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177
If the vehicle is being driven errati- cally, the driver is notified with an audible signal plus the text message Driver Alert Time for a break - the
linked symbol is lit on the instrument panel at the same time. The warning is repeated after a time if driving ability does not improve.
The warning symbol can go off:
Press the left stalk switch OK button. WARNING
An alarm should be taken very seriously, as a sleepy driver is often not aware of his/her own condition.
In the event of an alarm or a feeling of tired- ness; stop the car in a safe manner as soon as possible and rest.
Studies have shown that it is equally as dan- gerous to drive while tired as it is under the influence of alcohol.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - DAC*
04
178 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Symbols and messages
Instrument panel
SymbolA Message Specification
Driver Alert Time for a break The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.
Windscreen Sensors blocked The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 171.
Driver Alert Sys Service required The system is disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.
A The symbols are schematic.
Display
SymbolA Message Specification
Driver Alert OFF The function is disengaged.
Driver Alert Available The function is activated.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - DAC*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179
SymbolA Message Specification
Driver Alert Standby <65 km/h The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h.
Driver Alert Unavailable The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily dis- engaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 171.
A The symbols are schematic.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - Lane Keeping Aid*
04
180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on the Lane Keeping Aid
The Lane Keeping Aid function (Lane Keeping Aid) is intended for use on motorways and sim- ilar major roads to reduce the risk of the vehicle accidentally leaving its own lane in certain sit- uations.
A camera reads the painted side lines of the road/lane. If the car is about to cross a side line, the Lane Keeping Aid actively steers the car back into the lane with slight steering torque in the steering wheel.
If the car reaches or passes a side line, the Lane Keeping Aid warns the driver with pulsing vibrations in the steering wheel.
WARNING
LKA is merely a driver's aid and does not engage in all driving situations or traffic, weather or road conditions.
The driver always bears ultimate responsi- bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable laws and road traffic regulations are followed.
Function
The Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed interval 65-200 km/h on roads with clearly visible side lines. The function is tem- porarily deactivated on narrow roads with less than 2.6 metres between the lane side lines.
Off & On
Press the button in the centre console to acti- vate or deactivate the function. The function is switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the button.
Some combinations of the selected equipment leave no vacant space for an On/Off button in the centre console - in which case the function is handled instead by the car's menu system MY CAR. Here, proceed as follows:
Select On or Off under Settings Car
settings Lane Keeping Aid.
For a description of the menu system - see page 203.
In addition, the following selections can be made in MY CAR:
Warning with vibration in the steering wheel: Vibration only - On or Off.
Active steering: Steering assist only - On or Off.
Both Warning with vibration in the steering wheel and Active steering: Full function - On or Off.
Active steering
The Lane Keeping Aid strives to keep the car within the side lines for the lane.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - Lane Keeping Aid*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181
LKA intervenes and steers away.
If the vehicle approaches the left or right side line of the lane and the direction indicator is not activated, the car is steered back into the lane.
Warning with vibration in the steering
wheel
LKA steers and warns with pulsing steering wheel vibrations1.
If the vehicle passes a side line, the Lane Keep- ing Aid warns the driver with pulsing vibrations in the steering wheel. This occurs regardless of whether the car is actively steered back by applying a slight steering torque.
Dynamic cornering
LKA does not engage in sharp inside curves.
In certain cases, the Lane Keeping Aid allows the car to cross side lines without engaging active steering or warning with pulsing vibra- tions in the steering wheel. Using an adjacent lane for dynamic cornering when there is a clear line of vision is an example of one such case.
1 The figure shows 3 pulsing vibrations when the side line is passed.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - Lane Keeping Aid*
04
182 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Operation
The function is supplemented with self-explan- atory graphics in different situations. Here are some examples:
NOTE
LKA is temporarily deactivated for as long as the direction indicator is switched on.
LKA "sees" the following side lines.
If the Lane Keeping Aid is active and detects/"sees" the side lines, the LKA symbol is shown with WHITE lines.
GREY side line the Lane Keeping Aid does not see a line on that side of the car.
LKA engages on the right side.
The Lane Keeping Aid intervenes and steers away from the side line - this is indicated with:
RED line for the side in question.
Limitations
The Lane Keeping Aid camera sensor is restricted in a similar way to the human eye. For more information, see page 171.
NOTE
In certain demanding situations LKA may find it difficult to assist the driver correctly - in which case it is recommended that LKA is switched off.
Examples of such a situation could be:
roadworks
winter road conditions
poor road surface
very sporty driving style
poor weather with reduced visibility.
Hands on the steering wheel
In order for Lane Keeping Aid to operate, the driver must have his/her hands on the steering wheel. LKA continual monitors this. If hands are not detected on the steering wheel, a text message encouraging the driver to actively steer the car is shown.
If the driver does not follow the request to begin steering, the Lane Keeping Aid goes into standby mode and will remain in this mode until the driver begins to steer the car again.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - Lane Keeping Aid*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 183
Symbols and messages
In situations where the LKA function is not working or is set to standby mode, a message
may be displayed in the instrument panel along with an explanatory message on the display or TV screen. If so, follow the given recommen- dation.
Message examples:
SymbolA Message Specification
Lane Keeping Aid Unavail-
able at this speed
The Lane Keeping Aid is set to standby mode because the speed is lower than 65 km/h.
Lane Keeping Aid Unavail-
able for current markings
The lane does not have clear side lines or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 171.
Lane Keeping Aid Availa-
ble
The function scans the lane's side lines.
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 171.
Lane Keeping Aid Service
required
The system is disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Lane Keeping Aid Interrup-
ted
LKA has been set to standby mode. The lines of the LKA symbol indicate when the function is active again.
A The table symbols are schematic. The symbols on the display may have a slightly different appearance.
04 Driver support
Park assist syst*
04
184 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.
Parking assistance sound level can be adjusted during the ongoing acoustic signal using the centre console's VOL knob or in the car's menu system MY CAR - see page 203.
Parking assistance is available in two variants:
Rear only
Both front and rear.
NOTE
When a towbar is configured with the car's electrical system, the protrusion of the tow- bar is included when the function measures the parking space.
WARNING
Parking assistance does not relinquish the driver's own responsibility during parking.
The sensors have blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected.
Be aware of e.g. people and animals near the car.
Function
On/Off for the sensors for parking assistance and CTA1.
The system is automatically activated when the engine is started - the switch's On/Off lamp is
illuminated. If parking assistance is switched off with the button, the lamp goes out.
Display screen view - showing an obstacle left front and right rear.
The centre console's display screen shows an overview of the relationship between the car and detected obstacle.
Marked sectors show which of the four sen- sor(s) detected an obstacle. The closer to the car symbol a selected sector box is, the shorter the distance between the car and a detected obstacle.
The frequency of the signal increases the shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of or behind the car. Other sound from the audio system is muted automatically.
1 Side warning, see page 196
04 Driver support
Park assist syst*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 185
When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is constant and the active sensor's field nearest the car is filled in. If the detected obstacle is within the distance for the constant tone both behind and in front of the car, then the tone sounds alternately from the loudspeakers.
IMPORTANT
Certain objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or low barriers may be in the "signal shadow" and are then temporarily not detected by the sensors - the pulsating tone may then unexpectedly stop instead of changing over to the expected constant tone.
In which case, pay extra attention and manoeuvre/reposition the car particu- larly slowly or stop the current parking manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of damage to vehicles or other objects since the sensors are unable to function optimally.
Rear parking assistance
The distance covered to the rear of the car is about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for obstacles behind comes from one of the rear loudspeakers.
Rear parking assistance is activated when reverse gear is engaged.
The system is automatically deactivated when reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike carrier on the towbar in order to prevent the sensors from reacting to them.
NOTE
When reversing with e.g. trailer or bike car- rier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine trailer cable - Park Assist may need to be deactivated manually in order that the sen- sors do not react to the trailer or bike carrier.
Front parking assistance
The distance covered in front of the car is about 0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for obstacles in front comes from one of the front loudspeak- ers.
Front park assist is active up to approx. 10 km/h. The lamp in the button is illu- minated in order to indicate that the system is activated. When the speed is below 10 km/h the system is reactivated.
IMPORTANT
When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember that these must not obscure the sensors - the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived as an obstacle.
04 Driver support
Park assist syst*
04
186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Fault indicator
If the information symbol illuminates with constant glow and the informa-
tion display shows Park assist syst Service
required then parking assistance is disen- gaged.
IMPORTANT
Under some circumstances, the parking sensors can give false warning signals due to external sound sources which emit the same ultrasound frequencies as those with which the system works.
Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
Cleaning the sensors
Sensor location, front.
Sensor location, rear.
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly. Clean them with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will reduce their function and may prevent measurement.
04 Driver support
Park assist camera*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187
General
The parking camera is an assist system and is activated when reverse gear is engaged (can be changed in the settings menu, see page 203).
The camera image is shown on the centre con- sole's screen.
WARNING
The parking camera is an aid and can never replace the responsibilities of the driver when reversing.
The camera has blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected.
Be aware of people and animals near the car.
Function and operation
CAM button location.
The camera shows what is behind the car and if something appears from the sides.
The camera shows a wide area behind the car and part of the bumper and any towbar.
Objects on the screen may appear to tilt slightly - this is normal.
NOTE
Objects on the display screen may be closer to the car than they appear to be on the screen.
If another view is active the parking camera system takes over automatically and the cam- era image is displayed on the screen.
When reverse gear is engaged two unbroken lines are shown graphically which illustrate where the car's rear wheels will roll with the current steering wheel angle, this facilitates tight parking, reversing into tight spaces and for hitching a trailer. The cars approximate external dimensions are illustrated by means of two dashed lines. These help lines can be switched off in the settings menu.
If the car is also equipped with parking assis- tance sensors* then their information is dis- played graphically as coloured fields in order to illustrate the distance to detected obstacles, see page 184.
The camera is active approx. 5 seconds after reverse gear has been disengaged or until the car's speed exceeds 10 km/h.
Camera location next to the opening handle.
04 Driver support
Park assist camera*
04
188 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Light conditions
The camera image is adjusted automatically according to prevailing light conditions. Because of this, the image may vary slightly in brightness and quality. Poor light conditions can result in a slightly reduced image quality.
NOTE
Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow and ice to ensure optimum function. This is par- ticularly important in poor light.
Park assist lines
Examples of how the park assist lines can be dis- played for the driver.
The lines on the screen are projected as if they were at ground level behind the car and are directly related to steering wheel movement,
which shows the driver the path the car will take when it turns.
NOTE
When reversing with a trailer which is not connected electrically to the car, the lines on the display show the route the car will take - not the trailer.
The screen shows no lines when a trailer is connected electrically to the car's electrical system.
The parking camera is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if a Volvo genuine trailer cable is used.
IMPORTANT
Remember that the display only shows the area behind the car - so pay attention to the sides and front of the car when turning the steering while reversing.
Boundary lines
Different lines in the system.
Boundary line, free reversing zone
"Wheel tracks"
The dashed line (1) frames in a zone up to about 1.5 m back from the bumper. It is also the limit of the car's most protruding parts, such as door mirrors and corners - also during turning.
The wide "wheel tracks" (2) between the side lines indicate where the wheels will roll and can extend about 3.2 m back from the bumper if no obstacle is in the way.
04 Driver support
Park assist camera*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 189
Cars with reversing sensors*
Coloured areas (x 4 - one per sensor) show dis- tance.
If the car is also equipped with parking assis- tance sensors (see page 184) the distance indi- cation will be more precise and the coloured areas show which of the 4 sensors is/are reg- istering an obstacle.
The colour of the areas changes with decreas- ing distance to the obstacle - from light yellow to yellow to orange to red.
Colour / paint Distance (metres)
Light yellow 0.71.5
Yellow 0,50,7
Colour / paint Distance (metres)
Orange 0,30,5
Red 00.3
Settings
Press OK/MENU when a camera view is shown. Make the settings as desired.
Miscellaneous
The default setting is that the camera is activated when reverse gear is engaged.
One press on CAM activates the camera even if reverse gear is not engaged.
Change between normal and zoomed image by turning TUNE or by pressing CAM.
If the car has more cameras* installed then the camera in use is changed by turning TUNE.
Towbar
The camera can be used to advantage when hitching a trailer. A help line for the towbar's intended "course" towards the trailer can be shown in the display - just as for the "wheel tracks".
The towbar can be zoomed in for precision manoeuvring with one press on CAM. Pressing again gives normal view.
The towbar's park assist line is activated in the menu system MY CAR where a selection can be made between displaying the "wheel tracks" or towbar course - both options cannot be displayed simultaneously.
Limitations
NOTE
Bicycle racks or other accessories mounted on the back of the car may obscure the line of sight of the camera.
Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it only looks like a relatively small part of the image is obscured, it could be a relatively large sector that is hidden from view. Obstacles could thereby go undetected until they are very close to the car.
To bear in mind
Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice and snow.
Clean the camera lens regularly with luke- warm water and car shampoo - take care not to scratch the lens.
04 Driver support
Park Assist Pilot - PAP*
04
190 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
The On/Off button is on the centre console.
The Park Assist Pilot (PAP Park Assist Pilot) helps the driver to park by first checking whether a space is sufficiently large and then turning the steering wheel and steering the car into the space. Symbols, graphics and text in the combined instrument panel display show when various things are to be done.
NOTE
When a towbar is configured with the car's electrical system, the protrusion of the tow- bar is included when the function measures the parking space.
WARNING
PAP does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always has the final responsibility for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and for paying attention to the surroundings and other road users approaching or passing during parking.
Function
The PAP function turns the steering wheel - the driver's job is to select a gear, control the speed and brake.
PAP can be activated if the following criteria are met once the engine has been started:
The functions DSTC or ABS must not inter- fere while the PAP function is enabled - these can be activated due to a steep or slippery surface, for example: see pages 129 and 138 for more information.
Trailers must not be connected to the car.
The speed must be below 50 km/h.
Principle for PAP.
The PAP function parks the car using the fol- lowing steps:
1. The function searches for a parking space and measures it (A & B). During measure- ment, speed must not exceed 30 km/h.
2. The car is steered into the space while reversing (C & D).
3. The car is straightened up in the space by driving back and forth (E & F).
04 Driver support
Park Assist Pilot - PAP*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 191
Operation
The driver is instructed by means of simple, clear instructions on the instrument panel - using both graphics and text.
NOTE
Remember that certain steering wheel posi- tions may obstruct the instrument panel's instructions when you turn it during the parking manoeuvre.
1 - Searching and checking
measurements
The PAP function searches for a parking space and checks whether it is big enough. Proceed as follows:
1. Activate PAP by pressing this button and do not drive faster than 30 km/h.
2. Keep an eye on the instrument panel dis- play and be prepared to stop the car when the graphics and text so request.
3. Stop the car when the graphics and text so request.
NOTE
PAP searches the area for a parking space, displays instructions and guides the car in on its passenger side. But if required the car can also be parked on the driver's side of the street:
Activate the direction indicator for the driver's side - the car is then parked on that side of the street instead.
2 - Reversing in
During the Reversing step, PAP will steer the car into the parking space. Proceed as follows:
1. Check that the area behind the car is clear, then engage reverse gear.
2. Reverse slowly and carefully without touching the steering wheel - and no faster than approx. 10 km/h.
3. Keep an eye on the instrument panel dis- play and be prepared to stop the car when the graphics and text so request.
04 Driver support
Park Assist Pilot - PAP*
04
192 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
Keep your hands away from the steer- ing wheel when the PAP function is acti- vated.
Make sure that the steering wheel is not hindered in any way and can rotate freely.
For optimum results - Wait until the steering wheel has been turned before starting to drive backwards/forwards.
3 - Straightening up
When the car has reversed into the parking space, it must be straightened up and stopped.
1. Engage first gear or D position, wait until the steering wheel has been turned, then drive slowly forwards.
2. Stop the car when the graphics and text message so request.
3. Engage reverse gear and drive backwards slowly until the graphics and text message tell you to stop.
The function is disengaged automatically when parking is complete, and the graphics and text message show that parking is complete. It may be necessary for the driver to correct the posi- tioning. Only the driver can determine whether the car is properly parked.
IMPORTANT
The warning distance is shorter when the sensors are used by Active Park Assist compared with when Park Assist uses the sensors.
Limitations
The PAP sequence is stopped:
if the car is driven too quickly - more than 30 km/h
if the driver touches the steering wheel
if the ABS or DSTC function is enabled - e.g. if a wheel loses grip on a slippery road.
if a passenger door is opened - but the driver's door may be opened.
A text message indicates where the PAP sequence was stopped.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will reduce their function and may prevent measurement.
IMPORTANT
Under certain circumstances, PAP is unable to find parking spaces - one reason for this may be the fact that there is interference with the sensors from external sound sources which emit the same ultrasound frequencies as those with which the system works.
Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
To bear in mind
The driver should bear in mind that the Park Assist Pilot is an aid not an infallible, fully- automatic function. The driver must therefore be prepared to intervene. There are also details to bear in mind while parking, e.g.:
PAP works based on the positioning of parked vehicles. If these are not properly
04 Driver support
Park Assist Pilot - PAP*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 193
parked, the car could end up on the side- walk or improperly parked in some other way.
PAP is designed for parking on straight streets, not sharp curves or bends.
It is not always possible to find parking spaces on narrow streets since there is not enough space for manoeuvring. In such parking situations, it helps the system to drive as close to the side of the road as possible where you intend to park.
Bear in mind that the front of the car may swing out towards oncoming traffic while being parked.
Objects situated higher than the detection areas of the sensors are not included when calculations are made for the parking manoeuvre. This may cause PAP to swing into the parking space too early.
The driver is responsible for determine whether the space selected by PAP is suit- able for parking.
Use approved tyres1 with the correct tyre pressure as this affects PAP's ability to park the car.
Heavy rain or snow may cause the system to measure the parking space incorrectly.
Do not use PAP if snow chains or a spare wheel are fitted.
Do not use PAP if loaded objects are pro- truding from the car.
Maintenance
Besides the front and rear Park assist bumper sen- sors, PAP also uses a sensor on either side of the front screen.
For the PAP function to work correctly, its sen- sors must be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo - these are the same sensors as are used by parking assistance (see page 186) plus one side sensor.
Symbols and messages
The instrument panel display can show differ- ent combinations of symbols and text with varying content - sometimes with a self- explanatory piece of advice on appropriate action.
If a message says that PAP is disengaged, contact with an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
1 "Approved tyres" refers to tyres of the same type and make as those mounted when the car was delivered from the factory.
04 Driver support
BLIS and CTA*
04
194 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on BLIS and CTA
The BLIS function (Blind Spot Information System) is designed for driving in dense traffic on roads with several lanes in the same direc- tion. BLIS is a driver's aid intended to provide a warning about:
vehicles in the car's blind spot
quickly approaching vehicles in the left and right lanes closest to the car.
The BLIS function CTA (Cross Traffic Alert) is a driver's aid intended to provide a warning about:
crossing traffic when the car is reversed.
WARNING
BLIS and CTA are a supplement - not a replacement for a safe driving style and the use of rearview and door mirrors. The BLIS and CTA functions can never replace driver responsibility and attention.
It is always the responsibility of the driver to change lanes and reverse in a safe way.
Operation
Position of the BLIS lamp1.
Indicator lamp
BLIS symbol
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate.
Function
BLIS and CTA are activated when the engine is started. This is confirmed by the indicator lamps in the door panels flashing once.
Activate/deactivate BLIS
Button for activating/deactivating.
The BLIS function can be deactivated/acti- vated by pressing the BLIS button on the cen- tre console.
Some combinations of the selected equipment leave no vacant space for a button in the centre console - in which case the function is handled by the car's menu system MY CAR2:
Select On or Off at Settings Car
settings BLIS.
1 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. 2 For information on the menu system - see page 203.
04 Driver support
BLIS and CTA*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 195
When BLIS is deactivated/activated the lamp in the button goes out/illuminates and the instrument panel display confirms the change with a text message. The door panel indicator lamps flash once upon activation.
To extinguish the message:
Press the left stalk switch OK button.
or
Wait approx. 5 seconds the message extinguishes.
When BLIS operates
Principle for BLIS: 1. Zone in blind spot. 2. Zone for quickly approaching vehicle.
The BLIS function is active at speeds above approx. 10 km/h.
The system is designed to react when:
the vehicle is overtaken by other vehicles
another vehicle is quickly approaching the vehicle
When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a quickly approaching vehicle in zone 2, the door panel BLIS lamp illuminates with a constant glow. If the driver activates the direction indi- cator on the same side as the warning, the BLIS lamp will change from a constant glow to flash- ing with a more intense light.
WARNING
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is being reversed.
Activate/deactivate CTA
In cars equipped with parking assistance (see page 184), the CTA function can be deacti- vated/activated with the PAS button:
On/Off for parking assistance and CTA sensors.
CTA itself can be deactivated in the MY CAR2
menu system as follows:
Go to Settings Car settings BLIS
Cross Traffic Alert and deselect. The CTA function is then deactivated. BLIS remains activated.
2 For information on the menu system - see page 203.
04 Driver support
BLIS and CTA*
04
196 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
When CTA operates
Principle for CTA - .
CTA supplements the BLIS function by being able to see crossing traffic from the side during reversing, such as when reversing out of a parking space.
CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In favourable conditions, it may also be able to detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and pedestrians.
CTA is only active during reversing and is acti- vated automatically when reverse is selected at the gearbox.
If CTA detects something approaching from the side, an acoustic warning signal sounds. The signal comes from either the left or the right speaker depending on
which direction the approaching object is coming from.
CTA also warns by illuminating the BLIS lamps.
An additional warning is provided in the form of a lit icon in the TV screen's PAS graphics.
WARNING
CTA does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsi- bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.
Maintenance
Location of BLIS and CTA sensors.
The BLIS and CTA sensors are located inside the rear wing/bumper on each side of the car.
To ensure optimal functionality, the areas in front of the sensors must be kept clean.
Limitations
BLIS and CTA are deactivated when a trailer is connected to the cars electrical system.
Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can reduce functionality and make it impossi- ble to provide warnings. BLIS and CTA are unable to detect hazards if covered.
Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the area of the sensors.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' com- ponents must only be performed by a work- shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- ommended.
04 Driver support
BLIS and CTA*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 197
Messages on the display
In situations where the BLIS and CTA functions fail or are interrupted, a symbol may be shown on the instrument panel, supplemented by an explanatory message. Follow any recommen- dation given.
Message examples:
Message Specification
BLIS ON The BLIS system is activated.
BLIS and CTA
Service required
BLIS and CTA are not working.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.
BLIS and CTA OFF
Trailer attached
BLIS and CTA are temporarily disabled because a trailer is connected to the cars electrical sys- tem.
Message Specification
BLIS OFF BLIS and CTA have been deactivated manually.
CTA OFF CTA has been deac- tivated manually. BLIS is active.
A text message can be acknowledged by briefly pressing the OK button on the direction indicator stalk.
198 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Menus and messages........................................................................... 200 Menu source MY CAR.......................................................................... 203 Climate control...................................................................................... 212 Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* 223 Additional heater*.................................................................................. 227 Trip computer........................................................................................ 229 Adapting driving characteristics........................................................... 233 Comfort inside the passenger compartment........................................ 234
COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
05
200 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Combined instrument panel1
Information display (analogue combined instru- ment panel) and menu navigation controls.
OK - access the menu, acknowledge mes- sages and confirm menu selections.
Thumbwheel browse between menu options.
RESET - reset data in the selected trip computer step and go back in the menu structure.
The menus shown on the information display in the combined instrument panel are con- trolled with the left-hand stalk switch. The menus shown depend on key position, see
page 79. If a message appears then this must be acknowledged with OK for the menus to be shown.
Menu overview
Some of the following menu options require the function and hardware to be installed in the car.
Analogue combined instrument panel
Digital speed
Parking heater*
Additional heater*
TC options
Service status
Oil level2
Messages (##)3
Digital combined instrument panel
Settings*
Themes
Contrast mode/Colour mode
Service status
Messages
Oil level2
Preconditioning*
Trip computer reset
Message
Text message in the information display (analogue combined instrument panel).
When a warning, information or indicator sym- bol illuminates, a corresponding message appears on the information display. An error message is stored in a memory list until the fault has been rectified.
1 See also page 69 for different variants of the combined instrument panel. 2 Certain engines. 3 The number of messages is indicated in brackets.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
05
201
Press OK to acknowledge4 and browse among the messages.
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, the message must be read (press OK) before the previous activity can be resumed.
Message Specification
Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a workshopB.
Stop engineA Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a workshopB.
Service urgentA Contact a workshopB to check the car immedi- ately.
Service
requiredA Contact a workshopB to check the car as soon as possible.
Message Specification
See manualA Read the owner's man- ual.
Book time for
maintenance
Time to book regular service - contact a workshopB.
Time for regular
maintenance
Time for regular service - contact a workshopB. The timing is deter- mined by the number of kilometres driven, num- ber of months since the last service, engine run- ning time and oil grade.
Maintenance
overdue
If the service intervals are not followed then the warranty does not cover any damaged parts - contact a work- shopB.
Transmission
Oil change nee-
ded
Contact a workshopB to check the car as soon as possible.
Message Specification
Transmission
Reduced per-
formance
The gearbox cannot handle full capacity. Drive carefully until the message clearsC.
If shown repeatedly - contact a workshopB.
Transmission
hot Reduce
speed
Drive more smoothly or stop the car in a safe manner. Disengage the gear and run the engine at idling speed until the message clearsC.
Transmission
hot Stop safely
Wait for cooling
Critical fault. Stop the car immediately in a safe manner and con- tact a workshopB.
4 A message can also be acknowledged via the thumbwheel or RESET button.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
05
202
Message Specification
Temporarily
offA A function has been temporarily switched off and is reset auto- matically while driving or after starting again.
Low battery
charge Power
save mode
The audio system is switched off to save energy. Charge the bat- tery.
A Part of message, shown together with information on where the problem has arisen.
B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. C For more messages concerning automatic transmission, see
page 119.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
05
203
General information on MY CAR
Many of the car's functions are handled in this menu source, such as setting the clock, door mirrors and locks.
Navigation in the menus is carried out using buttons on the centre console or with the steer- ing wheel's right-hand keypad.
Certain functions are standard, others are optional - the range also varies depending on the market.
Operation
Centre console controls
Centre console controls for menu navigation.
Press MY CAR to open the menus under MY CAR.
Press OK MENU to select/tick in the high- lighted menu option or to store the selected function in the memory.
Turn the TUNE knob to scroll up/down among the menu options.
EXIT
EXIT functions
Depending on the function the cursor is on when EXIT is pressed, and on the menu level, one of the following occurs:
phone call is rejected
current function is interrupted
input characters are deleted
most recent selections are undone
leads up in the menu system.
Short and long presses can also produce vary- ing results.
A long press leads to the highest menu level (Parent view), from which all of the car's func- tions/menu sources can be accessed; see page 243.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
05
204 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Steering wheel keypad*
The keypad may vary depending on the audio level; see page 240.
Turn the thumbwheel knob to scroll up/ down among the menu options.
Press the thumbwheel to select/tick in the highlighted menu option or to store the selected function in the memory.
EXIT (see heading "EXIT functions" page 203).
Search paths
Current menu level is shown at the top right of the centre console display screen. Search paths to the menu system functions are descri- bed in this manual in the following form:
Settings Car settings Lock settings
Doors unlock Driver door, then all.
The following is an example of how a function can be accessed and adjusted using the steer- ing wheel keypad:
1. Press the centre console button MY CAR.
2. Scroll to the desired menu, e.g. Settings, with the thumbwheel (1) and then press the thumbwheel - a submenu opens.
3. Scroll to the desired menu, e.g. Car
settings and press the thumbwheel - a submenu opens.
4. Scroll to Lock settings and press the thumbwheel - a new submenu opens.
5. Scroll to Doors unlock and press the thumbwheel - a submenu of selectable functions opens.
6. Choose between the options All doors
and Driver door, then all and press the thumbwheel - a cross is marked in the option's empty box.
7. Exit the programming by backing out of the menus incrementally with short presses on EXIT (2) or with one long press.
The procedure is the same as with the centre console's buttons - see page 203: OK MENU
(2), EXIT (4) and the TUNE knob (3).
MY CAR
The following options are available in menu source MY CAR:
My V40
Trip statistics
DRIVe*
Support systems
Settings
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 205
My V40
MY CAR My V40
The display screen shows a grouping of all of the car's driver support systems - these can be activated or deactivated here.
My DRIVe*
Parts of Volvo's DRIVe concept are described here, amongst other things.
Start/Stop
Eco driving guide
For more information - see page 123.
Driver support system
MY CAR Support systems
The display screen shows a summary of the current status of the car's driver support sys- tems.
Setup - menus
The menus are structured as follows:
Menu level 1
Menu level 2
Menu level 3
Menu level 4
p. ....
Shown here are the 4 first menu levels under MY CAR Settings. Some menus have fur- ther submenus - these are then described in detail in their respective sections.
When selecting whether a function should be activated/On or deactivated/Off a square is displayed:
On: Selected square.
Off: Empty square.
Select On/Off with OK - then back out of the menu with EXIT.
Car settings
Car key memory
On
Off
p. 82 and 104
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
05
206
Lock settings
Automatic door locking
On
Off
Doors unlock
All doors
Driver door, then all
Keyless entry
All doors
Any door
Doors on same side
Both front doors
Audible confirmation
On
Off
p. 44, 52 and 55
Reduced Guard
Activate once
Ask when exiting
p. 58 and 62
Side mirror settings
Fold mirrors
Tilt left mirror
Tilt right mirror
p. 104
Light settings
Interior light
Floor lights
Ambient light
Ambient light colours
p. 94
Door lock confirmation light
On
Off
Unlock confirmation light
On
Off
p. 42
Approach light duration
Off
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
p. 44 and 95
Home safe light duration
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
p. 95
Triple indicator
On
Off
p. 93
Temporary LH traffic
On
Off
or
Temporary RH traffic
On
Off
p. 95
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 207
Active bending lights
On
Off
p. 91
Auxiliary lights
On
Off
p. 87
Steering wheel force
Low
Medium
High
p. 233
Speed in infotainment display
On
Off
Reset car settings
All menus in Car settings are given original factory settings.
Driver support systems
Collision Warning
On
Off
Warning distance
Long
Normal
Short
Warning sound
On
Off
p. 167 Lane Keeping Aid
On
Off
On at start-up
On
Off
Increased sensitivity*
On
Off
Assistance alternatives
Vibration only
Steering assist only
Full function
p. 180
Road Sign Information
On
Off
Speed alert
On
Off
p. 141
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
05
208
DSTC
On
Off
p. 138
City Safety
On
Off
p. 161
BLIS
On
Off
Cross Traffic Alert
On
Off
p. 194
Distance Alert
On
Off
p. 158
Driver Alert
On
Off
p. 176
System options
Time
The instrument panel clock is set here.
p. 75
Time format
12 h
24 h
p. 75
Screen saver
On
Off
The TV screen's current content fades out after a period of inac- tivity and is replaced by a blank screen if this option is selected.
The current screen content returns if any of the TV screen's buttons or controls are actuated.
p. 203
Language
Selects language for menu texts.
Show help text
On
Off
Explanatory text for the display screen's current content is shown with this option selected.
Distance and fuel units
MPG (UK)
MPG (US)
km/l
l/100km
p. 229
Temperature unit
Celsius
Fahrenheit
Selects the unit for the display of outside temperature and setting of the climate control system.
Volume levels
Voice output volume
Front park assist volume
Rear park assist volume
Phone ringing volume
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 209
Reset system options
All menus in System options are given original factory settings.
Voice settings
Only in cars with Volvo GPS nav- igator RTI* - see separate manual.
Voice tutorial
This menu option + OK provides spoken information about how the system works.
Voice command list
Phone commands
Phone
Phone call con- tact
Phone dial num- ber
Navigation commands
Navigation
Navigation repeat instruc- tion
Navigation go to address
General commands
Help
Cancel
Voice tutorial
The menu options under Phone
commands show several exam- ples of available voice commands - only with a Bluetooth -enabled mobile phone installed. For more
and detailed information - see page 267.
The menu options under Naviga-
tion commands show several examples of available voice com- mands in the Navigation system.
Voice user setting
Default setting
User 1
User 2
Here there is the option to create a second user profile - an advant- age if more than one person shall use the car/system regularly. Default setting restores factory settings.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
05
210
Voice training
User 1
User 2
With Voice training the voice recognition system is taught to recognise the driver's voice and pronunciation. A number of phra- ses are presented on the screen for the driver to read aloud. When the system has learnt how the driver talks, the presentation of the phrases stops. Following which e.g. User 1 can be selected in Voice user setting in order that the system shall listen to the right user.
Voice output volume
A volume control appears on the screen - at which point, proceed as follows:
1. Adjust the volume with the thumbwheel.
2. Test-listen using OK. 3. Use EXIT to store the setting
and the menu is switched off.
Voice POI list
Edit list
The number of facilities is exten- sive and varies depending on market. Maximum 30 favourite facilities can be stored in this list.
For more information on Facilities and Voice recognition - see the Navigation system's owner's manual.
Audio settings p. 240
Climate settings
Automatic blower adjustment
Normal
High
Low
Recirculation timer
On
Off
Automatic rear defroster
On
Off
Interior air quality system
On
Off
Reset climate settings
All menus in Climate settings
are given original factory settings.
p. 217
Favourites (FAV) p. 244
Volvo On Call
Described in a separate manual.
Information
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 211
Number of keys p. 42
VIN number p. 366
DivX VOD code p. 260
Bluetooth software version in
car
p. 266
Map and software version*
Only in cars with Volvo GPS nav- igator - see separate manual.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
05
212
General
Climate control
The car is equipped with electronic climate control. The climate control system cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the pas- senger compartment.
NOTE
The air conditioning system (AC) can be switched off, but to ensure the best possible climate comfort in the passenger compart- ment and to prevent the windows from mist- ing, it should always be on.
Actual temperature
The temperature you select corresponds to the physical experience with reference to factors such as air speed, humidity and solar radiation etc. in and around the car.
The system includes a sun sensor which detects on which side the sun is shining into the passenger compartment. This means1 that the temperature can differ between the right and left-hand air vents despite the controls being set for the same temperature on both sides.
Sensor location
The sun sensor is located on the top side of the dashboard.
The temperature sensor for the passenger compartment is located below the climate control panel.
The outside temperature sensor is located in the door mirror.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects.
Side windows
To ensure that the air conditioning works opti- mally, the side windows must be closed.
Misting windows
Remove misting on the insides of the windows by primarily using the defroster function.
To reduce the risk of misting, keep the win- dows clean and use window cleaner.
Temporary shut-off of the air
conditioning
When the engine requires full power, e.g. for full acceleration or driving uphill with a trailer, the air conditioning can be temporarily switched
off. There may then be a temporary increase in temperature in the passenger compartment.
Condensation
In warm weather, condensation from the air conditioning may drip under the car. This is normal.
Ice and snow
Remove ice and snow from the climate control system air intake (the grille between the bonnet and the windscreen).
Total airing function
The function opens/closes all side windows simultaneously and can be used for example to quickly air the car during hot weather, see page 55.
Passenger compartment filter
All air entering the car's passenger compart- ment is cleaned with a filter. This must be replaced at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the recommended replacement intervals. If the car is used in a severely contaminated environment, it may be necessary to replace the filter more often.
1 Only applies to ECC.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 213
NOTE
There are different types of passenger com- partment filter. Make sure that the correct filter is fitted.
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*
This option keeps the passenger compartment clear of allergy and asthma inducing sub- stances. For more information on CZIP, see the brochure included with the purchase of the car.
The following is included:
An enhanced fan function that means that the fan starts when the car is opened with the remote control key. The fan fills the passenger compartment with fresh air. The function starts when required and is dis- engaged automatically after a time or when one of the passenger compartment doors is opened. The amount of time the fan runs is reduced gradually due to reduced need up until the car is 4 years old.
The air quality system IAQS is a fully auto- matic system that cleans the air in the pas- senger compartment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone.
NOTE
To maintain the CZIP standard in cars with CZIP the IAQS filter should be changed after 15 000 km or once per year depending on whichever occurs first. However, up to 75 000 km over 5 years. In cars without CZIP and where the customer does not want to retain the CZIP standard, the IAQS filter must be replaced during a regular service.
Use of tested materials in the interior
equipment.
The materials have been developed in order to minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger compartment and they contribute to making the passenger compartment easier to keep clean. The carpets in both the passenger com- partment and the cargo area are removable and easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo, see page 359.
Menu settings
It is possible to activate/deactivate or change the default settings for four of the climate con- trol system's functions via the centre console. For general information about menu naviga- tion, see page 204:
Fan speed in automatic mode*, see page 218.
Recirculation timer for passenger com- partment air, see page 220.
Automatic rear window defrosting, see page 105.
Air quality system IAQS*, see page 220
The climate control system's functions can be reset to the default settings via the menu sys- tem in MY CAR and this is carried out under: Settings Climate settings Reset
climate settings.
Air distribution
The incoming air is divided between a number of different vents in the passenger compart- ment.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
05
214 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO
mode*.
If necessary it can be controlled manually, see page 221.
Air vents in the dashboard
Open
Closed
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow
Aim the vents at the side windows to remove misting.
NOTE
Remember that small children may be sen- sitive to air flows and draughts.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 215
Electronic climate control, ECC*
Fan
AUTO
Electrically heated front seat, left-hand side
Heated windscreen* and max. defroster
Air distribution - ventilation floor
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Rear window and door mirror defrosters, see page 105
Setting, left/right side for temperature reg- ulation
Electrically heated front seat, right-hand side
Temperature control
Recirculation
AC Air conditioning on/off
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
05
216 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Electronic Temperature Control, ETC
Fan
Electrically heated front seat, left-hand side
AC Air conditioning on/off
Heated windscreen* and max. defroster
Air distribution - ventilation floor
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Rear window and door mirror defrosters, see page 105
Recirculation
Electrically heated front seat, right-hand side
Temperature control
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 217
Operating the controls
Heated seats*
Front seats
Current heat level is shown in the centre console TV screen.
Press the button once for the highest heat level - three orange fields are lit in the cen- tre console TV screen (see fig- ure above).
Press the button twice for a lower heat level two orange fields are lit in the TV screen.
Press the button three times for the lowest heat level one orange field it lit in the TV screen.
Press the button four times to switch off the heat no fields are lit.
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries.
Rear seat
Press the button once for the highest heat level three lamps illuminate.
Press the button twice for a lower heat level two lamps illuminate.
Press the button three times for the lowest heat level one lamp illuminates.
Press the button four times to switch off the heat no lamps illuminate.
Fan
NOTE
If the fan is fully switched off then the air conditioning is not engaged - which can cause a risk of misting on the windows.
Fan knob for ECC*
Turn the knob to increase or decrease fan speed, AUTO is disengaged. If AUTO is selected, the fan speed is regulated automatically - the fan speed previously set is disengaged.
Fan knob for ETC
Turn the knob to increase or decrease fan speed.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
05
218
Air distribution
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - ventilation floor
The figure consists of three buttons. When pressing the buttons the corresponding figure is illuminated in the TV screen (see figure below) and an arrow in front of each part of the figure shows the air distribution that is selected. For more information on air distribu- tion, see page 221.
The selected air distribution is shown in the centre console TV screen.
AUTO1
The Auto function automati- cally regulates temperature, air conditioning, fan speed, recirculation, and air distribu- tion.
If you select one or more manual functions, the other functions continue to be controlled auto- matically. All manual settings are disengaged when AUTO is pressed. The TV screen shows AUTO CLIMATE.
Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in the menu system MY CAR under: Settings
Climate settings Automatic blower
adjustment. Choose between Low, Normal
or High:
Low - Automatic fan control. Low airflow is prioritised.
Normal - Automatic fan control.
High - Automatic fan control. A more intense airflow is prioritised.
For a description of the menu system, see page 204.
Temperature control
When the car is started, the most recent setting is resumed.
1 Only applies to ECC.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 219
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher or lower temperature than the actual desired temperature.
Temperature regulation ECC*
The temperatures on the driver and passenger sides can be set independently. Repeatedly press L/R in the button to select the setting for left, right or both sides. Set the temperature using the
knob - the selected temperature for either side is displayed in the centre console display.
Temperature regulation ETC
The temperature in the pas- senger compartment can be adjusted with the knob.
AC Air conditioning on/off
When the lamp in the AC but- ton illuminates, the air condi- tioning is controlled by the system's automatic function. This way, incoming air is cooled and dehumidified as required.
When the lamp in the AC button is switched off the air conditioning is disconnected. Other functions are still controlled automatically. When the max. defroster function is activated the air conditioning is switched on automati- cally, so that the air is dehumidified at the maxi- mum setting.
Heated windscreen* and max. defroster
The selected setting is shown in the centre con- sole TV screen.
Electric heating*
Max. defroster
Used to quickly remove mist- ing and ice from the wind- screen and side windows. The light in the defroster but- ton illuminates when the func- tion is active.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
05
220 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
For cars without heated windscreens:
One press on the button makes air flow to the windows - symbol (2) shines in the dis- play.
Two presses switches off the function - no symbol shines.
For cars with heated windscreens, the function operates as follows:
One press on the button starts heating the windscreen2 - symbol (1) shines in the dis- play.
Two presses on the button start heating the windscreen2 and air flows to the win- dows - the symbols (1) and (2) shine in the display.
Three presses switches off the function - no symbol shines.
The following also takes place when the func- tion is active in order to provide maximum dehumidification in the passenger compart- ment:
the air conditioning is automatically engaged
recirculation and the air quality system are automatically disengaged.
NOTE
The noise level increases as the fan is oper- ating at max.
When the defroster is switched off the climate control returns to the previous settings.
Recirculation
Recirculation
When recirculation is engaged the orange lamp in the button illuminates. The function is selected to shut out bad air, exhaust gases etc. from the passenger com- partment. The air in the pas-
senger compartment is recirculated, i.e. no outside air is taken into the car when this func- tion is activated.
IMPORTANT
If the air in the car recirculates for too long, there is a risk of misting on the insides of the windows.
Timer
With the timer function activated the system will exit manually activated recirculation mode
according to a time that depends on the out- side temperature. This reduces the risk of ice, misting and bad air. Activate/deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Climate settings
Recirculation timer. For a description of the menu system, see page 204.
NOTE
When max. defroster is selected, recircula- tion is always deactivated.
Air quality system IAQS*
The air quality system separates gases and particles to reduce the levels of odours and pollution in the passenger compartment. If the outside air is contaminated then the air intake is closed and the air is recirculated.
Activate/deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Climate
settings Interior air quality system. For a description of the menu system, see page 204.
2 The compass goes off when the heated windscreen is active.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 221
NOTE
The air quality sensor must always be ena- bled to ensure the best air in the passenger compartment.
In a cold climate, automatic recirculation is limited so as to prevent misting.
Cars with Eco Start/Stop DRIVe*
With an auto-stopped engine certain equip- ment has its function temporarily reduced, e.g. climate control air conditioning and fan speed. For more information, see page 123.
Air distribution table
Air distribution Use Air distribution Use
A large amount of hot air flows to the windows.
to remove ice and misting quickly.
Air to the floor and win- dows. Some air flows from the dashboard air vents.
to ensure comfortable conditions and good demisting in cold or humid weather.
Air to windscreen, via defroster vent, and side windows. Some air flows from the air vents.
to prevent misting and icing in a cold and humid climate, (not at too low fan speed to enable this).
Air to floor and from dashboard air vents.
in sunny weather with cool outside tempera- tures.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
05
222
Air distribution Use Air distribution Use
Airflow to windows and from dashboard air vents.
to ensure good comfort in warm, dry weather.
Air to floor. Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and windows.
to direct heat or cold to the floor.
Airflow to the head and chest from the dashboard air vents.
to ensure efficient cooling in warm weather.
Airflow to windows, from dashboard air vents and to the floor.
to provide cooler air along the floor or warmer air higher up in cold weather or hot, dry weather.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 223
Fuel-driven heater
General information about the parking
heater
The parking heater heats the engine and pas- senger compartment and can be started directly or with the timer.
Two different times can be selected using the timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car is heated and ready. The car's electronic sys- tem calculates when heating should be started based on the outside temperature.
The heater cannot start if the outside tempera- ture exceeds 15 C. At 5 C or lower the maximum running time of the parking heater is 50 minutes.
WARNING
The car must be outdoors when the parking heater is used.
NOTE
When the parking heater is active there may be smoke from underneath the car, which is perfectly normal.
Refuelling
Warning label on fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- ting to refuel.
Check on the information display that the parking heater is switched off. When it is running, the information display shows Auto heater ON1.
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the car should point downhill to ensure that there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.
Battery and fuel
If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel level is too low, the parking heater will be switched off automatically and a message appears on the information display. Acknowl- edge the message by pressing the indicator stalk OK button once, see page 224.
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the parking heater com- bined with short journeys may discharge the battery and impair starting.
The car should be driven for the same time as the heater is used to ensure that the car's battery is recharged adequately to replace the energy consumed by the heater when it is used on a regular basis.
1 Analogue combined instrument panel.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
05
224 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Operation
Information display (analogue combined instru- ment panel) and menu navigation controls.
OK button
Thumbwheel
RESET
For more information on the information dis- play and OK, see pages 69 and 200.
Symbols and display messages2
When one of the timer's settings or Direct start is activated, the infor-
mation symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates while the information display shows an explanatory text and a further illumi- nated symbol. The table shows symbols and display texts that appear.
NOTE
G 02 51 02 - Figure 2 in the symbol means the second climate control system in the car, where the normal climate control system is the first. The figure 2 has nothing to do with the timer.
Sym- bol
Display Specification
G 02 51 02
Auto
heater
ON
The heater is switched on and running.
The heater's timer is activated after the remote control key has been removed from the ignition switch and leaving the car - the engine and passenger com- partment are heated at the set time.
G 02 51 02
Fuel
operated
heater
stopped
Battery
saving
mode
The heater has been stopped by the car's electron- ics in order to facil- itate starting the engine.
2 Analogue combined instrument panel.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 225
Sym- bol
Display Specification
G 02 51 02
Fuel
operated
heater
stopped
Low fuel
level
Setting the heater is not possible due to fuel level being too low - this is in order to facilitate starting the engine as well as approx. 50 km driving.
G 02 51 02
Fuel
operated
heater
Service
required
Heater not work- ing. Contact a workshop for repair. Volvo rec- ommends that you contact an author- ised Volvo work- shop.
A display text clears automatically after a time or after one press on the indicator stalk OK
button.
Direct start and immediate stop
Following the direct start of the heater it will be activated for 50 minutes.
Heating of the passenger compartment will begin as soon as the engine coolant has reached the correct temperature.
NOTE
The car can be started and driven while the parking heater is running.
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
heater3 and select with OK.
2. In the next menu, scroll to Direct start and select with OK to activate/deactivate.
3. Exit the menu with RESET.
Heater timer
The time when the car shall be used and heated is specified with the timer.
Setting the timer
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
heater3 and select with OK.
2. Select one of the two timers using the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
3. Briefly press OK to move to the lit hours setting.
4. Select the required hour using the thumb- wheel.
5. Briefly press OK to move to the lit minutes setting.
6. Select the required minute using the thumbwheel.
7. Press OK4 to confirm the setting.
8. Go back in the menu structure using RESET.
9. Select the other time (continue from step 2) or exit the menu with RESET.
Start the timer
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
heater3 and select with OK.
2. Select one of the two timers using the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
3. Activate the marked timer with OK.
3 Analogue combined instrument panel. 4 Press OK again to activate the timer.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
05
226 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Deactivating the timer
A timer-started heater can be switched off manually before the set time has elapsed. Pro- ceed as follows:
1. Press OK.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
heater3 and select with OK. > If a timer is set but not activated, a clock
icon is shown next to the set time.
3. Select one of the two timers using the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
4. Deactivate the timer as follows:
long press on OK or
short press on OK to continue in the menu. Then select to stop the timer and confirm with OK.
A timer-started heater can be switched off as described in the instructions in the section "Direct start and immediate stop"; see page 225.
Clock/timer
The heater's time is connected to the car's clock.
NOTE
All timer programming will be cleared if the car's clock is reset.
3 Analogue combined instrument panel.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Additional heater*
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 227
General information about the additional heater
For cars with diesel engines sold in cold cli- mate zones1 an additional heater may be required to obtain the correct operating tem- perature in the engine and to obtain sufficient heating in the passenger compartment.
In such instances, the car is equipped with either:
an additional electric heater or
a fuel-driven additional heater2.
Electric additional heater
The heater cannot be controlled manually but is instead activated automatically after the engine has been started in outside tempera- tures below 9 C and is switched off after the set passenger compartment temperature has been reached.
Fuel-driven additional heater
The heater starts automatically when extra heat is required when the engine is running.
The heater is switched off automatically when the correct temperature is reached or when the engine is switched off.
NOTE
When the auxiliary heater is active there may be smoke from underneath the car, which is perfectly normal.
Auto mode or shutdown
The additional heater's automatic start sequence can be switched off if required.
Information display (analogue combined instru- ment panel) and menu navigation controls.
OK button
Thumbwheel
RESET button
1. Before starting the engine: Select key posi- tion I, see page 80.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional
heat auto.
3. Press RESET to select between ON and OFF.
1 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned. 2 For cars fitted with parking heaters, see page 223.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Additional heater*
05
228 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
The menu options are only visible in key position I - any adjustments must therefore be made before starting the engine.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 229
General
The trip computer comes in two variants, with differing content and appearance "Analog" or "Digital".
The trip computer's menu is in a variable loop. One of the "Analog" menu options is a blank display - it also marks the beginning/end of the loop. With this option in the "Digital" instrument panel, the two trip computer displays go blank.
"Analog" instrument panel
"Analog" information display with controls.
OK Opens the trip computer menus and activates the relevant option.
Thumbwheel Scroll among trip control options.
RESET Cancel or go back one step.
NOTE
If a warning message appears when the trip computer is used then the message must first be acknowledged before the trip com- puter can be reactivated. Acknowledge the warning message by briefly pressing the indicator lever's OK button.
Menu options Information
Digital speed Select "km/h" or "mph".
Parking heater*
- Direct start
- Timer 1 - leads to the menu for select- ing time.
- Timer 2 - leads to the menu for select- ing time.
1. Select the box for Hours or Minutes using the thumb-
wheel and acti- vate the box with OK.
2. Select a number using the thumbwheel
and program it with OK.
3. Select the next box or back out with RESET.
For more informa- tion, see page 223.
Menu options Information
Additional heater*
Auto On
Off
For more informa- tion, see page 227.
TC options
Distance to empty, km to empty tank
Fuel consump-
tion
Average speed
- Trip meter T1 and
total dist.
- Trip meter T2 and
total dist.
Driver Support
- No text - Loop start/stop
Select the option to be shown in the dis- play.
Scroll among the options using the thumbwheel
and select with OK.
Service status Shows the number of months and the distance until the next service.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
05
230 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Menu options Information
Engine oil level
Wait...A For more informa- tion, see page 331.
Messages For more informa- tion, see page 200.
A Certain engines.
"Digital" instrument panel
"Digital" information display with controls.
OK Opens the trip computer menus and activates the relevant option.
Thumbwheel Scroll among trip control options.
RESET Cancel or go back one step. In the "Digital" display version, two trip com- puter functions can be displayed simultane-
ously one function in the left and one in the right display.
The following combinations can be accessed with the thumbwheel:
"Average consumption" and "Average
speed"
"Current consumption" and "Distance to
empty fuel tank:"
"Current consumption" and "Digital speed display"
No text - Loop start/stop
Menu options Information
Trip computer
reset
- l/100 km
- km/h
- Reset both
Select the desired option using the thumbwheel and activate with OK.
Messages For more informa- tion, see page 200.
Themes Instrument panel appearance is selected here, see page 70.
Menu options Information
Settings*
Additional
heater
Select Auto On or Off.
For more informa- tion, see page 227.
Contrast mode/
Colour mode
Adjust instrument panel appearance.
Parking heater*
Direct start
- Timer 1 - leads to the menu for select- ing time.
- Timer 2 - leads to the menu for select- ing time.
1. Select the box for Hours or Minutes using the thumb-
wheel and acti- vate the box with OK.
2. Select a number using the thumbwheel
and program it with OK.
3. Select the next box or back out with RESET.
For more informa- tion, see page 223.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 231
Menu options Information
Service status Shows the number of months and the distance until the next service.
Engine oil level
Wait...A For more informa- tion, see page 331.
A Certain engines.
Functions
A description of a few trip computer functions is found below:
Average
Average fuel consumption is calculated from the last resetting.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel-driven heater* has been used.
Average speed
Average speed is calculated from the last resetting.
Instantaneous
Current fuel consumption is calculated every second. The information on the display is updated every couple of seconds. When the car is stationary, "----" appears on the display.
Cars with the Start/Stop function show "0,0 L/ 100km" when the engine is in auto-stop mode.
Km to empty tank
The calculation is based on the average fuel consumption over the last 30 km and the remaining driveable fuel quantity. The display shows the approximate distance that can be driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the tank.
An economic driving style generally results in a longer driving distance. For more information on how fuel consumption can be influenced, see page 10.
No guaranteed range remains when the display shows "---- km to empty tank". Refuel as soon as possible.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if the driving style has been changed.
Digital speed display1
The speed is shown in the opposite unit (kmh/ mph) of the main instrument panel. If the speedometer indicates speed in mph, the dis- play is changed to km/h.
Resetting with "Analog"
1. Select --- km/h average speed or --.- l/ 100km average.
2. A brief press (approx. 1 second) on RESET resets the selected function.
Resetting with "Digital"
Find "Reset" in the menu system and select that option.
"Reset" is also activated via a long press (4 seconds) on RESET. The displayed trip meter (T1 or T2) is also reset.
Changing unit
To change unit (metric/imperial) for distance and speed - go to MY CAR Settings
System options Distance and fuel units, see page 203.
NOTE
In addition to the trip computer, these units are also changed at the same time in Volvo's GPS navigator RTI.
1 For "Digital" instrument panel only.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
05
232 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Trip statistics*
The car stores information on completed trips, including average fuel consumption and aver- age speed. These can be viewed on the TV screen as a block diagram.
Function
Trip statistics.
Each block symbolises 1 km or 10 km, depend- ing on which scale is selected. The diagram displays 10 blocks: Blocks 1-9 show the last 9 or 90 km driven - the block at the far right shows the value of the kilometre or 10 km cur- rent being driven.
With the TUNE wheel, the scale of each block can be switched between 1 km and 10 km - the cursor at the far right shifts position between up and down depending on the scale selected.
Operation
A setting can be made in the MY CAR menu system:
MY CAR My V40 Trip statistics:
Start new trip - ENTER is used to clear all previous statistics. Back out of the menu with EXIT.
Reset for every driving cycle - mark the box with ENTER and back out of the menu with EXIT.
With the "Reset for every driving cycle" option marked, all statistics are automatically cleared after the car is parked and stationary for 4 hours. The next time the engine is started, trip statistics start again from zero.
If a new driving cycle is started before the 4 hours have elapsed, the current period must first be deleted manually using the "Start new
trip" option.
See also the information on Eco Guide on page 121.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adapting driving characteristics
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 233
Speed related power steering*
Steering force increases with the speed of the car to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. The steering is firmer and more immediate on motorways. Steering is light and requires no extra effort when parking and at low speed.
The driver can choose between three different levels of steering force for road responsiveness or steering sensitivity. Go to the menu system MY CAR and locate Settings Car settings
Steering wheel force and select Low, Medium or High.
For a description of the menu system, see page 203. This menu cannot be accessed while the car is in motion.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
05
234
Storage spaces
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 235
Storage compartment1 in door panel
Storage compartment, drivers side
Ticket clip
Storage compartment
Glovebox
Storage pocket* 2on front edge of front seat cushions
Storage compartment, cup holder
Jacket holder
Cup holder* in rear seat
Storage pocket2
Storage compartment, rear seat
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc. in the glove compartment or other com- partments. Otherwise they may injure peo- ple in the car in the event of sudden braking or a collision.
Storage compartment, drivers side
WARNING
Do not keep any sharp objects in the com- partment, or objects which protrude.
Jacket holder
The jacket holder is only designed for light clothing.
Tunnel console
Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and USB*/AUX input under the armrest.
Includes cup holder for driver and passen- ger. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter are
specified then there is a cigarette lighter in the 12 V socket for the front seat, see page 236, and a detachable ashtray in the cup holder.)
Armrest
When closed, the armrest can be adjusted* longitudinally.
Cigarette lighter and ashtray*
The ashtray in the tunnel console is detached by lifting the tray straight up.
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button. The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the heated coils.
1 With ice scraper holder on the drivers side. 2 Not applicable to textile upholstery.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
05
236 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Glovebox
The owner's manual and maps can be kept here for example. There are also holders for pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox can be locked* using the key blade, see pages 46 and 56.
Cooling3
The glovebox can also be used as a cooled area.
Start cooling by moving the control in towards the passenger compartment to the end position.
Switch off the cooling by moving the con- trol forwards to the end position.
Cooling is active when the climate control sys- tem is active, i.e. when the key is in position II or the engine is running.
Inlay mats*
Volvo supplies specially manufactured inlay mats.
WARNING
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat in the driver area is firmly affixed and secured in the pins in order to avoid getting caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
Vanity mirror
Vanity mirror with lighting.
The light illuminates automatically when the cover is lifted.
12 V socket
12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat.
The electrical sockets can be used for various accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. TV screens, music players and mobile phones. For the sockets to supply current, the remote control key must be in at least key position I, see page 79.
WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket when the socket is not in use.
3 Applicable only to cars with ECC.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 237
NOTE
Optional equipment and accessories - e.g. TV screens, music players and mobile phones - which are connected to one of the passenger compartment's 12V electrical sockets, could be activated by the climate control system, even when the remote con- trol key has been removed or when the car is locked, for example, when the parking heater is activated at a preset time.
For this reason remove the plugs from the electrical sockets for optional equipment or accessories when not in use because the battery could be drained in the event of such an occurrence!
IMPORTANT
Max. power takeoff is 10 A (120 W) in either socket.
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency puncture repair has been tested and approved by Volvo. For information on the use of Volvo's recommended temporary emergency puncture repair (TMK), see page 320.
Electrical socket in cargo area*
For more information, see page 296.
238 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on infotainment..................................................... 240 Radio..................................................................................................... 250 Media player......................................................................................... 257 External audio source via AUX/USB* input........................................... 261
Media Bluetooth * ................................................................................ 264
Bluetooth handsfree*.......................................................................... 267 Voice recognition* mobile phone.......................................................... 275 TV*......................................................................................................... 279 Remote control* ................................................................................... 282
INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
06
240 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
The Infotainment system consists of a radio, media player, TV* and the option to communi- cate with a mobile phone*. Information is pre- sented on a 5 or 7-inch* colour screen in the upper section of the centre console. Functions can be controlled via buttons in the steering wheel, under the colour display in the centre console or via a remote control*. The mobile phone can also be voice-controlled in certain cases.
If the Infotainment System is active when the engine is switched off then it is automatically activated the next time the key is inserted into key position I or higher, and it continues with the same source (e.g. radio) as before the engine was switched off (the driver's door must be closed on cars with Keyless systems*).
The infotainment system can be used for 15 minutes at a time without the remote control key being in the ignition switch by pressing the On/Off button.
When the car is being started the infotainment system is switched off temporarily and contin- ues when the engine has started.
NOTE
Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch if the infotainment system is used when the engine is switched off. This is to avoid discharging the battery unnec- essarily.
Dolby, Pro Logic1
Made under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Audyssey MultEQ1
The Audyssey MultEQ system has been used in the development and tuning of the sound to ensure a world-class sound experience.
1 Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia.
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 241
Overview
AUX2 and USB3 inputs for external audio sources (e.g. iPod )
Steering wheel keypad (with*/without thumbwheel).
TV screen. The TV screen is available in two sizes: 5 and 7-inch. The manual shows a 7-inch TV screen.
Centre console control panel
Operating the system Scroll/fast forward/search - A short
press scrolls among tracks or preset radio sta- tions4. A long press fast forwards through disc tracks or searches for the next available radio station.
SOUND - press for access to audio settings (bass, treble, etc.). For more information, see page 245.
VOL - raise or lower volume.
ON/OFF/MUTE - short press starts the system and long press (until the screen is off) switches off. Note that the whole of the Sensus system (including navigation * and phone func- tions*) starts/switches off at the same time. Briefly press to mute the sound (MUTE) or restore the sound if it had been switched off.
Main sources - press to select the main source (e.g. RADIO, MEDIA). Last active source is shown (e.g. FM1). A new source view is selected if the main source button is pressed while in RADIO or MEDIA. If you are in TEL* or NAV* and press the main source button then a shortcut menu is shown with commonly used menu options.
2 Applicable to Performance only 3 Not applicable to Performance 4 Does not apply to DAB.
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
06
242 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
OK/MENU - press the thumbwheel in the steering wheel or the button in the centre con- sole to accept a menu selection. If OK/MENU
is pressed while in the normal view, a menu for the selected source opens (e.g. RADIO or MEDIA). Arrow to the right of the screen is shown when there are underlying menus.
TUNE - turn the thumbwheel in the steering wheel or the knob in the centre console to scroll among tracks/folders, radio and TV* stations, phone contacts* or to navigate among choices on the TV screen.
EXIT - short press leads upwards in the menu system, interrupts current function, inter- rupts/rejects phone calls or erases entered characters. A long press leads to the normal view or, if already in the normal view, to the highest menu level (main source view). From there you can reach the same main source but- tons as those on the centre console (4).
INFO - If more information than can be shown on the screen is available, press the INFO button to see the remaining information.
Preset buttons, input of numbers and let- ters.
FAV shortcut to a favourite setting. The button can be programmed for a commonly used function in AM, FM, etc. For more infor- mation, see page 244.
MUTE5 - press to switch off the radio/media audio or restore the audio if it has been switched off.
Voice recognition6 - press to activate voice recognition (for mobile phone and navi- gation system connected via Bluetooth *).
5 Cars without navigation. 6 Cars with navigation*.
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
06
243
Menus
The example shows navigation to different functions when a disc is played back. (1) Main source button, (2) Normal view, (3) Shortcut/source menu, (4) Quick menu, (5) Source menu
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
06
244 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Select main source by pressing a main source button (1) (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL). To navigate through the source menus, use the con- trolsTUNE, OK/MENU, EXIT or the main source button (1).
For Menu overview, see page 246.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad with a thumbwheel*, these can be used instead of the controls in the centre console (TUNE, OK/MENU, EXIT), see page 241.
Menus and views in the TV screen
The appearance depends on the source, equipment in the car, settings, etc.
Main source button - press to switch the main source or to show the Shortcut/Source menu in the active source.
Normal view - normal mode for the source.
Shortcut/Source menu - shows com- monly used menu options in the main sources, e.g. TEL and MEDIA (accessed by pressing the active source's main source button (1)).
Quick menu - fast mode when TUNE is turned, e.g. for changing disc tracks, radio sta- tion, etc.
Source menu - for menu navigation (accessed by pressing OK/MENU).
FAV - store a preset
The FAV button can be used to store functions that are used frequently so that the function can be started simply by pressing FAV. You can select a favourite (e.g. Equalizer) for each function as follows:
In RADIO mode:
AM
FM1/FM2
DAB1*/DAB2*
In MEDIA mode:
DISC
USB*
iPod*
Bluetooth*
AUX
TV*
It is also possible to select and store a favourite for MY CAR, CAM* and NAV*. Favourites can also be selected and stored under MY CAR. For more information on the menu system MY
CAR, see page 203.
To store a function in the FAV button:
1. Select a main source (e.g. RADIO, MEDIA).
2. Select a wavelength or source (AM, Disc, etc.).
3. Press and hold the FAV button until the "favourites menu" is shown.
4. Turn TUNE to select an option from the list and press OK/MENU to save. > When the main source (e.g. RADIO,
MEDIA) is active the stored function is available via a short press on FAV.
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 245
General audio settings
Press SOUND to access the audio settings menu (Bass, Treble, etc.). Scroll forward with SOUND or OK/MENU to your selection (e.g. Treble).
Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and save the setting with OK/MENU.
Continue pressing SOUND or OK/MENU to access other options:
Surround7 - Can be set to the On/Off posi- tion. When On is selected, the system selects the setting for optimal sound repro- duction. Normally DPLII and then appear in the TV screen. If the recording is made with Dolby Digital technology then playback will take place with this setting,
then appears in the TV screen. When Off is selected, 3-channel stereo is available.
Bass - Bass level.
Treble - Treble level.
Fader Balance between the front and rear speakers.
Balance Balance between the left and right-hand speakers.
Subwoofer*7 - Bass speaker level.
DPL II centre level3 channel centre
level7 - Volume for centre speaker.
DPL II surround level7, 8 Level for sur- round.
Advanced audio settings
Equalizer9
The volume level can be adjusted separately for different wavelengths.
1. Press OK/MENU to access Audio
settings and select Equalizer.
2. Select wavelength by turning TUNE and confirm with OK/MENU.
3. Adjust the audio settings by turning TUNE and confirm with OK/MENU. Con- tinue in the same way with other wave- lengths you want to change.
4. When you have finished with audio set- tings, press EXIT to confirm and return to normal view.
For general information on menu navigation, see page 243 and menu overview, see page 246.
Sound stage7
The sound experience can be optimised for the driver's seat, both front seats or the rear seat. If there are passengers in both the front and rear seats then the option recommended is; both front seats. The options can be selected under Audio settings Sound stage.
For general information on menu navigation, see page 243 and menu overview, see page 246.
Audio volume and automatic volume
control
The audio system compensates for disrupting noises in the passenger compartment by increasing the volume in relation to the speed of the car. The compensation level can be set to low, medium, high or off. Select the level under Audio settings Volume
compensation.
For general information on menu navigation, see page 243 and menu overview, see page 246.
External audio source audio volume
If an external audio source (e.g. an MP3 player or iPod ) is connected to the AUX input then
7 Only Premium Sound Multimedia. 8 Only when Surround is activated. 9 Not Performance.
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
06
246
the audio source that is connected can have a different volume than the audio system's inter- nal volume (e.g. radio). Correct this by adjust- ing the volume of the input:
1. Press the MEDIA button and turn TUNE to AUX and wait a few seconds or press OK/
MENU.
2. Press OK/MENU and then turn TUNE to AUX input volume. Confirm with OK/
MENU.
3. Turn TUNE to adjust the volume for the AUX input.
NOTE
If the external audio source's volume is too high or too low, the quality of the sound may deteriorate. The audio quality may also be impaired if the player is charged while the infotainment system is in AUX mode. In which case, avoid charging the player via the 12 V socket.
Optimum sound reproduction
The audio system is pre-calibrated for opti- mum sound reproduction by means of digital signal processing.
This calibration takes into account loudspeak- ers, amplifiers, passenger compartment acoustics, listener position etc. for each com- bination of car model and audio system.
There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes into account the position of the volume control, radio reception and vehicle speed.
The controls explained in these operating instructions, e.g. Bass, Treble and Equalizer, are only intended for the user to be able to adapt the sound reproduction according to personal taste.
Menu overview
Menus RADIO
Main menu AM
AM menu
Show presets10
Scan
Audio settings11
Sound stage12
Equalizer13
Volume compensation
Reset all audio settings
Main menu FM1/FM2
FM menu
TP
Show radio text
Show presets10
Scan
News settings
10Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia. 11The menu options for audio settings are the same for all audio sources. 12Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia. 13Does not apply to Performance.
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247
Advanced settings
REG
Alternative frequency
EON
Set TP favourite
PTY settings
Reset all FM settings
Audio settings14
Main menu DAB1*/DAB2*
DAB menu
Ensemble learn
PTY filtering
Turn off PTY filtering
Show radio text
Show presets10
Scan
Advanced settings
DAB linking
DAB band
Sub channels
Show PTY text
Reset all DAB settings
Audio settings14
Menus MEDIA
Main menu CD Audio
Disc menu
Random
Scan
Audio settings14
Main menu CD/DVD10 Data
Disc menu
Play/Pause
Stop
Random
Repeat folder
Change subtitles
Change audio track
Scan
Audio settings14
Main menu DVD10 Video
DVD Video Menu
DVD disc menu
Play/Pause/Continue
Stop
Subtitles
Audio tracks
Advanced settings
Angle
DivX VOD code
Audio settings14
Main menu iPod13
iPod menu
Random
Scan
Audio settings14
Main menu USB13
USB menu
Play/Pause
14For submenus, see "Main menu AM". 10Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia. 13Does not apply to Performance.
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
06
248 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Stop
Random
Repeat folder
Select USB device
Change subtitles
Change audio track
Scan
Audio settings14
Main menu Media Bluetooth13
Bluetooth menu
Random
Change device
Remove Bluetooth device
Scan
Bluetooth software version in car
Audio settings14
Main menu AUX
AUX menu
AUX input volume
Audio settings14
Main menu TV*
TV menu
Select country
Reorganise presets
Autostore
Scan
Audio settings14
Pop-up menu15 video and TV*
Press OK/MENU when a video file is being played back or TV* is being shown in order to access the pop-up menu.
Image settings
Source menu16
DVD disc menu17
DVD disc TOP menu17
Menus TEL
Main menu Bluetooth handsfree13
Phone menu
All calls
All calls
Missed calls
Answered calls
Dialled calls
Call duration
Phone book
Search
New contact
Speed dials
Receive vCard
Memory status
Clear phone book
Change phone
Remove Bluetooth device
14For submenus, see "Main menu AM". 13Does not apply to Performance. 15Only applies when playing back videos or displaying TV*. 16What is shown in the pop-up menu for the source menu depends on what is being played back or displayed, it can be e.g. CD/DVD data menu or USB menu. 17Only applies to DVD video discs.
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
06
249
Phone settings
Discoverable
Sounds and volume
Download phone book
Bluetooth software version in car
Call options
Auto answer
Voicemail number
Disconnect phone
06 Infotainment system
Radio
06
250 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
Centre console, controls for radio functions.
RADIO button for selecting the wavelength (AM, FM1, FM2, DAB1*, DAB2*).
Station presets (0-9)
Confirm your selection or go to the radio menu by pressing OK/MENU.
Select the desired frequency/station or navigate in the radio menu by turning TUNE.
Hold in the button for next/previous avail- able station. Short press for preset.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad* and/or remote control* then in many cases these can be used instead of the buttons in the centre console. For a description of the buttons in the steering wheel, see page 241. For a description of the remote control, see page 282.
Menus
The menus inRADIO are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel key- pad*. For general information on menu naviga- tion, see page 243 and menu overview, see page 246.
Radio AM/FM
Tuning
NOTE
The reception is dependent both on how good the signal strength and signal quality are. The transmission may be disturbed by various factors such as tall buildings or the transmitter being far away. Coverage level can also vary depending on where in the country you are located.
Automatic tuning
1. Press RADIO, turn TUNE until the desired wavelength (AM, FM1 etc.) is shown, press OK/MENU.
2. Hold in / in the centre console (or in the steering wheel keypad*). The radio searches for the next/previous available station.
Station list1
The radio automatically compiles a list of the strongest FM stations whose signals it is cur- rently receiving. This enables you to find a sta- tion when you drive into an area where you do not know the radio stations and their frequen- cies.
To go to the list and select a station:
1. Select the desired wavelength (FM1 or FM2).
2. Turn TUNE one step in either direction. This displays the list of all stations in the area. The currently tuned station is indi- cated with enlarged text in the list.
3. Turn TUNE again in either direction to select a station from the list.
4. Confirm your choice by pressing OK/
MENU.
1 Does not apply to Performance.
06 Infotainment system
Radio
06
251
NOTE
The list only shows the frequencies of stations that are currently being received, not a complete list of all radio frequencies on the selected wave- length.
If the signal from the currently received station is weak, this may prevent the radio from updating the station list. If this occurs, press the button (while the station list is shown in the dis- play screen) in order to change to man- ual tuning and set a frequency. If the station list is no longer shown, turn TUNE one step in either direction to show the list again, and press to switch.
The list disappears from the TV screen after a few seconds.
If the station list is no longer shown, turn TUNE one step in either direction and press the
button in the centre console to change to manual tuning (or to return from manual tun- ing to the function for "Station list").
Manual tuning
The preset from the factory is that the radio shows the station list of the strongest stations
in the area when you turn TUNE (see the sec- tion "Station list", page 250). When the station list is shown, press the button in the cen- tre console to change to manual tuning. This allows you to select a frequency from the list of all available radio frequencies in the selected wavelength. In other words, if turn TUNE one step in a manual search the frequency is changed from e.g. 93.3 to 93.4 MHz, etc.
To manually select a station:
1. Press the RADIO button, turn TUNE until the required frequency band (AM, FM1
etc.) is displayed, press OK/MENU.
2. Turn TUNE to select a frequency.
NOTE
The preset from the factory is that the radio automatically searches for the stations in the area where you are driving (see previous section "Station list" above).
But if you have changed over to manual tun- ing (by pressing the button in the cen- tre console when the station list was shown), then the radio remains set in the function for manual tuning the next time you switch on the radio. To change back to the function for "Station list", turn TUNE one step (to show the complete list of stations) and press the button .
Note that if you press when the sta- tion list is not shown then INFO is activated. For more information on this function, see page 241.
Preset
10 presets can be stored per wavelength (AM, FM1 etc.).
The stored presets are selected using the pre- set buttons.
1. Tune into a station (see "Tuning", page 250).
2. Hold in one of the preset buttons for a few seconds, the sound disappears during this
06 Infotainment system
Radio
06
252
time and returns when the station is stored. The preset button can now be used.
A list of pre-selected channels can be shown2
in the TV screen. The function is activated/ deactivated in FM/AM mode under FM menu
Show presets or AM menu Show
presets.
RDS functions
RDS (Radio Data System) links FM transmitters into a network. An FM transmitter in such a network sends information that gives an RDS radio the following functions:
Automatically switches to a stronger trans- mitter if reception in the area is poor.
Searches for programme type, such as traffic information or news.
Receives text information on current radio programme.
NOTE
Some radio stations do not use RDS or only selected parts of its functionality.
If a required programme type is located the radio can switch stations interrupting the audio source currently in use. For example, if the CD
player is in use, it is paused. The interrupting transmission is played at a preset volume, see page 254. The radio returns to the previous audio source and volume when the set pro- gramme type is no longer broadcast.
The programme functions alarm (ALARM!), traffic information (TP), news (NEWS), and pro- gramme types (PTY) interrupt one another in order of priority, where alarm has the highest priority and programme types has the lowest. For additional settings of programming inter- ruptions (EON Distant and EON Local), see the section "Enhanced Other Networks EON" below. Press EXIT to return to the inter- rupted audio source, press the OK/MENU to clear the message.
Alarm
This function is used to warn of serious acci- dents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot be temporarily interrupted or deactivated. The message ALARM! appears on the TV screen when an alarm message is transmitted.
Traffic information TP
This function allows traffic information sent within a set station's RDS network to break through. The TP symbol indicates that the function is activated. If the preset station can
send traffic information then this is shown by TP glowing brightly in the TV screen, otherwise TP will be grey.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
menu TP.
Enhanced Other Networks EON
This function is useful in urban areas with many regional radio stations. It allows the distance between the car and the radio station trans- mitter to determine when programme functions should interrupt the current audio source.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode by select- ing one of the options under FM menu
Advanced settings EON:
Local interrupts only if the radio station transmitter is close.
Distant3 interrupts if the station trans- mitter is far away, even if there is a lot of static.
TP from selected station/all stations
The radio can only interrupt for traffic informa- tion from the selected station or all stations within the RDS network.
Go in FM mode to FM menu Advanced
settings Set TP favourite to change.
2 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia. 3 Factory settings.
06 Infotainment system
Radio
06
253
News
This function allows news broadcasts sent within a set station's RDS network to break through. The NEWS symbol indicates that the function is active.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
menu News settings News.
News from selected station/all stations
The radio can only interrupt for news from the selected station or all stations in the RDS net- work.
Go in FM mode to FM menu News
settings Set news favourite to change.
Programme types PTY
The PTY function can be used to select one or more programme types, such as pop music and serious classic. The PTY symbol indicates that the function is active. This function allows programme types broadcast within a set sta- tion's RDS network to break through.
1. Activate in FM mode by first selecting the programme types under FM menu
Advanced settings PTY settings
Select PTY.
2. Then the PTY function must be activated under FM menu Advanced settings
PTY settings Receive traffic
bulletins from other networks.
An indicator is shown in the TV screen when PTY is activated.
Deactivation of the PTY function is performed in FM mode under FM menu Advanced
settings PTY settings Receive traffic
bulletins from other networks. Selected pro- gramme types (PTY) are not reset.
Resetting and removing PTY are performed under FM menu Advanced settings
PTY settings Select PTY Clear all.
PTY search
This function searches the entire wavelength for the selected programme type.
1. In FM mode select one or more PTY under FM menu Advanced settings PTY
settings Select PTY.
2. Go to FM menu Advanced settings
PTY settings Seek PTY.
To finish searching, press EXIT.
To continue searching for another broad- cast of the selected programme types, press on or .
Display of programme type
The programme type of the current station can be shown on the TV screen.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
menu Advanced settings PTY
settings Show PTY text.
Radio text4
Some RDS stations transmit information on programme content, artists, etc. This informa- tion can be shown on the TV screen.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
menu Show radio text.
Automatic frequency update AF
The function selects the strongest transmitter for the set station. In order to find a strong transmitter the function may, in exceptional cases, need to search the entire FM wave- length.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
menu Advanced settings
Alternative frequency.
4 Only cars with 7-inch screen
06 Infotainment system
Radio
06
254 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Regional radio programmes REG
This function causes the radio to continue with a regional transmitter even if its signal strength is low. The symbol REG shows that the func- tion is active.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
menu Advanced settings REG.
Resetting RDS functions
All radio settings can be reset to the original factory settings.
The reset is carried out in FM mode under FM menu Advanced settings
Reset all FM settings.
Volume control, programme types
The interrupting programme types, e.g. NEWS or TP, are heard at the volume selected for each respective programme type. If the vol- ume level is adjusted during the programme interruption, the new level is saved until the next programme interruption.
Scan wavelength
The function automatically searches for avail- able channels and takes into account any pro- gramme type filtering. When a station is found, it is played for approx. 10 seconds before scanning is resumed. When a station is playing back it can be saved as a preset in the usual way, see the section Preset, page 251.
To start scanning go in FM/AM mode to FM menu Scan or AM menu Scan.
NOTE
Scanning stops if a station is saved.
Radio system - DAB*
General
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is a digital broadcasting system for radio. This system supports DAB, DAB+ and DMB.
NOTE
Coverage for DAB is not available in all loca- tions. If there is no coverage then the mes- sage No reception is shown in the display screen.
Service and Ensemble
Service - Channel, radio channel (only audio services are supported by the sys- tem).
Ensemble - A collection of radio channels on the same frequency.
Storing channel groups (Ensemble learn)
When the vehicle is moved to a new broad- casting area, programming of existing channel groups in the area may be necessary.
Programming of channel groups creates an updated list of all available channel groups. The list is not updated automatically.
Programming is carried out in the menu system in DAB mode under DAB menu Ensemble
learn. Programming can also take place as fol- lows:
1. Turn TUNE one step in either direction. > Ensemble learn is shown in the list of
available channel groups.
2. Press OK/MENU. > New programming is started.
Programming can be cancelled with EXIT.
Navigation in channel group list
(Ensemble)
To navigate in and access the channel group list turn TUNE. The name of the Ensemble is shown in the upper part of the TV screen. When switching to the new Ensemble the name changes to the new one.
Service - Shows channels irrespective of the channel group to which they are allo- cated. The list can also be filtered using the selection of programme type (PTY
filtering), see below.
06 Infotainment system
Radio
06
255
Scanning
The function automatically searches the cur- rent wavelength for strong stations. When a station is found, it is played for approx. 10 sec- onds before scanning is resumed. When a sta- tion is playing back it is saved as a preset in the usual way. For more information on presets, see "Preset" below.
Go in DAB mode to DAB menu Scan to start scanning.
NOTE
Scanning stops if a station is saved.
Scanning can also be selected in DAB-PTY mode. In which case only channels of the pre- selected programme type are played.
Programme type (PTY)
Various types of radio programmes can be selected using the programme type function. There are a number of different programme types which also include different programme categories. After selecting a programme type, navigation only takes place within the channels that are broadcasting that type.
Programme type is selected in DAB mode under DAB menu PTY filtering. Exit this mode as follows:
Press EXIT. > An indicator is shown in the TV screen
when PTY is activated.
In certain cases DAB radio will exit PTY mode when DAB to DAB linking (see below) is imple- mented.
Preset
10 station presets can be stored per wave- length. DAB has 2 memories for presets: DAB1 and DAB2. Storage of presets is made by means of a long press on the desired preset button, for more information see page 251. The stored presets are selected using the preset buttons.
A preset contains one channel but no sub- channels. If a subchannel is being played and a preset is saved then only the main channel is registered. This is because subchannels are temporary. At the next attempt to retrieve the preset, the channel which contained the sub- channel will be played. The preset is not dependent on the channel list.
A list of pre-selected channels can be shown5
in the TV screen. The function is activated/ deactivated in DAB mode under DAB menu
Show presets.
NOTE
The audio system's DAB system does not support all functions in the DAB standard.
Radio text
Some radio stations transmit information on programme content, artists, etc. This informa- tion is shown on the TV screen.
The function is deactivated/activated in DAB mode under DAB menu Show radio text.
NOTE
Only one of the functions "Show radio text" and "Show presets" can be acti- vated at a time. If one of them is activated when the other is already activated, then the previously activated function is deactivated automatically. Both functions can be deac- tivated.
5 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia
06 Infotainment system
Radio
06
256
Advanced settings
DAB to DAB link
DAB to DAB linking means that the DAB radio can go from one channel with poor or no recep- tion to the same channel in another channel group with better reception. There may be a certain delay when changing channel group. There may be a period of silence between the current channel no longer being available to the new channel becoming available.
The function can be activated/deactivated in DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced
settings DAB linking.
Wavelength
DAB can be transmitted on two6 wavelengths:
Band III - covers most areas.
LBand - available only in a few areas.
By selecting for example Band III on its own, channel programming takes place more quickly than if both Band III and LBand have been selected. It is not certain that all channel groups will be found. Wavelength selection does not affect the stored memories.
Wavelengths can be deactivated/activated in DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced
settings DAB band.
Subchannel
Secondary components are usually named subchannels. These are temporary and can contain e.g. translations of the main pro- gramme into other languages.
If one or more subchannels are broadcast then the symbol is shown to the left of the chan- nel name in the TV screen. A subchannel is indicated by the - symbol appearing to the left of the channel name in the TV screen.
Press to access the subchannels.
Subchannels can only be accessed on the selected main channel and not on any other channel without selecting it.
Display of subchannels can be deactivated/ activated in DAB mode under DAB menu
Advanced settings Sub channels
Programme type text
Some radio stations broadcast information about programme type and programme cate- gory, for information on Programme types PTY, see page 253. This information is shown on the TV screen.
The function is activated/deactivated in DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced
settings Show PTY text.
Resetting the DAB settings
All DAB settings can be reset to the original factory settings.
The reset is carried out in DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced settings
Reset all DAB settings.
6 Not all areas/countries use both wavelengths.
06 Infotainment system
Media player
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 257
CD/DVD1 functions
Centre console control panel.
Disc insert and eject slot
Disc eject
MEDIA button, activates last active media source. If you are already in a media source and press the MEDIA button then a short- cut menu is shown for commonly used menu options.
Input of numbers and letters.
Confirm your selection or go to the menu for the selected media source by pressing OK/MENU.
Select the disc tracks/folders, or navigate through menu options by turning TUNE.
Fast forward/reverse and change disc track or chapter2.
The media player supports and can play the following main types of discs and files:
Pre-recorded CD discs (CD Audio).
Burned CD discs with audio and/or video files1.
Pre-recorded DVD video discs1.
Burned DVD discs1 with audio and/or video files.
For more information about the supported for- mats, see page 260.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad* and/or remote control* then in many cases these can be used instead of the buttons in the centre console. For a description of the buttons in the steering wheel, see page 241. For a description of the remote control, see page 282.
Menus
The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel key-
pad*. For general information on menu naviga- tion, see page 243 and menu overview, see page 246.
Starting playback of a disc
Press the MEDIA button, turn TUNE until Disc is displayed, press OK/MENU. If there is a disc in the media player then the disc starts playing back automatically, otherwise Insert
disc is shown in the TV screen. Then insert a disc, with text side up. The disc starts to play back automatically.
If a disc with audio/video files is inserted into the player then the disc's folder structure needs to be loaded. Depending on the quality of the disc and the quantity of information there may be a certain delay before playback starts.
Disc eject
A disc remains in the ejected position for about 12 seconds, after which it is inserted back into the player for safety reasons.
Pause
When the volume is reduced entirely or MUTE is pressed, the media player is paused. When the volume is increased or MUTE is pressed again, the media player starts. It is also possi-
1 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia. 2 Only applies to DVD discs.
06 Infotainment system
Media player
06
258 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
ble to pause via the menu system3, press OK/
MENU, select Play/Pause.
Playback and navigation
CD audio discs
Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and navigate in the list. Use OK/MENU to confirm the selection of the disc track and start play- back. Press EXIT to cancel and exit the playlist. A long press on EXIT leads to the playlist's root level.
Disc tracks can also be changed by pressing on / on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad*.
Burned discs audio/video files1
Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist/folder structure and navigate in the list/structure. Use OK/MENU to confirm either selection of sub- folder or start of playback of the selected audio/video file. Press EXIT to either stop and exit the playlist or go up (back) in the folder structure. A long press on EXIT leads to the playlist's root level.
Audio/video files can also be changed by pressing / on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad*.
Audio files have the symbol , video files1
have the symbol and folders have the symbol .
When playback of a file is complete the play- back of the other files (of the same type) in that particular folder continues. Change4 of folder takes place automatically when all the files in the current folder have been played back. The system automatically detects and changes setting when a disc containing only audio files or only video files is loaded into the media player and then plays back these files. How- ever, the system does not change setting if a disc containing a mixture of audio and video files is loaded into the media player, but instead the player continues to play back the previous file type.
NOTE
A video film is only shown when the car is stationary. When the car is moving at a speed of over about 8 km/h no picture is shown and No visual media available while driving appears on the display screen, although the audio is heard during this time. The picture is shown again as soon as the car's speed falls below about 6 km/h.
NOTE
Some audio files that are copy-protected by record companies or privately copied audio files cannot be loaded by the player.
DVD video discs1
For playback of DVD video discs, see page 259.
Fast forward/reverse
Hold in the buttons / to fast forward/ rewind. Audio files are fast forwarded/rewound at one speed, while video files are fast forwar- ded/rewound at several speeds. Repeatedly press the buttons / to increase the fast
3 Does not apply to CD Audio 1 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia. 4 If Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place.
06 Infotainment system
Media player
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 259
forward/rewind speed for video files. Release the button to return to viewing at normal speed.
Scan5
This function plays the first ten seconds of each disc track/audio file. To scan:
1. Press OK/MENU
2. Turn TUNE to Scan
> The first 10 seconds of each disc track or audio file are played.
3. Cancel the scan with EXIT, the disc track or audio file being played back will con- tinue playing.
Random5
This function plays the tracks in random order. To listen to the tracks in random order:
1. Press OK/MENU
2. Turn TUNE to Random
3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate the function.
Disc tracks/audio files can be changed by pressing / on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad*.
Repeat folder6
This function makes it possible to play files in a folder over and over again. When the last file has been played out, playback of the first file starts again.
1. Press OK/MENU
2. Turn TUNE to Repeat folder
3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate the function.
Playback of DVD video discs1
Playback
When playing back a DVD video disc a disc menu may appear on the display screen. The disc menu gives access to additional functions and settings, such as selecting subtitles, lan- guage and scene selection.
NOTE
A video film is only shown when the car is stationary. When the car is moving at a speed of over about 8 km/h no picture is shown and No visual media available while driving appears on the display screen, although the audio is heard during this time. The picture is shown again as soon as the car's speed falls below about 6 km/h.
Navigation in the DVD video disc's menu
Navigation in the DVD video disc's menu is performed using the number keys in the centre console as illustrated above.
5 Does not apply to DVD video discs. 6 Only applies to audio/video files on burned discs or USB. 1 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
06 Infotainment system
Media player
06
260 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Changing chapter or title
Turn TUNE to access the list of chapters and navigate through them (if the film is being played back then it is paused). Press OK/
MENU to select the chapter, this also leads back to the original position (if the film was being played back then it is restarted). Press EXIT to access the title list.
Titles are selected in the title list by turning TUNE and the selection is confirmed with OK/
MENU, this also leads back to the chapter list. Press OK/MENU to activate the selection and return to the start position. Use EXIT to cancel the selection and this leads back to the original position (without any selection being made).
The chapter can also be changed by pressing on / on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad*.
Advanced settings7
Angle
If the DVD video disc supports it, the function can be used to choose from which camera position a particular scene should be shown. Go in disc mode to Disc menu Advanced
settings Angle.
DivX Video On Demand
The media player can be registered in order to play DivX VOD type files from burned discs or USB. The code for registration can be found in the menu system MY CAR Settings
Information DivX VOD code. For general information on menus, see under MY CAR, see page 203.
For more information visit www.divx.com/vod.
Picture settings7
You can adjust the settings (when the car is stationary) for brightness and contrast.
1. Press OK/MENU and select Image
settings, confirm with OK/MENU.
2. Turn TUNE to the adjustment option and confirm with OK/MENU.
3. Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and confirm with OK/MENU.
To return to the settings list, press the OK/
MENU or EXIT.
The picture settings can be reset to factory settings with the Reset option.
Compatible file formats
The media player can play back a variety of file types and is compatible with the formats in the following table.
NOTE
Dual format, double-sided discs (DVD Plus, CD-DVD format) are thicker than regular CD discs and therefore playback cannot be guaranteed and malfunction may arise.
If a CD contains a mixture of MP3 and CDDA tracks, all MP3s will be ignored.
Audio formatA CD audio, mp3, wma
Audio formatB CD audio, mp3, wma, aac, m4a
Video formatC CD video, DVD video, divx, avi, asf
A Applies to Performance. B Does not apply to Performance. C Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium
Sound Multimedia.
7 Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
06 Infotainment system
External audio source via AUX/USB* input
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 261
General
Connection points for external audio sources.
An external audio source, e.g. an iPod or MP3 player, can be connected to the audio system via any of the connections in the centre con- sole. An audio source connected to the USB input can then be handled1 with the car's audio controls. A device connected via the AUX input cannot be controlled via the car.
There is a recess in the right-hand rear edge of the tunnel console where cables can be routed so that the hatch can be closed without cables being pinched.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad* and/or remote control* then in many cases these can be used instead of the buttons in the centre console. For a description of the buttons in the steering wheel, see page 241. For a description of the remote control, see page 282.
An iPod or MP3 player with rechargeable bat- teries is recharged (when the ignition is on or the engine is running) if the device is plugged into the USB connection.
To connect the audio source:
1. Press MEDIA, turn TUNE to the required sound source USB, iPod or AUX, press OK/MENU. > If USB is selected then Connect USB is
shown in the TV screen.
2. Connect your audio source to one of the connections in the centre console's stor- age compartment (see previous illustra- tion).
The text Reading USB is shown in the TV screen when the system is loading the storage media's file structure. Depending on the file
structure and number of files there may be some delay before loading is finished.
NOTE
The system supports most iPod models produced in 2005 or later.
NOTE
To prevent damage to the USB connection, this is shut off if the USB connection is short-circuited or if a connected USB unit is taking too much power (this may happen if the unit connected does not meet the USB standard). The USB connection is reactiva- ted automatically the next time the ignition is turned on, unless the fault persists.
Menus
The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel key- pad*. For general information on menu naviga- tion, see page 243 and menu overview, see page 246.
1 Only applies to the media source connected via the USB connection.
06 Infotainment system
External audio source via AUX/USB* input
06
262 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Playback and navigation2
Turn TUNE to access the playlist/folder struc- ture and navigate in the list/structure. Use OK/
MENU to either confirm selection of subfolder or start of playback of the selected audio/video file. Press EXIT to either stop and exit the play- list or go up (back) in the folder structure. A long press on EXIT leads to the playlist's root level.
Audio/video files can also be changed by pressing / on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad*.
Audio files have the symbol , video files3
have the symbol and folders have the symbol .
When playback of a file is complete the play- back of the other files (of the same type) in that particular folder continues. Change4 of folder takes place automatically when all the files in the current folder have been played back. The system automatically detects and changes setting when a device containing only audio files or only video files is connected to the USB port and then it plays back these files. How- ever, the system does not change setting if a
device containing a mixture of audio and video files is connected to the USB port, but instead the player continues to play back the previous file type.
Fast forward/reverse2
See page 258.
Scan2
See page 259.
Random2
See page 259.
Search function2
The keypad on the control panel in the centre console can be used to find a filename in the current folder.
The search function is accessed either by turn- ing TUNE (to access the folder structure) or by pressing one of the letter keys. As a letter or character in a search string is entered you get closer to your search target.
Start playback of a file by pressing OK/
MENU.
Repeat folder5
See page 259.
Pause
When the volume is reduced entirely or MUTE is pressed, the media player is paused. When the volume is increased or MUTE is pressed again, the media player starts. It is also possi- ble to pause via the menu system6, press OK/
MENU, select Play/Pause.
Audio sources
USB memory
To facilitate the use of a USB memory stick, only store music files on it. It takes a lot longer for the system to load storage media that con- tains anything other than compatible music files.
2 Only applies to USB and iPod . 3 Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia. 4 If Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place. 5 Only applies to USB. 6 Does not apply to iPod
06 Infotainment system
External audio source via AUX/USB* input
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 263
NOTE
The system supports mobile media compli- ant with USB 2.0 and the FAT32 file system and can handle 1000 folders with a maxi- mum of 254 subfolders/files in every folder. The top level, which can handle up to 1000 subfolders/files, is an exception to this.
NOTE
When using a longer model USB memory stick the use of a USB adapter cable is rec- ommended. This is to avoid mechanical wear to the USB input and the connected USB memory stick.
USB hub
It is possible to connect a USB hub to the USB connection and thereby connect multiple USB devices simultaneously. Selection of USB device is made in USB mode under USB menu
Select USB device.
MP3 player
Many MP3 players have their own file systems that are not supported by the audio system. For use in the system, an MP3 player must be set in USB Removable device/Mass Storage
Device mode.
iPod
An iPod is charged and supplied with power by the USB connection* via the player's con- nection cable.
NOTE
The system only supports the playback of audio files from iPod .
NOTE
When an iPod is used as audio source, the car's infotainment system has a menu structure that is similar to the iPod player's own menu structure.
Compatible file formats via the USB connection
Audio and video files in the following table are supported by the system for playback via the USB connection.
Audio format mp3, wma, aac, m4a
Video formatA divx, avi, asf
A Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
06 Infotainment system
Media Bluetooth *
06
264 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
The car's media player is equipped with Bluetooth 1 and can wirelessly play streaming audio files from external devices with Bluetooth , such as mobile phones and PDAs. Navigation and control of the sound can be carried out via the centre console buttons or via the steering wheel keypad*. In some external devices it is also possible to change tracks from the device.
To play back the audio the car's media player must first be set in Bluetooth mode.
NOTE
The Bluetooth media player must support the Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP). The player should use AVRCP version 1.3, A2DP 1.2. Otherwise some functions may not work.
Not all mobile phones and external media players available in the market are fully com- patible with the Bluetooth function in the car's media player. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer or visit www.volvocars.com for information on compatible phones and external media players.
NOTE
The car's media player can only play the audio files via the Bluetooth function.
Menus
The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel key- pad*. For general information on menu naviga- tion, see page 243 and menu overview, see page 246.
Overview
Centre console control panel.
VOL volume.
MEDIA button. Last active source (e.g. iPod ) is activated automatically. If a
source is activated and you press MEDIA
then a shortcut menu is shown with com- monly used menu options.
Confirm your selection or go to the menu by pressing OK/MENU.
Navigate in the menu by turning TUNE.
EXIT - leads up in the menu system, stops the function in progress.
Short presses are used to scroll between audio files. Long presses are used to fast forward and rewind audio files.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad* and/or remote control* then in many cases these can be used instead of the buttons in the centre console. For a description of the buttons in the steering wheel, see page 241. For a description of the remote control, see page 282.
1 Applies to High Performance, High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
06 Infotainment system
Media Bluetooth *
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 265
Getting started
Connect an external Bluetooth device
A maximum of ten external devices can be reg- istered. The connection is made in the same way as for the phone, see Connect an external Bluetooth device, page 268.
Automatic connection
When the Bluetooth function is active and the last external device connected is in range it is connected automatically. When the infotain- ment system searches for the last device con- nected its name is shown in the TV screen. To connect to another device, press EXIT. Con- nect a new external device, see "Change to another external device" below.
Change to another external device
It is possible to change a connected device with another device if there are several devices in the car. However, the device must first have been paired, see "Connect an external Blue- tooth device" above. To change to another device:
1. Press MEDIA, turn TUNE until Bluetooth
is displayed, press OK/MENU.
2. Check that the external device is searcha- ble/visible via Bluetooth , see the manual for the external device.
3. Press OK/MENU.
4. Turn TUNE to Change device, and con- firm with OK/MENU. > After a while, the external device's name
is shown in the TV screen. If several external devices have been paired then these are also shown.
5. Select the device to be connected by turn- ing TUNE and confirm with OK/MENU. > Connection of the external device takes
place.
Change audio file by pressing / on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad*.
Disconnecting the device
Automatic disconnection takes place if the external device moves out of the infotainment system's range. For more information on con- nection, see page 265.
Remove the connected device
1. Press Bluetooth mode on OK/MENU.
2. Turn TUNE to Remove Bluetooth
device and confirm with OK/MENU.
3. Select the device to be removed by turning TUNE, and confirm with OK/MENU. > A prompt asking whether or not you
want to remove the connection is shown in the TV screen.
4. Press OK/MENU to confirm.
EXIT cancels.
Random2
This function plays back the audio files on the external device in random order. Activate/ deactivate the random function in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth menu Random.
Change audio file by pressing / on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad*.
Scanning of audio files in external
device2
This function play backs the first ten seconds of each audio file. Activate/deactivate the func- tion in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth menu
Scan.
Cancel scanning with EXIT.
2 Not supported by all mobile phones.
06 Infotainment system
Media Bluetooth *
06
266 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Version information Bluetooth
The car's current Bluetooth version can be seen in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth
menu Bluetooth software version in car.
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 267
General
A mobile phone equipped with Bluetooth can be connected wirelessly to the Infotainment system1. The infotainment system then works handsfree, with the option to control a range of the mobile phone's functions remotely. The microphone used is located by the driver's sun visor (2). The mobile phone can be operated by its own keys irrespective of whether or not it is connected.
NOTE
Only a selection of mobile phones are fully compatible with the handsfree function. Volvo recommends that you seek assis- tance from an authorised Volvo dealer or visit www.volvocars.com for information on compatible phones.
Menus
The menus in TEL are controlled from the cen- tre console and the steering wheel keypad*. For general information on menu navigation, see page 243 and menu overview, see page 246.
Overview
System overview
Mobile phone.
Microphone.
Steering wheel keypad.
Centre console control panel.
Phone functions, controls overview
Centre console control panel.
Number and letter buttons
TEL button activates/searches last con- nected phone. If a phone is already con- nected, and TEL is pressed, a shortcut menu is shown with commonly used menu options for the phone.
Accept incoming calls, confirm your selec- tion or go to the Phone menu by pressing OK/MENU.
TUNE - Turn in normal view to the right to access the phone book, and to the left for the call register for all calls; also used for
1 Applies to High Performance, High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
06
268 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
navigation among the options on the TV screen.
EXIT - Cancels/rejects phone calls, deletes input characters, leads up in the menu sys- tem and cancels the current function.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad* and/or remote control* then in many cases these can be used instead of the buttons in the centre console. For a description of the buttons in the steering wheel, see page 241. For a description of the remote control, see page 282.
Remember
Activate
A short press on TEL activates/searches last connected phone. If a phone is already con- nected, and TEL is pressed, a shortcut menu is shown with commonly used menu options for the phone. The symbol indicates that a phone is connected.
Connect an external Bluetooth device
A maximum of ten external devices can be reg- istered. Registration is performed once per device. After registration the device no longer needs to be activated as visible/searchable.
It is possible to have two Bluetooth devices connected simultaneously. One phone and one media device, which it is possible to switch between, see page 269 or see page 265. It is also possible to use the phone while streaming audio files from a connected device.
Connecting an external device takes place in different ways depending on whether or not the device has been connected previously. The connection options below presume that this is the first time the device is being connected and that no other device is connected.
There are two possible ways of connecting devices, either search for the external device from the car, or search for the car from the external device. If one option does not work then try with the other.
Example of normal view for phone.
If you are not already in the normal view, press TEL in the centre console.
Alternative 1 - search for the external device via the car's menu system
1. Make the external device searchable/visi- ble via Bluetooth , see the external devi- ce's manual or www.volvocars.com.
2. Press OK/MENU and follow the instruc- tions on the TV screen. > The external device is now connected to
the car and can be controlled from the car.
If connection failed, press EXIT twice and con- nect the device as described under Alternative 2.
Alternative 2 - Search for the car with the Bluetooth function of the external device.
1. Make the car searchable/visible via Bluetooth . Turn TUNE to Phone
settings, confirm with OK/MENU, select Discoverable and confirm with OK/
MENU.
2. Select My Volvo Car on the screen of the external device and follow the instructions.
3. Enter a PIN code in the external device and then select to connect.
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 269
4. Press OK/MENU and enter the same PIN code via the car keypad in the centre con- sole.
Once the external device is connected, its Bluetooth name appears on the car's TV screen and the unit can be controlled from the car.
Automatic connection
When the handsfree function is active and the last mobile phone connected is in range it is connected automatically. If the last connected mobile phone is not available then the system will try to connect a mobile phone that was paired earlier. When the audio system searches for the last phone connected its name is shown in the TV screen.
Manual connection
If you want to change the connected mobile phone, go in phone mode to Phone menu
Change phone.
Change to another external device
It is possible to change a connected device with another device if there are several devices in the car. However, the device must first have been registered to the car, see Connect an external Bluetooth device. To change to another device:
1. Check that the external device is searcha- ble/visible via Bluetooth , see the manual for the external device.
2. Press TEL and then select Change
phone. > The car searches for previously con-
nected devices. The external devices detected are specified with their respec- tive Bluetooth name in the TV screen.
3. Select the device to be connected by turn- ing TUNE and confirm with OK/MENU. > Connection of the external device takes
place.
To call
1. Make sure that the symbol appears at the top of the TV screen and that the handsfree function is in phone mode.
2. Dial either the desired number or speed dial number, see page 274. Or in normal view turn TUNE to the right to access the phone book, and to the left for the call reg- ister for all calls. For information on the phone book, see page 271.
3. Press OK/MENU.
The call is interrupted with EXIT.
Disconnecting the mobile phone
Automatic disconnection takes place if the mobile phone moves out of the audio system's range. The connection to the mobile phone can be manually broken in phone mode under Phone menu Disconnect phone. For more information on connection, see page 268.
The handsfree function is deactivated when the engine is switched off and the door is opened2.
When the mobile phone has been discon- nected an ongoing call can be continued by using the mobile phone's built-in microphone and speaker.
NOTE
Even when your mobile phone has been manually disconnected, some mobile phones may automatically couple up to the last handsfree unit connected, e.g. when a new call begins.
Remove the device
A connected mobile phone can be deregis- tered and removed. This is performed in phone mode under Phone menu Remove
Bluetooth device.
2 Only Keyless Drive.
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
06
270 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Making and receiving calls
Incoming call
Press OK/MENU to answer the call, even if the audio system is in e.g. RADIO or MEDIA mode.
Refuse or end with EXIT.
Automatic answer
The automatic answer function means that calls are accepted automatically.
Activate/deactivate in phone mode under Phone menu Call options Auto
answer.
In call menu
Press OK/MENU during an ongoing call to access the following functions:
Mute - audio system microphone is muted.
Mobile phone - the call is transferred from handsfree to the mobile phone. For some mobile phones the connection is interrup- ted. This is normal. The handsfree function asks if you want to reconnect.
Dial number - option to call a third party using the number keys (current call set in standby).
Call lists
The call lists are copied to the handsfree func- tion at each new connection and are then updated during the connection. In normal view, turn to the left with TUNE to see the call register for All calls .
In phone mode it is possible to see all the call lists under Phone menu All calls:
All calls
Missed calls
Answered calls
Dialled calls
Call duration
NOTE
Certain mobile phones show a list of the last dialled numbers in reverse order.
Voice mailbox
In normal view a speed dial number for the voice mailbox can be programmed in and then accessed later via a long press on 1.
Voice mailbox number is changed in phone mode under Phone menu Call options
Voicemail number Change number. If there is no number stored then this menu can be reached with one long press on 1.
Audio settings
Phone call volume
The phone call volume can only be changed during a call. Use the steering wheel keypad* or turn the VOL control.
Audio system volume
Providing there is no ongoing call taking place, the audio system volume is controlled as usual by turning VOL.
If an audio source is active during an incoming call then it can be muted automatically. Acti- vate/deactivate in phone mode under Phone
menu Phone settings Sounds and
volume Mute radio/media.
Ring volume
In phone mode go to Phone menu Phone
settings Sounds and volume Ring
volume and adjust by turning VOL. Press OK/
MENU to hear the audio volume. Press EXIT
to save.
Ring signals
The handsfree function has integrated ring sig- nals that can be selected in phone mode under Phone menu Phone settings Sounds
and volume Ring signals Ring signal 1
etc.
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 271
NOTE
For some mobile phones, the ringtone on the phone connected will not be switched off when one of the inbuilt signals for the handsfree system is used.
In order to select the connected phone's ring signal3, go in phone mode to Phone menu
Phone settings Sounds and volume
Ring signals Mobile phone ring signal.
Phone book
There are two phone books. These are merged into one in the car and are displayed as a single phone book in the car.
The car downloads the mobile phone's phone book and only displays this phone book when the mobile phone from which this phone book was downloaded is con- nected.
The car also has a built-in phone book. This contains all the contacts stored in the car irrespective of which phone was con- nected when saving them. These contacts are visible for all users, regardless of the mobile phone that is connected to the car. If a contact is saved in the car then the
symbol is shown in front of the con- tact in the phone book.
NOTE
Changes made from the car to a record in the mobile phone's telephone book will result in a new record in the car's telephone book, i.e. changes will not be saved to the phone. From the car, this will now look like you have double records, with different icons. Note also that when a shortcut num- ber is saved or a change to a contact is made, this will result in a new record in the car's phone book.
All use of the phone book requires that the symbol appears at the top of the TV
screen and that the handsfree function is in phone mode.
The audio system stores a copy of the phone book from each paired mobile phone. The phone book can be copied automatically to the audio system during each connection.
Activate/deactivate the function in phone mode under Phone menu Phone
settings Download phone book.
If the phone book contains a ringing caller's contact information then this is shown in the TV screen.
Quick search for contacts
In normal view turn TUNE to the right to obtain a list of contacts. Turn TUNE to select and press OK/MENU to call.
Under the name of the contact is the phone number that is selected by default. If the sym- bol appears to the right of the contact then there are several phone numbers stored for the contact. Press OK/MENU to show the num- bers. Change and dial a number other than that selected by default by turning TUNE. Press OK/MENU to dial.
Search in the list of contacts by using the cen- tre console's keypad to key in the start of the contact's name (see "Character table keypad in centre console" for button functions).
The list of contacts can also be accessed from normal view by pressing and holding the button on the centre console's keypad with the letter that the contact searched for starts with. For example, a long press on the button for 6 gives instant access to that part of the list where the contacts with the letter M are located.
3 Not supported by all mobile phones.
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
06
272 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Character table keypad in centre
console
Key Function
Space . , - ? @ : ; / ( ) 1
A B C 2
D E F 3
G H I 4
J K L 5
M N O 6
P Q R S 7
T U V 8
W X Y Z 9
Shift between upper and lower case letter.
Key Function
+ 0 p w
# *
Searching for contacts
Search contacts using the text wheel.
Character list
Changing the input mode (see table below)
Phone book
To search for or edit a contact, go in phone mode to Phone menu Phone book
Search.
NOTE
There is no text wheel for High Performance, so TUNE cannot be used there to input characters: only the digit and letter buttons on the control panel in the centre console can be used for this.
1. Turn4 TUNE to the desired letter, press OK/MENU to confirm. The number and letter buttons on the control panel in the centre console can also be used.
2. Continue with the next letter and so on. The result of the search is shown in the phone book (3).
3. To change the input mode to numbers or special characters, or to go to the phone book, turn TUNE to one of the options (see explanation in the table below) in the list for changing the input mode (2), press OK/
MENU.
4 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 273
123/ ABC
Change between letters and numbers with OK/MENU.
More Change to special characters with OK/MENU.
Leads to the phone book (3). Turn TUNE to select a contact, press OK/MENU to see the saved numbers and other infor- mation.
A short press on EXIT deletes an input char- acter. A long press on EXIT will clear all entered characters.
By pressing a number key in the centre console when the text wheel is shown (see illustration above), a new character list (1) appears in the TV screen. Continue repeatedly pressing the number key to the desired letter and then release. Continue with the next letter and so on. When a button is depressed the entry is confirmed when another button is depressed.
To enter a number, hold in the corresponding number key.
New contact
Entering letters for New contact.
Changing the input mode (see table below)
Input field
New contacts can be added in phone mode under Phone menu Phone book New
contact.
NOTE
There is no text wheel for High Performance, so TUNE cannot be used there to input characters: only the digit and letter buttons on the control panel in the centre console can be used for this.
1. When the Name row is selected, press OK/MENU to reach the input mode (illus- tration above).
2. Turn4 TUNE to the desired letter, press OK/MENU to confirm. The number and letter buttons on the control panel in the centre console can also be used.
3. Continue with the next letter and so on. The name entered is shown in the input field (2) in the TV screen.
4. To change the input mode to numbers, special characters, change between uppercase/lowercase letters, etc., turn TUNE to one of the options (see explana- tion in the table below) in the list (1) and then press OK/MENU.
When the name has been fully entered, select OK in the list on the TV screen (1) and press OK/MENU. Now continue with the telephone number in the same way as above.
When the telephone number has been entered, press OK/MENU and select a telephone num- ber type (Mobile phone, Home, Work or General). Press OK/MENU to confirm.
When all details have been filled in, select Save
contact in the menu to save the contact.
4 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
06
274 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
123/ ABC
Change between letters and numbers with OK/MENU.
More Change to special characters with OK/MENU.
OK Save and go back to Add con-
tact with OK/MENU.
Change between uppercase and lowercase letters with OK/
MENU.
Press OK/MENU, the cursor moves to the input field (2) at the top of the TV screen. The cursor can now be moved, with TUNE, to the appropriate place to e.g. insert new letters or delete with EXIT. To be able to insert new letters first go back to the input mode, by pressing OK/MENU.
Speed dial numbers
Use phone mode to add speed dial numbers under Phone menu Phone book Speed
dial.
Dialling with speed dial numbers can be per- formed in phone mode using the number keys on the keypad in the centre console, by press- ing a number key and then pressing OK/
MENU. If there is no contact stored on the
speed dial number then an option is shown to save a contact to the selected speed dial num- ber.
Receiving a vCard
It is possible to receive a vCard to the car's phone book from other mobile phones (other than the one currently connected to the car). In order to allow this the car is set to visible mode for Bluetooth . The function is activated in phone mode under Phone menu Phone
book Receive vCard.
Memory status
Memory status of the car's phone book and the connected mobile phone's phone book can be seen in phone mode under Phone menu
Phone book Memory status.
Delete phone book
The car's phone book can be deleted, this is carried out in phone mode under Phone menu
Phone book Clear phone book.
NOTE
Deleting the car's telephone book only dele- tes contacts in the car's telephone book. Contacts in the mobile phone's phone book are not deleted.
Version information Bluetooth
The car's current Bluetooth version can be seen in phone mode under Phone menu
Phone settings Bluetooth software
version in car.
06 Infotainment system
Voice recognition* mobile phone
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 275
General
The infotainment system's voice recognition1
allows the driver to voice-activate certain func- tions in a Bluetooth -connected mobile phone or in Volvo's navigation system - RTI (Road and Traffic Information System).
NOTE
The information in this section describes the use of voice commands to control a mobile phone connected
using Bluetooth . For detailed infor- mation on using a mobile phone con- nected using Bluetooth with the car's Infotainment system see page 267.
The Volvo navigation system RTI (Road and Traffic Information System) has a separate user manual which contains more information on voice control and voice commands to control that sys- tem.
Voice commands offer convenience and help the driver to avoid being distracted, and instead concentrate on driving and focus attention on the road and traffic conditions.
WARNING
The driver always holds overall responsibil- ity for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and complying with all applicable rules of the road.
The voice recognition system allows the driver to voice-activate certain functions of a Bluetooth -connected mobile phone and in Volvo's navigation system - RTI (Road and Traffic Information System), while the driver can keep his/her hands on the wheel at the same time. The input data are in dialogue form with spoken commands from the user and ver- bal replies from the system. The voice recog- nition system uses the same microphone as the Bluetooth handsfree system (see illustra- tion on page 267) and the voice recognition system's replies come via the car's speakers.
Language
Language list.
Voice recognition is not possible for all lan- guages. Languages available for voice recog- nition are marked with an icon in the language list - . Changing the language is performed in the menu system MY CAR, see page 205.
1 Only applies to vehicles equipped with Volvo's navigation system - RTI (Road and Traffic Information System).
06 Infotainment system
Voice recognition* mobile phone
06
276 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Remember
Steering wheel keypad.
Button for voice recognition
To activate the system
Before voice commands to a mobile phone can be used the mobile phone must be paired and connected via Bluetooth handsfree. If a tele- phone command is given and no mobile phone is paired, then the system will provide informa- tion about this. For information on pairing and connecting a mobile phone, see page 268.
Press the button for voice recognition (1) in order to activate the system and initiate a dialogue with voice commands. The sys- tem will then display commonly used com- mands in the TV screen in the centre con- sole.
Keep the following things in mind when you use the voice recognition system:
For a command - speak after the tone, with normal voice at normal speed.
Do not speak while the system is replying (the system cannot understand commands during this time).
The car's doors and windows must be closed.
Avoid background noise in the passenger compartment.
NOTE
If the driver is unsure of which command to use, he (she) can say "Help" - the system then responds with a few different com- mands which can be used in the current sit- uation.
Voice commands can be disabled by:
saying "Cancel"
not speaking
a long press on the steering wheel but- ton for Voice recognition
Press EXIT or another main source but- ton (e.g. MEDIA).
Help functions for voice recognition
Instructions: A function that helps you get familiar with the system and the procedure for giving commands.
Voice training: A function that enables the voice recognition system to learn to know your voice and your accent. The function provides an opportunity to voice train two user profiles.
The help functions can be accessed by press- ing the MY CAR button on the control panel in the centre console and then turning TUNE to the desired menu option.
Instructions
The instructions can be started in two ways:
NOTE
This instruction and voice training can only be started when the car is parked.
Press the button for Voice recognition and say "Voice instructions".
Activate the instructions in the menu sys- tem MY CAR under Settings Voice
settings Voice tutorial. For a descrip- tion of the menu system, see page 203.
The instructions are divided into 3 lessons, which take around 5 minutes in total to com- plete. The system starts with the first lesson.
06 Infotainment system
Voice recognition* mobile phone
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 277
To skip a lesson and go to the next one, press the button for voice recognition and say "Next". Go back to the previous lesson by say- ing "Previous".
Exit the instructions by means of a long press on the button for voice recognition.
Voice training
The system displays up to fifteen phrases for you to say. Voice training can be started in the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Voice settings Voice training. Choose between User 1 or User 2. For a description of the menu system, see page 203.
After voice training has been completed, remember to set your user profile under Voice
user setting.
Additional settings in MY CAR
User setting - Two user profiles can be set, the function is activated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Voice
settings Voice user setting. Choose between User 1 or User 2. For a descrip- tion of the menu system, see page 203.
Voice volume - Can be changed in the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Voice settings Voice output volume. For a description of the menu system, see page 203.
Using voice commands
The driver initiates a dialogue with the voice commands by pressing the button for voice recognition (see illustration on page 276).
Once a dialogue has been started, commonly used commands will be shown in the TV screen. Greyed-out text or text within brackets is not included in the spoken command.
When the driver becomes accustomed to the system, he/she can speed up the command dialogue and skip the prompts from the sys- tem, by briefly pressing the button for voice recognition.
Commands can be given in several ways
The command "Phone call contact" can be pronounced as e.g.:
"Phone > Call contact" - Say "Phone", wait for the system's reply, and then continue by saying "Call contact."
or
"Phone call contact" - Say the whole com- mand in one sequence.
Quick commands
Quick commands for the phone can be found in the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Voice settings Voice command list
Phone commands and General commands.
For a description of the menu system, see page 203.
Dial a number
The system understands the numbers 0 (zero) to 9 (nine). These numbers can be pronounced individually, in groups of several numbers at a time, or the whole number all at once. Numbers greater than 9 (nine) cannot be handled by the system, e.g. 10 (ten) or 11 (eleven) are not pos- sible.
The following is an example of a dialogue with voice commands. The system's reply will vary depending on the situation.
The user starts the dialogue by saying:
Phone > call number
or
Phone call number
System reply
Number?
User action
Start saying the numbers (as individual units, i.e. six-eight-seven, etc.) in the phone number. If you say several numbers and pause, the sys- tem will repeat them, and then say "Continue".
Continue to say the numbers. When finished, finish the command by saying "Call".
You can also change the number by saying the commands "Correct" (which deletes
06 Infotainment system
Voice recognition* mobile phone
06
278 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
the last spoken group of numbers) or "Delete" (which deletes the whole spoken phone number).
Dialling from the call register
The following dialogue allows you to make a phone call from one of your mobile phone's call registers.
The user starts the dialogue by saying:
Phone > call from the call register
or
Phone call from the call register
Continue by responding to the system's prompts.
Call a contact
The following dialogue allows you to call your pre-defined contacts in the mobile phone.
The user starts the dialogue by saying:
Phone > call contact
or
Phone call contact
Continue by responding to the system's prompts.
Consider the following when you call a contact:
If there are several contacts with similar names, they will be presented in the dis-
play in the numbered rows and the system prompts you to select a row number.
If there are more rows in the list than can be displayed simultaneously, saying "Down" allows you to scroll down in the list (and saying "Up" allows you to scroll up in the list).
Calling voice mailbox
The following dialogue allows you to call your voice mailbox to check if you have received any messages. The phone number for your voice mailbox must be registered in the Bluetooth function, see page 270.
The user starts the dialogue by saying:
Phone > call voice mailbox
or
Phone call voice mailbox
Continue by responding to the system's prompts.
06 Infotainment system
TV*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 279
General
NOTE
This system only supports TV transmissions in countries which transmit signals in mpeg-2 format and follow the DVB-T stand- ard. The system does not support TV trans- missions in mpeg-4 format or analogue transmissions.
NOTE
The TV picture is only shown when the car is stationary. When the car is moving at a speed over about 6 km/h the picture disap- pears, No visual media available while driving appears on the display screen, although the audio is heard during this time. The picture reappears when the car has stopped.
NOTE
The reception is dependent both on how good the signal strength and signal quality are. The transmission may be disturbed by various factors such as tall buildings or the TV transmitter being far away. Coverage level can also vary depending on where in the country you are located.
IMPORTANT
A TV licence is required for this product in some countries.
Menus
The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel key- pad*. For general information on menu naviga- tion, see page 243 and menu overview, see page 246.
Overview
Centre console control panel.
Station presets, numeric input.
MEDIA button. Last active source (e.g. iPod or TV) is activated. If a source is acti- vated and you press MEDIA then a short-
cut menu is shown with commonly used menu options.
Confirm your selection or go to the menu by pressing OK/MENU.
Navigate in channel lists or menus by turn- ing TUNE.
EXIT - leads up in the menu system, stops the function in progress.
The next available channel is shown by pressing / .
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad* and/or remote control* then in many cases these can be used instead of the buttons in the centre console. For a description of the buttons in the steering wheel, see page 241. For a description of the remote control, see page 282.
Watch TV
Press MEDIA, turn TUNE until TV is shown in the display, press OK/MENU. > A search starts and after a short while
the most recently used channel is shown.
Changing channel
It is possible to change channel as follows:
06 Infotainment system
TV*
06
280 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Turn TUNE, a list of all available channels in the area is shown. If any of these chan- nels is already saved as a preset then its preset number is shown to the right of the channel name. Continue turning TUNE to reach the desired channel and press OK/
MENU.
By pressing the preset buttons (0-9).
Via a short press on the / buttons the next available channel in the area is shown.
NOTE
If the car has been moved within the coun- try, for example, from one city to another, it is not certain that the presets are available at the new location as the frequency range may have changed. In which case, carry out a new search and save a new preset list, see the function "Save the available TV channels as presets", page 280.
NOTE
If no reception is available on the preset buttons, it may be because the car is at a location other than where the scan of TV channels was run, for example, if the car was driven from Germany to France. A new selection of country and a new search may then need to be carried out.
Searching TV channels/Preset list
1. Press TV mode on OK/MENU.
2. Turn TUNE to TV menu and press OK/
MENU.
3. Turn TUNE to Select country and press OK/MENU. > If one or more countries have previously
been selected then they are shown in a list.
4. Turn TUNE to either Other countries or one of the previously selected countries. Press OK/MENU. > A list of all available countries is shown.
5. Turn TUNE to the desired country (e.g. Sweden) and press OK/MENU. > An automatic scan for available TV
channels starts, this scan takes a little while. During this time the figure for each channel found and added as a pre- set is shown. When the scan is com- plete a message is shown and the pic- ture is shown. A preset list (max. 30 pre- sets) has now been created and is avail- able. To change channel, see page 279.
The scan and preset storage can be cancelled with EXIT.
Channel management
The preset list can be edited. You can change the order of the channels that are shown in the preset list. A TV channel can have more than one place in the preset list. The TV channel positions can also vary in the preset list.
To change the order in the preset list, go in TV mode to TV menu Reorganise presets.
1. Turn TUNE to the channel you want to move in the list and confirm with OK/
MENU. > The selected channel is highlighted.
2. Turn TUNE to the new location in the list and confirm with OK/MENU. > The channels change places with each
other.
After the preset channels (max. 30) come all the other channels available in the area. It is pos- sible to move a channel up to a place in the preset list.
Save the available TV channels as
presets
If the car has been moved within the country, for example, from one city to another, it is not certain that the presets are available at the new location as the frequency range may have changed. In which case, carry out another scan and save a new preset list.
06 Infotainment system
TV*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 281
1. Press TV mode on OK/MENU.
2. Turn TUNE to TV menu and press OK/
MENU.
3. Turn TUNE to Autostore and press OK/
MENU. > An automatic scan for available TV
channels starts, this scan takes a little while. During this time the figure for each channel found and added as a pre- set is shown. When the scan is com- plete a message is shown and the pic- ture is shown. A preset list (max. 30 pre- sets) has now been created and is avail- able. To change channel, see page 279.
Scanning the TV channels
This function automatically scans through the frequency range for all channels available in the area where you are. When a channel is found, it is shown for approx. 10 seconds before scanning is resumed. Scanning is stopped with EXIT, then the channel that you just watched continues to be shown. Scanning does not affect the preset list.
Activate scanning in TV mode under TV menu
Scan.
Teletext
It is possible to read Teletext. Follow these steps:
1. Press the button on the remote con- trol.
2. Enter the page number (3 digits) with the number keys (0-9) to select page. > The page is shown automatically.
Enter new page number, or press the remote control buttons / to go to the next page.
Return to TV screen with EXIT or by pressing the button on the remote control.
It is also possible to control the teletext with the coloured buttons on the remote control.
Information about the current programme
Press the INFO button in order to display the information about the current programme, the next programme and its start time. If the INFO button is pressed once more then addi- tional information on the current programme can sometimes be displayed, such as start and end times and a brief description of the current programme. For more information on the INFO button, see page 241.
To return to the TV picture, wait several sec- onds or press EXIT.
Picture settings
The settings for brightness and contrast can be adjusted. For more information, see page 260.
The reception is lost
If the reception for the TV channel that is being shown disappears then the picture will freeze. Shortly after this a message appears informing that the reception has been lost for the current TV channel, and a new search for the channel continues. When the reception returns the dis- play of the TV channel starts immediately. It is possible to change channel at any time when the message is shown.
If the message Reception lost, searching is shown then this is because the system has detected that there is no reception for all TV channels. One possible reason may be that a border has been crossed and that the system is set to the wrong country. In which case, change to the right country in accordance with "Searching TV channels/Preset list", see page 280.
06 Infotainment system
Remote control*
06
282 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
Corresponds to TUNE in the centre con- sole.
The remote control can be used for all func- tions in the infotainment system. The remote control's buttons have the same functions as the buttons in the centre console or steering wheel keypad*.
When using the remote control, first press the remote control's button to position F. Then aim the remote control at the IR receiver, which is located to the right of the INFO button (see page 241) in the centre console.
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc. in the glove compartment or other com- partments. Otherwise they may injure peo- ple in the car in the event of sudden braking or a collision.
NOTE
Do not expose the remote control to direct sunlight (e.g. on the instrument panel) - oth- erwise problems may arise with the batter- ies.
Functions
Key Function
F = Front TV screen
Change to navigation*
Change to radio source (AM, FM1 etc.)
Change to media source (Disc, TV* etc.)
Change to Bluetooth hands- free*
Scroll/fast rewind, change track/ song.
Play/pause
Stop
Scroll/fast forward, change track/song
Menu
To previous, cancels function, deletes input characters
06 Infotainment system
Remote control*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 283
Key Function
Navigate up/down
Navigate right/left
Confirm selection or go to the menu system for the selected source
Volume, decrease
Volume, increase
0-9 Preset channels, number and let- ter input
Shortcuts for favourite setting
Information about the current programme, song, etc. Also used when there is more information available than can be shown in the TV screen
Selection of language for sound- track
Key Function
Subtitles, selection of language for text
Teletext*, On/Off
Replacing the battery in the remote control
NOTE
Battery life is normally 1-4 years and depends on how much the remote control is used.
The remote control is powered by four batter- ies of the AA/LR6 type.
Take along extra batteries for a long journey.
1. Push down the catch on the battery cover and slide the battery cover in the direction of the infrared lens.
2. Remove the used batteries, turn the new batteries in accordance with the symbols in the battery compartment and fit them.
3. Refit the cover.
NOTE
Be sure to dispose of the exhausted batter- ies in an environmentally safe manner.
284
Recommendations during driving......................................................... 286 Refuelling.............................................................................................. 289 Fuel....................................................................................................... 291 Loading................................................................................................. 294 Cargo area............................................................................................ 297 Driving with a trailer.............................................................................. 299 Towing and recovery............................................................................. 305
DURING YOUR JOURNEY
07 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
07
286
General
Economical driving
Driving economically means driving smoothly while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving style and speed to the prevailing conditions.
Drive in the highest gear possible, adapted to the current traffic situation and road - lower engine speeds result in lower fuel consumption.
Avoid driving with open windows.
Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration and heavy braking.
Remove unnecessary items from the car - the greater the load the higher the fuel con- sumption.
Use engine braking to slow down, when it can take place without risk to other road users.
A roof load and ski box increase air resis- tance, leading to higher fuel consumption - remove the load carriers when not in use.
Do not run the engine to operating tem- perature at idling speed, but rather drive with a light load as soon as possible - a cold engine consumes more fuel than a warm one.
Cars with manual transmission are started in 2nd gear under normal conditions on flat ground.
For more information and further advice, see the pages 11 and 376.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving, such as downhill, this deactivates important systems such as the power steering and brake servo.
Driving in water
The car can be driven through water at a maxi- mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of 10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised when passing through flowing water.
During driving in water, maintain a low speed and do not stop the car. When the water has been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and check that full brake function is achieved. Water and mud for example can make the brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake function.
Clean the electric contacts of the electric engine block heater and trailer coupling after driving in water and mud.
Do not let the car stand with water over the sills for any long period of time - this could cause electrical malfunctions.
IMPORTANT
Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter.
In depths greater than 25 cm, water could enter the transmission. This reduces the lubricating ability of the oils and shortens the service life of these systems.
In the event of the engine stalling in water, do not try restart - tow the car from the water to a workshop - an authorised Volvo work- shop is recommended. Risk of engine breakdown.
Engine, gearbox and cooling system
Under special conditions, for example hard driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk that the engine and drive system may overheat - in particular with a heavy load.
For information about overheating when driv- ing with a trailer, see page 300.
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of the grille when driving in hot climates.
If the temperature in the engine's cooling system is too high the instrument panel's warning symbol is illuminated and there is a text message displayed there High
engine temp Stop safely - stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes to cool down.
07 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
07
287
If the text message High engine temp
Stop engine or Coolant level low, Stop
engine is shown then the engine must be switched off after stopping the car.
In the event of overheating in the gearbox a built-in protection function is activated which, amongst other things, illuminates the instrument panel's warning symbol and there is a text message displayed there Transmission hot Reduce speed or Transmission hot Stop safely - follow the recommendation given and lower the speed and stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for a few minutes to allow the gearbox to cool down.
If the car overheats, the air conditioning may be switched off temporarily.
Do not turn the engine off immediately you stop after a hard drive.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to operate for a time after the engine has been switched off.
Open tailgate
WARNING
Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car through the cargo area.
Do not overload the battery
The electrical functions in the car load the bat- tery to varying degrees. Avoid using the key position II when the engine is switched off. Instead use the I mode - which uses less power.
Also, be aware of different accessories that load the electrical system. Do not use functions which use a lot of power when the engine is switched off. Examples of such functions are:
ventilation fan
headlamps
windscreen wiper
audio system (high volume).
If the battery voltage is low the information dis- play shows the text Low battery Power save
mode. The energy-saving function then shuts down certain functions or reduces certain functions such as the ventilation fan and/or audio system.
In which case, charge the battery by star- ting the engine and then running it for at
least 15 minutes - battery charging is more effective during driving than running the engine at idling speed while stationary.
Before a long journey
Check that the engine is working normally and that fuel consumption is normal.
Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid).
Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths.
Carrying a warning triangle is a legal requirement in certain countries.
Winter driving
Check the following in particular before the cold season:
The engine coolant must contain at least 50% glycol. This mixture protects the engine against frost erosion down to approximately 35 C. To achieve optimum antifreeze protection, different types of gly- col must not be mixed.
The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent condensation.
Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate star- ting in cold weather and also reduce fuel consumption while the engine is cold. For more information on suitable oils, see page 372.
07 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
07
288
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard driving or in hot weather.
The condition of the battery and charge level must be inspected. Cold weather pla- ces great demands on the battery and its capacity is reduced by the cold.
Use washer fluid to avoid ice forming in the washer fluid reservoir.
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo rec- ommends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is a risk of snow or ice.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement in certain countries. Studded tyres are not permitted in all countries.
Slippery driving conditions
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under controlled conditions to learn how the car reacts.
07 During your journey
Refuelling
07
289
Refuelling
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
Open the fuel filler flap by slightly pressing in the rear part of the hatch.
Take out the flap.
Close the flap after fuelling.
For locking/unlocking of the fuel filler flap see page 57. The fuel filler flap locking logic also follows the locking or unlocking of the keyless- drive and the central locking system. Fuel filler flap locking always occurs after a 10-minute delay.
Opening the fuel filler flap manually
The fuel filler flap can be opened manually when it cannot be opened from outside.
Open/remove the side hatch in the cargo area (same side as fuel filler flap).
Carefully pull the line back in a straight line. The flap can now be opened from outside.
IMPORTANT
Pull the wire gently - minimal force is required to disengage the hatch lock.
Filling up with fuel
The fuel tank is fitted with a coverless fuel filler system.
Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler opening. Take care to insert the nozzle properly into the filler pipe. The filler pipe consists of two opening covers. The nozzle must be pushed past both covers before refuelling is started.
Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump nozzle cuts out.
NOTE
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather.
07 During your journey
Refuelling
07
290
NOTE
Avoid spillage by waiting approx. 5-8 seconds after refuelling before carefully removing the nozzle.
Filling with a fuel can
When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel located under the floor hatch in the cargo area. Take care to insert the funnel properly into the filler pipe. The filler pipe consists of two open- ing covers. The funnel must be pushed past both covers before filling is started.
07 During your journey
Fuel
07
291
General information on fuel
Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended by Volvo must not be used as engine power and fuel consumption is negatively affected.
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and fuel splashing in the eyes.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol and diesel are highly toxic and could cause per- manent injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swallowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- ting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to fire and injury.
IMPORTANT
Mixtures of various fuel types or use of fuels which are not recommended will invalidate Volvo's guarantees and any supplementary service agreements; this is applicable to all engines.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi- nation with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car's performance.
Catalytic converters
The purpose of the catalytic converters is to purify exhaust gases. They are located close to the engine so that operating temperature is reached quickly.
The catalytic converters consist of a monolith (ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/rho- dium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chem- ical reaction without being used up them- selves.
Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel economy.
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This value is fed into an electronic system that con- tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel to air directed to the engine is continuously adjusted. These adjustments create optimal conditions for efficient combustion, and together with the three-way catalytic converter reduce harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, car- bon monoxide and nitrous oxides).
Petrol
Petrol must fulfil the EN 228 standard. Most engines can be run with octane ratings of 95 and 98 RON. Only in exceptional cases should 91 RON be used.
95 RON can be used for normal driving.
98 RON is recommended for optimum per- formance and minimum fuel consumption.
When driving in temperatures above +38 C, fuel with the highest possible octane rating is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy.
IMPORTANT
Use only unleaded petrol to avoid dam- aging the catalytic converter.
Do not use any additives which have not been recommended by Volvo.
07 During your journey
Fuel
07
292
Diesel
Only use diesel fuel from well-known produc- ers. Never use diesel of dubious quality. Diesel should fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204 stand- ards. Diesel engines are sensitive to contami- nants in the fuel, such as excessively high vol- umes of sulphur particles for example.
At low temperatures (-6 C to -40 C), a paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which may lead to ignition problems. Special diesel fuel designed for low temperatures around freezing point is available from the major oil companies. This fuel is less viscous at low tem- peratures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre- cipitate.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When refuelling, check that the area around the fuel filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter- gent and water.
IMPORTANT
Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European diesel standard.
The sulphur content must be a maximum of 50 ppm.
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels that must not be used:
Special additives
Marine diesel fuel
Heating oil
FAME1 (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) and vegetable oil.
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in accordance with Volvo recommendations and generate increased wear and engine damage that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.
Empty tank
The design of the fuel system in a diesel engine means that if the vehicle runs out of fuel, the tank may need to be vented in the workshop in order to restart the engine after fuelling.
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel star- vation, the fuel system needs a few moments to carry out a check. Do this before starting the engine, once the fuel tank has been filled with diesel:
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and push it in to the end position (see page 79).
2. Press the START button without depress- ing the brake and/or clutch pedal.
3. Wait approx. 1 minute. 4. To start the engine: Depress the brake and/
or clutch pedal and then press the START button again.
NOTE
Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel shortage:
Stop the car on as flat/level ground as possible - if the car is tilting there is a risk of air pockets in the fuel supply.
Draining condensation from the fuel filter
The fuel filter separates condensation from the fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine opera- tion.
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet or if you suspect that the car has been filled with contaminated fuel.
1 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of FAME, but further amounts must not be added.
07 During your journey
Fuel
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 293
IMPORTANT
Certain special additives remove the water separation in the fuel filter.
Diesel particle filter (DPF)
Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter, which results in more efficient emission con- trol. The particles in the exhaust gases are col- lected in the filter during normal driving. So- called "regeneration" is started in order to burn away the particles and empty the filter. This requires the engine to have reached normal operating temperature.
Filter regeneration takes place automatically and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may take a little longer at a low average speed. Fuel con- sumption may increase slightly during regen- eration.
Regeneration in cold weather
If the car is frequently driven short distances in cold weather then the engine does not reach normal operating temperature. This means that regeneration of the diesel particle filter does not take place and the filter is not emptied.
When the filter has become approximately 80% full of particles, a warning triangle on the instrument panel illuminates, and the message Soot filter full See manual is shown on the instrument panel display.
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car until the engine reaches normal operating tem- perature, preferably on a main road or motor- way. The car should then be driven for approx- imately 20 minutes more.
NOTE
A smaller reduction of engine power may be noticed temporarily during regeneration.
When regeneration is complete the warning text is cleared automatically.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that the engine reaches normal operating tempera- ture more quickly.
IMPORTANT
If the filter is completely filled with particles, it may be difficult to start the engine and the filter is non-functional. Then there is a risk that the filter will need to be replaced.
Fuel consumption and emissions of carbon dioxide
Fuel consumption figures may change if the car is equipped with extra equipment that affects the car's weight. See information on weights page 369 and table page 376.
The manner in which the car is driven, and other non-technical factors can also affect fuel consumption.
Consumption is higher and power output lower for fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi- nation with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car's performance.
07 During your journey
Loading
07
294
General information on loading
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight. For more detailed infor- mation on weights, see page 369.
The tailgate is opened via a button on the lighting panel or the remote con-
trol key, see page 56.
WARNING
The cars driving properties change depending on the weight and positioning of the load.
To bear in mind when loading
Position the load firmly against the rear seat's backrest.
Note that objects must not prevent the function of the WHIPS system for the front seats if any of the rear seat's backrests is folded down,see page 25.
Centre the load.
Heavy objects should be placed as low as possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on lowered backrests.
Cover sharp edges with something soft to avoid damaging the upholstery.
Secure all loads to the load retaining eye- lets with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.
WARNING
The protection provided by the inflatable curtain in the headlining may be compro- mised or eliminated by high loads.
Never load cargo above the backrest.
WARNING
Always secure the load. Always secure the load. During heavy braking the load may otherwise shift, causing personal injury to the car's occupants.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with something soft.
Switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading/unloading long items. Otherwise you may accidentally knock the gear lever or gear selector with the load into a drive position - and the car could then move off.
Front seat
The passenger seat backrest can also be folded for an extra long load, see page 81.
Roof load
Using load carriers
To avoid damaging the car and for maximum possible safety while driving, the load carriers designed by Volvo are recommended.
Carefully follow the installation instructions supplied with the carriers.
Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. Lash the load securely with retaining straps.
Distribute the load evenly over the load carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.
The size of the area exposed to the wind, and therefore fuel consumption, increase with the size of the load.
Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy braking and hard cornering.
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving cha- racteristics are altered by roof loads. For information about the maximum allowable load on the roof, including load carriers and any space box, see page 369.
07 During your journey
Loading
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 295
Lowering the rear seat backrest
To simplify loading in the cargo area, the rear seat backrest can be folded down, see page 84.
Load retaining eyelets
The load retaining eyelets are used to fasten straps in order to anchor items in the cargo area.
WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which protrude may cause injury under violent braking.
Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
Bag holder
The bag holders keep carrier bags in place and prevent them from overturning and spreading their contents around the cargo area. The holder has a capacity of max. 3 kg.
Bag holder
Folding bag holder*
Folding bag holder
A folding bag holder in the floor can be opened up in three positions. It can be set to two adjustment positions and one service position, as it is known, where it is fully unfolded. There are also two floor combination variants, one with adjustment positions in a tub under the floor and one with adjustment positions in plas- tic rails. The raising below shows the adjust- ment position in a tub under the floor.
The load on the central holder is max. 3 kg, and max. 10 kg on the outer holder.
07 During your journey
Loading
07
296 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Lift the handle* on the upper floor and fold up the floor.
Move the floor forwards to an appropriate position and place it in the adjustment groove.
3. In service position, the floor is moved all the way forwards towards the rear seat back and placed in the plastic support in the centre.
12 V socket*
Lower the cover to access the electrical socket.
The socket also provides voltage when the remote control key is not in the ignition switch.
IMPORTANT
Max. socket current is 10 A (120 W).
NOTE
Remember that using the electrical socket with the engine switched off involves the risk of discharging the car's battery.
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency puncture repair has been tested and approved by Volvo. For information on the use of Volvo's recommended temporary emergency puncture repair (TMK), see page 320.
07 During your journey
Cargo area
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 297
Cargo net*
The cargo net is fitted into four mounting points.
A cargo net prevents cargo from being thrown forward in the passenger compartment in the event of heavy braking. For safety reasons, the cargo net must always be correctly fastened and secured. The mesh is made of a strong nylon fabric and secured behind the front seat backrests.
WARNING
Loads in the luggage compartment must be anchored well, and also have a correctly fit- ted safety net.
Attaching
NOTE
The easiest way to fit the safety net is via one of the rear doors.
WARNING
It is necessary to ensure that the upper securing points of the safety net are fitted correctly and that the puller-straps are secured properly. Damaged nets must not be used.
1. Unfold the cargo net and make sure that the split upper rod is locked in the extended position.
2. Hook one end of the rod into the roof mounting with the anchoring strap locks turned towards you.
3. Hook the other end of the rod into the roof mounting on the opposite side - the tele- scopic spring-loaded retaining hooks facil- itate alignment. Take care to press forward the rod's retaining hooks for each respec- tive roof mounting's front end position.
4. Hook the cargo net's anchoring straps into the eyes on the rear of the seat slide rails - it is easier if the backrests are straightened and the seats are moved forward slightly.
Pay attention to make sure that you do not press the seat/backrest hard against the net when the seat/backrest is moved back again - only adjust until the seat/backrest makes contact with the net.
IMPORTANT
If a seat/backrest is pushed backwards hard into the safety net then the net and/or its roof mounts may be damaged.
5. Tension the cargo net with the anchoring straps.
07 During your journey
Cargo area
07
298
Removal and storage
The cargo net can be easily removed and folded up.
Release the tension in the net by pressing in the button on the anchoring strap's lock and feeding out part of the strap.
Press in the catch and detach both of the anchoring strap's hooks.
Unhook the rod from its roof mounting by pulling back on the rod in the roof mount- ings' rear end position. Press the rod in any direction so that the hook engages in the rod, which at the same time releases the hook on the other side.
Finally, remove the remaining roof mount- ing hook from the roof mounting.
4. Break the rod in the centre, fold it together and roll up the net.
Insert the net in the storage bag.
The folded cargo net is stored in its bag in the luggage compartment.
Hat shelf
The hat shelf can be removed to provide addi- tional cargo space.
Hat shelf removal
Undo the hat shelf lifting eyes on both sides.
Unhook the front edge of the hat shelf and remove it.
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 299
General
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight. For more detailed information on weights, see page 369.
If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo, then the car is delivered with the necessary equip- ment for driving with a trailer.
The car's towing bracket must be of an approved type.
If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped for driving with a trailer.
Distribute the load on the trailer so that the weight on the towing bracket complies with the specified maximum towball load.
Increase the tyre pressure to the recom- mended pressure for a full load. For tyre pressure label location, see page 318.
The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer.
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is brand new. Wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km.
The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your speed.
For safety reasons, the maximum permit- ted speed for the car when coupled with a trailer should not be exceeded. Follow the regulations in force for the permitted speeds and weights.
Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long, steep ascents.
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 12%.
Trailer cable
An adapter is required if the car's towing bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has 7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground.
Direction indicators and brake lights on
the trailer
If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indica- tors are broken, then the combined instrument panel's symbol for direction indicators flashes faster than normal and the display shows the text Bulb fail - Ind. signal trailer.
If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light are broken then the Bulb fail - Stop lamp
trailer text is shown.
Level control*
The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant height irrespective of the car's load (up to the maximum permissible weight). When the car is
stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly, which is normal.
Trailer weights
For information on Volvo's permitted trailer weights, see page 370.
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo. The maximum permitted speed for a car with a trailer attached is 100 km/h. National vehicle regulations may further restrict the trailer weight and speed. Towbars can be certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow.
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking.
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
07
300
Manual gearbox
Overheating
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.
Do not run the engine at higher revolutions than 4500 rpm (diesel engines: 3500 rpm) - otherwise the oil temperature may become too high.
Diesel engine 5-cyl
In the event of a risk of overheating the optimal speed for the engine is 2300-3000 rpm for optimal circulation of the coolant.
Automatic gearbox
Overheating
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.
An automatic gearbox selects the optimum gear related to load and engine speed.
In the event of overheating a warning sym- bol illuminates on the instrument panel combined with a text message - follow the recommendation given.
Steep inclines
Do not lock the automatic transmission in a higher gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not always a good idea to drive at a high gear with low engine revolutions.
IMPORTANT
See also the specific information on slow driving with trailer for cars with the Powershift automatic transmission on page 119.
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Activate the parking brake.
3. Move the gear selector to position P.
4. Release the foot brake.
Move the gear selector to park position P when parking an automatic car with a hitched trailer. Always use the parking brake.
Block the wheels with chocks when park- ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill.
Starting on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Move the gear selector to driving posi- tion D.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Release the foot brake and start driving off.
Towing bracket
If the car is equipped with a removable towbar, the installation instructions for the loose sec- tion must be followed carefully, see page 302.
WARNING
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable towbar:
Follow the installation instructions care- fully.
The detachable section must be locked with the key before setting off.
Check that the indicator window shows green.
Important checks
The towbar's towball must be cleaned and greased regularly.
WARNING
The moving parts of the detachable towbar must not be lubricated/oiled. This may reduce safety.
NOTE
When a hitch with a vibration damper is used, the towball must not be lubricated.
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
07
301
Storing the detachable towbar
The storage location for the removable towbar.
IMPORTANT
Always remove the detachable towbar after use and store it in the designated location in the car.
Specifications
G 02
14 85
Dimensions, mounting points (mm)
A 887
B 79
C 881
D 441
E 109
F 306
G Side member
H Ball centre
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
07
302
Fitting of removable towbar
Remove the protective cover by first press- ing in the catch and then pulling the cover straight back .
G 02
14 87
Ensure that the mechanism is in the unlocked position by turning the key clock- wise.
G 02
14 88
The indicator window must show red.
G 02
14 89
Insert the towball section until you hear a click.
G 02
14 90
The indicator window must show green.
G 00
00 00
Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi- tion. Remove the key from the lock.
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
07
303
G 02
14 94
Check that the towball section is secure by pulling it up, down and back.
WARNING
If the towball is not fitted correctly then it must be detached and reattached in accordance with the previous instructions.
IMPORTANT
Only grease in the ball for the towball hitch, the remainder of the towbar must be clean and dry.
G 02
14 95
Safety cable.
WARNING
Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable in the intended bracket.
Removal of removable towbar
Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the unlocked position.
Push in the locking wheel and turn it anticlockwise until you hear a click.
Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it comes to a stop. Hold it in this position while pulling the towball rearward and upward.
WARNING
Secure the detachable towbar safely if it is stored in the car, see page 301.
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
07
304 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Push the protective cover until it snaps tight.
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA*
The TSA system (Trailer Stability Assist) serves to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it begins to snake.
The TSA function is part of the DSTC system (Dynamic Stability and Traction Control), see page 138.
Function
The snaking phenomenon can occur with any car/trailer combination. Normally, snaking occurs at extremely high speeds. But, there is a risk of it occurring at lower speeds (70-90 km/h) if the trailer is overloaded or the load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a triggering factor, e.g.:
Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and powerful side wind.
Car with trailer drives on an uneven road surface or in a pothole.
Sweeping steering wheel movements.
Operation
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or even impossible to suppress. This makes the car/trailer combination difficult to control and there is a risk that you could, for example, end up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway.
TSA system continually monitors car move- ments, particularly lateral movements. If snak- ing is detected, the front wheels are individually braked. This serves to stabilise the car/trailer combination. This is often enough to help the driver regain control of the car.
If snaking is not eliminated the first time the TSA system comes into action, the car/trailer combination is braked with all wheels and engine power is reduced. Once snaking has been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer combination is once again stable, the TSA sys- tem stops regulating and the driver once again has full control of the car.
Miscellaneous
The TSA system can engage within the speed interval 65 to 160 km/h.
NOTE
TSA function is switched off if the driver selects Sport mode, see page 138.
TSA may fail to engage if the driver uses severe steering wheel movements to try to rectify the snaking because in such a situation the TSA system cannot determine whether it is the trailer or the driver that is causing the snaking.
The DSTC symbol in the combined instrument panel flashes when the
TSA is working.
07 During your journey
Towing and recovery
07
305
Towing
Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for towing before towing begins.
1. Unlock the steering lock by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch and giving a long press on the START/
STOP ENGINE button - key position II is activated, see page 79 for more informa- tion on key positions.
2. The remote control key must remain in the ignition switch while the car is being towed.
3. Keep the towline taut when the towing vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot gently pressed on the brake pedal - thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.
4. Be prepared to brake to stop.
WARNING
Check that the steering lock is unlocked before towing.
The remote control key must be in key position II - in position I all airbags are deactivated.
Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when the car is being towed.
WARNING
The brake servo and power steering do not work when the engine is switched off - the brake pedal needs to be depressed about 5 times more heavily and the steering is considerably heavier than normal.
Manual gearbox
Prior to towing:
Move gear lever into neutral and release the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox Geartronic
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward.
Do not tow cars with automatic trans- mission at speeds higher than 80 km/h or for distances in excess of 80 km. Fol- low the speeds that are permitted in accordance with local traffic regula- tions.
Prior to towing:
Move the gear selector to position N and release the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox Powershift
The model with Powershift transmission should not be towed as it is dependent on the engine running in order to receive sufficient lubrication. If towing still has to take place, the route must be as short as possible and then with very low speed.
In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not the car is equipped with Powershift transmis- sion, this can be verified by checking the des- ignation on the transmission's label under the bonnet - see page 366. The designa- tion MPS6 means that it is Powershift trans- mission otherwise it is Geartronic automatic transmission.
07 During your journey
Towing and recovery
07
306
IMPORTANT
Avoid towing.
However, the car can be towed for a short distance at low speed to move it from a dangerous position - not further than 10 km and not faster than 10 km/h. Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling for- ward.
In the event of moving a longer distance than 10 km, the car must be transported with the drive wheels raised from the road - professional recovery is recom- mended.
Prior to towing:
Move the gear selector to position N and release the parking brake.
Jump starting
Do not tow the car to bump start the engine. Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged and the engine does not start, see page 114.
IMPORTANT
The catalytic converter may be damaged during attempts to tow-start the engine.
Towing eye
The towing eye is screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover on the right-hand side of the bumper, front or rear.
Attaching the towing eye
Take out the towing eye that is located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
NOTE
To access the towing eye/wheel wrench in the foam block:
Version 1: Lift the compressor unit for the emergency puncture repair kit (point 5) to access the wheel wrench. Lift out the bottle of sealant (point 6) to access the towing eye.
Version 2: Lift the compressor unit for the emergency puncture repair kit (point 5) to access the towing eye. The wheel wrench is located underneath the jack.
The cover for the towing eye's attachment point is available in two variants which must be opened in different ways:
Open the variant with a recess using a coin or similar inserted in the recess, turning it outwards. Then turn out the cover completely and remove it.
The second variant has a marking along one side or in a corner: Press the mark- ing with a finger and fold out the oppo- site side/corner at the same time using a screwdriver - the cover turns around its axis and can then be removed.
07 During your journey
Towing and recovery
07
307
Screw the towing eye right in up to its flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g. using the wheel wrench.
The towing eye is unscrewed after use. Place the towing eye back in its position.
Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
NOTE
On certain cars with towbar fitted the towing eye cannot be attached in the rear bracket. Attach the towrope in the towbar.
For this reason it is advisable to store the detachable towbar's towball in the car.
Recovery
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be transpor- ted with the wheels rolling forward.
308 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General ................................................................................................. 310 Changing wheels .................................................................................. 314 Tyre pressure ....................................................................................... 318 Warning triangle and first-aid kit*.......................................................... 319 Emergency puncture repair (TMK)* ...................................................... 320
WHEELS AND TYRES
08 Wheels and tyres
General
08
310
Driving characteristics
Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte- ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pres- sure and speed rating are important for how the car performs.
Direction of rotation
G 02
17 78
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to only turn in one direction have the direction of rotation marked with an arrow. The tyre must always rotate in the same direction throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only be switched between front and rear positions, never between left and right-hand sides, or vice versa. If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's braking characteristics and capacity to force rain and slush out of the way are adversely affected.
Tyres with the greatest tread depth should always be fitted to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk of skidding).
NOTE
Make sure that both pairs of wheels have the same type and dimension, and also the same make.
Follow the recommended tyre pressures specified in the tyre pressure table, see page 378.
Tyre care
Tyre age
All tyres older than 6 years old should be checked by an expert even if they seem undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even if they are hardly ever or never used. The func- tion can therefore be affected. This applies to all tyres that are stored for future use. Exam- ples of external signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discol- oration.
New tyres
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin to harden at the same time as the friction capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible when you replace them. This is espe- cially important with regard to winter tyres. The last four digits in the sequence mean the week and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking (Department of Transportation), and this is stated with four digits, for example 1510. The tyre in the illustration was manufac- tured in week 15 of 2010.
Summer and winter tyres
When summer and winter wheels are changed the wheels should be marked with which side of the car they were mounted on, for example L for left and R for right.
08 Wheels and tyres
General
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 311
Wear and maintenance
The correct tyre pressure results in more even wear, see page 318. Driving style, tyre pres- sure, climate and road condition affect how quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid dif- ferences in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can be switched with each other. A suitable dis- tance for the first change is approx. 5000 km and then at 10 000 km intervals. Volvo recom- mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for checking if you are uncertain about tread depth. If significant differences in wear (>1 mm difference in tread depth) between tyres have already occurred, the least worn tyres must always be placed on the rear. Understeer is normally easier to correct than oversteer, and leads to the car continuing for- wards in a straight line rather than having the rear end skidding to one side, resulting in pos- sible complete loss of control over the car. This is why it is important for the rear wheels never to lose grip before the front wheels.
Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging up - and not standing up.
WARNING
A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control over the car.
Tyres with tread wear indicators
G 02
18 29
Tread wear indicators.
Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless bands across the width of the tread. On the side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height with the tread wear indicators. Change to new tyres as soon as possible. Remember that tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip in rain and snow.
Rims and wheel bolts
Low wheel bolt
High wheel bolt
Locking wheel bolts
Tightening torque:
Type 1 wheel bolt (steel rim): 110 Nm
Type 2 wheel bolt (aluminium rim): 130 Nm
Type 3 Lockable wheel bolt (steel/alu-
minium rim): 110 Nm
Only use rims that are tested and approved by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accesso- ries. Check the torque with a torque wrench.
Locking wheel bolts*
Locking wheel bolts* can be used on both alu- minium and steel rims. Under the cargo area
08 Wheels and tyres
General
08
312
floor there is space for the sleeve for the lock- able wheel bolts.
Winter tyres
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four wheels.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types are most suitable.
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for 500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country.
Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem- peratures place considerably higher demands on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo there- fore recommends not to drive on winter tyres
that have a tread depth of less than 4 millime- tres.
Using snow chains
Snow chains may only be used on the front wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).
Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva- lent chains designed for the car model, and tyre and rim dimensions. In the event of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you consult an authorised Volvo workshop. The wrong snow chains may cause serious damage to your car and lead to an accident.
Specifications
The car has whole vehicle approval. This means that certain combinations of wheels and tyres are approved. For the permissible com- binations, see page 378
Wheel (rim) dimensions
Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimen- sions, for example: 7Jx16x50.
7 Rim width in inches
J Rim flange profile
16 Rim diameter in inches
50 Off-set in mm (dis- tance from wheel centre to wheel con- tact surface against the hub)
Tyre dimensions
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres. Example of designation: 215/55R16 97W.
205 Tyre width (mm)
50 Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre width (%)
R Radial ply
17 Rim diameter in inches (")
93 Codes for the maximum permitted tyre load, tyre load index (LI)
W Speed rating for maximum permitted speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case 270 km/h).
08 Wheels and tyres
General
08
313
Load index
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, a load index (LI). The car's weight determines the load capacity required of the tyres. Mini- mum permitted index is specified in the table, see page 378.
Speed ratings
Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum speed, a speed rating (Speed Symbol; SS).
Tyre speed class must at least correspond with the car's top speed. Minimum permitted speed rating is specified in the table, see page 378.
The only exception to these conditions is win- ter tyres (both those with metal studs and those without), where a lower speed rating may be used. If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for example, class Q can be driven at a maximum of 160 km/h).
Traffic regulations determine how fast a car can be driven, not the speed rating of the tyres.
NOTE
The maximum permitted speed is specified in the table.
Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)
T 190 km/h
H 210 km/h
V 240 km/h
W 270 km/h
Y 300 km/h
WARNING
The car must be fitted with tyres which have the same or a higher load index (LI) and speed rating (SS) than specified. If a tyre with too low a load index or speed rating is used, it may overheat.
08 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
08
314 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Spare wheel*1
The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only intended for use temporarily and must be replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as pos- sible. The car's handling may be altered by the use of the spare wheel. The spare wheel is smaller than the normal wheel. The car's ground clearance is affected accordingly. Pay attention to high kerbs and do not machine wash the car. If the spare wheel is fitted on the front axle, you cannot use snow chains at the same time. On all-wheel drive cars the drive on the rear axle can be disconnected. The spare wheel must not be repaired. The correct tyre pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the tyre pressure table, see page 378.
IMPORTANT
Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare wheel on the car.
The car must never be driven fitted with more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.
Taking out the spare wheel
The spare wheel* plus jack* and wheel wrench* are stored under the floor in the lug- gage compartment.
1. Lift the rear edge of the luggage compart- ment floor (or on models with a jointed lug- gage compartment floor, take hold of the luggage compartment floor handle, lift and move the rear part of the floor forwards).
2. Lift out the storage compartment (optional extra) - models with a jointed luggage com- partment floor only.
3. Lift out the lower floor (models with a join- ted luggage compartment floor only).
4. Undo the attaching screw and lift out the foam block containing the jack and tools.
5. Take hold of the far end of the spare wheel, then lift. Push the spare wheel forwards slightly and lift it out of the storage com- partment.
6. Remove the wheel wrench, the jack and the towing eye from the foam block.
NOTE
The jack must be lifted out in order to access the towing eye.
Jack*
The original jack should only be used for changing to the spare wheel. The jack's thread must always be well greased.
Removing
Set up the warning triangle, see page 319 if a wheel must be replaced at a busy location. The car and jack* must be on a firm horizontal sur- face.
1 If the car is equipped with a temporary tyre repair kit, see page 320 for information.
08 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 315
1. Apply the parking brake and engage reverse gear, or position P if the car has an automatic gearbox.
WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack* that belongs to the car model in question, which is indicated on the jack's label.
The label also indicates the jack's maximum lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting height.
2. Take out the spare wheel and tools (see the description on page 314). There is also a package containing gloves and a wheel bag for the punctured wheel.
3. Place chocks in front of and behind the wheels which will remain on the ground. Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones for example.
4. Cars with steel rims have removable wheel covers. Use the removal tool to hook in and pull off any full-wheel wheel covers. Alter-
natively, the wheel covers can be pulled away by hand.
5. Screw together the towing eye with the wheel wrench* until the stop position as shown in the following illustration.
The wheel wrench and towing eye
IMPORTANT
The towing eye must be screwed into all threads in the wheel bolt wrench.
6. Loosen the wheel bolts -1 turn anticlock- wise with the wheel wrench.
WARNING
Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack and the car's jacking point.
7. There are two jacking points on each side of the car.
08 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
08
316
IMPORTANT
The ground under the jack must be firm, smooth and level.
8. Wind up the jack so that the flange in the bodywork ends up in the notch in the head of the jack.
9. Lift the car so that the wheel is free. Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the wheel.
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack.
Park the car such that passengers have the car, or ideally a crash barrier, between themselves and the roadway.
NOTE
The car's regular jack is designed only for use occasionally and for a short time, such as when changing a wheel with a punctured tyre, switching between summer tyres and winter tyres, etc. Only the jack belonging to the specific model is to be used to jack up the car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment.
Installation
1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel and hub.
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts thoroughly.
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot rotate.
4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is important that the wheel bolts are tight- ened properly (see page 311 for tightening torques). Check the torque with a torque wrench.
5.
08 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 317
Refit any full wheel covers.
NOTE
The wheel cover outlet for the valve must be positioned over the valve on the wheel rim during fitting.
Replacing the spare wheel* and jack* in
the luggage compartment
The tools and jack* must be returned to their correct places in the foam block after use.
1. Unscrew the towing eye from the wheel wrench and place the towing eye in the compartment in the bottom of the foam block.
2. Wind together the jack to the halfway point so that it fits into the foam block. Place the end of the handle in the compartment in the foam block.
3. Put back any tools that have been used in the relevant compartments in the foam block.
4. If the spare wheel has been used, put the foam block back in the storage area and tighten the attaching screw in the floor of the storage compartment. The punctured wheel can be placed in the plastic bag con- tained in the package with the gloves.
If the spare wheel has not been used, place the foam block in the spare wheel and place the spare wheel back in the storage compartment. Tighten the attaching screw to the floor of the storage compartment.
IMPORTANT
The tools and jack* must be stored in the intended location in the car's cargo area when not in use.
08 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure
08
318
Tyre pressure
G 02
18 30
The tyre pressure decal on the driver's side door pillar (between frame and rear door) shows which pressures the tyres should have at different loads and speed conditions. This is also specified in the tyre pressure table, see page 378.
Tyre pressure for the car's recommended tyre dimension
ECO pressure1
NOTE
Temperature differences change the tyre pressure.
Fuel economy, ECO pressure
At speeds below 160 km/h, the ECO pressure is recommended (applies for both full load and light load - see page 378) in order to obtain optimum fuel economy.
Checking the tyre pressure
The tyre pressures must be checked every month.
Check tyre pressures on cold tyres. "Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same tempera- ture as the ambient temperature. After several few kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the pressure increases.
Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel con- sumption, shortens tyre lifespan and impairs the car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre pressure that is too low could result in the tyres overheating and being damaged. Tyre pres- sure affects travelling comfort, road noise and steering characteristics.
NOTE
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature.
1 ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy.
08 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle and first-aid kit*
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 319
Warning triangle Lift the floor hatch (or push the rear part of the luggage compartment floor forwards in models with a jointed floor and then lift the lower floor) and remove the warning trian- gle.
Take the warning triangle from the case, fold out and assemble the two loose sides.
Fold out the warning triangle's support legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suit- able place with regard to traffic.
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are properly secured in the cargo area after use.
First aid kit*
A case containing first aid equipment is located on the left side of the cargo area.
08 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
08
320 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
Version 1.
Version 2.
Emergency puncture repair (TMK: Temporary Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and check and adjust tyre pressure. It consists of a
compressor and a bottle with sealing fluid. The kit works as a temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced before its expira- tion date and after use.
The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc- tured in the tread.
NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is only intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread.
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency puncture repair kit if they have larger slits, cracks or similar damage.
Connect the compressor to one of the cars 12 V sockets; see pages 236 and 296. Choose the socket that is nearest the punctured tyre.
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency puncture repair has been tested and approved by Volvo.
Positioning of the emergency puncture
repair kit and warning triangle
Set up the warning triangle if a tyre is being sealed in a trafficked location. The warning tri- angle and emergency puncture repair kit are located under the floor in the luggage com- partment.
1. Lift the rear edge of the luggage compart- ment floor (or on models with a jointed lug- gage compartment floor, take hold of the luggage compartment floor handle, lift and move the rear part of the floor forwards).
2. Lift out the storage compartment (optional extra) - models with a jointed luggage com- partment floor only.
3. Lift out the lower floor (models with a join- ted luggage compartment floor only).
4. Unhook the elastic part of the belt over the TMK compressor unit on the left side.
5. Lift the TMK compressor unit straight up.
6. To access the bottle of sealant, it must be pushed to the left until it can be lifted out of the foam block.
08 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 321
NOTE
To access the towing eye/wheel wrench in the foam block:
Version 1: Lift the compressor unit for the emergency puncture repair kit (point 5) to access the wheel wrench. Lift out the bottle of sealant (point 6) to access the towing eye.
Version 2: Lift the compressor unit for the emergency puncture repair kit (point 5) to access the towing eye. The wheel wrench is located underneath the jack.
After use, hook the belt back onto the left side.
Version 1: The belt must be pulled behind the foam block (not above).
Version 2: The belt must be in the fork on the rear part of the foam block.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.
Overview
Label, maximum permitted speed
Switch
Cable
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Protective cap
Pressure reducing valve
Air hose
Sealing fluid bottle
Pressure gauge
Sealing punctured tyres
G 01
43 38
For information on the function of the parts, see preceding illustration.
1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture repair kit.
2. Detach the label for maximum permitted speed and affix it to the steering wheel.
08 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
08
322 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the case of contact with skin, wash away the fluid with soap and water.
3. Check that the switch is in position 0 and locate the cable and the air hose.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The seal is broken automatically when the bottle is screwed in.
4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the bottle's stopper.
5. Screw the bottle into its holder.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw in the air hose valve connection to the bot- tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and start the car.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.
8. Flick the switch to position I.
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the com- pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be switched off immediately. The journey should not be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure drops after approximately 30 seconds.
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.
10. Switch off the compressor to check the pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum 3.5 bar.
(Release air with the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.)
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended.
11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the cable from the 12 V socket.
12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit the valve cap.
13. As soon as possible, drive approximately 3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.
Rechecking the repair and pressure
1. Reconnect the equipment.
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure gauge.
If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is insufficiently sealed. The journey should not be continued. Contact a tyre centre.
If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar, the tyre must be inflated to the pres- sure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure table, see page 378 (1
08 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 323
bar=100 kPa). Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres- sure is too high.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
3. Make sure the compressor is switched off. Detach the air hose and cable. Refit the dust cap.
4. Fold the hose into the box and leave the bottle where it is. Place TMK in the lug- gage.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be replaced after use. Volvo recommends that this replacement is performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends that you drive to the near- est authorised Volvo workshop for the replace- ment/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.
Inflating the tyres
The car's original tyres can be inflated by the compressor.
1. The compressor must be switched off. Make sure that the switch is in position 0 and locate the cable and air hose.
2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw in the air hose valve connection to the bot- tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in danger to life. Never leave the engine run- ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf- ficient ventilation.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.
3. Connect the cable to one of the car's 12 V sockets and start the car.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure table, see page 378. (Release air using the pres- sure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.)
6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air hose and cable.
7. Refit the dust cap.
08 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
08
324 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Replacing the sealing fluid canister
Replace the bottle when the expiration date has passed. Treat the old bottle as environ- mentally hazardous waste.
WARNING
The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural rubber-latex.
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic reaction in the event of skin contact.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Store out of the reach of children.
08 Wheels and tyres
08
325
326
Engine compartment............................................................................. 328 Lamps................................................................................................... 335 Wiper blades and washer fluid.............................................................. 341 Battery................................................................................................... 344 Fuses..................................................................................................... 348 Car care................................................................................................ 357
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment 09
328
General
Volvo service programme
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi- ble, follow the Volvo service programme as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to perform the service and maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel, special tools and service literature to guarantee the highest quality of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Check regularly
Check the following oils and fluids at regular intervals, e.g. when refuelling:
Coolant
Engine oil
Washer fluid
WARNING
Remember that the radiator fan (located at the front of the engine compartment, behind the radiator) may start automatically some after the engine has been switched off.
Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.
Opening and closing the bonnet
The handle for bonnet opening is always on the left-hand side.
Turn the handle about 20-25 degrees clockwise. You will hear when the catch releases.
Move the catch to the left and open the bonnet. (The catch hook is located between the headlamp and grille, see illus- tration.)
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed.
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment 09
329
Engine compartment, overview
The appearance of the engine compartment may vary depending on engine variant.
Coolant expansion tank
Filling washer fluid
Radiator
Engine oil dipstick1
Filling engine oil
Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid (located on the driver's side)
Battery
Relay and fuse box
Air filter
WARNING
The ignition system has very high voltage and output. The voltage in the ignition sys- tem is highly dangerous. The remote control key must always be in 0 position when work is being done in the engine compartment, see page 79.
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil when the remote control key is in II position or when the engine is hot.
Checking the engine oil
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
When driving under adverse conditions, see page 372.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war- ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car- ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Volvo uses different systems for warning of low/high oil level or low/high oil pressure. Cer- tain variants have an oil pressure sensor, and then the lamp for oil pressure is used. Other variants have an oil level sensor, and then the driver is informed via the warning symbol in the centre of the instrument unit as well as by dis- play texts. Certain models have both variants. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.
1 Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment 09
330
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accord- ance with the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Using oil of a higher than specified grade is permitted. If the car is driven in adverse con- ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade, see page 372.
For capacities, see page 373 and onwards.
Engine with oil dipstick2
Dipstick and filler pipe.
Checking the oil level in a new car is especially important before the first scheduled oil change.
Volvo recommends checking the oil level every 2 500 km. The most accurate measurements are made on a cold engine before starting. The
measurement will be inaccurate if taken imme- diately after the engine is switched off. The dipstick will indicate that the level is too low because the oil has not had time to flow down into the oil sump.
G 02
17 37
The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.
Measurement and filling if required
1. Ensure that the car is level. After switching off the engine it is important to wait 5 minutes to allow the oil time to run back to the sump.
2. Pull up and wipe the dipstick.
3. Re-insert the dipstick.
4. Pull it out and check the level.
5. If the level is close to MIN then 0.5 litres should be added. If the level is significantly below, then an additional amount is required.
6. If required, check the level again, do it after driving a short distance. Then repeat steps 1 - 4.
WARNING
Never fill above the MAX mark. The level should never be above MAX or below MIN as this could lead to engine damage.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.
2 Only applies to petrol and 4-cyl. diesel.
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment 09
331
Engine with electronic oil level sensor3
Filler pipe
You do not need to take action with respect to the engine oil level before a message is shown in the display, see the illustration below.
Message and graph in the display. The left display shows the Digital combined instrument panel while the right displays shows the Analog com- bined instrument panel.
Message
Engine oil level
On certain cars, the oil level can be checked using the electronic oil level gauge with the thumbwheel when the engine is switched off, see page 332. Oil level low Refill 0.5 litre
WARNING
If the message Oil service required is shown, visit a workshop. The oil level may be too high.
IMPORTANT
In the event of the message Oil level low Refill 0.5 litre, only fill with 0.5 litres.
NOTE
The oil level is only detected by the system during driving. The system cannot directly detect changes when the oil is filled or drained. The car must be driven about 30 km before the oil level display is correct.
WARNING
Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4) appears as shown in the illustration below. The level must never be above MAX or below MIN, as this could lead to engine damage.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.
3 Only applies to 5-cyl. diesel.
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment 09
332 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Measuring the oil level*
If the oil level needs to be checked then it should be carried out in accordance with the sequence below.
1. Activate key position II, see page 79.
2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand stalk switch to position Engine oil level
Wait.... > You will then see information displayed
about the engine oil level.
The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. The rec- ommended filling level is 4. Message and graph in the display. The left display shows the Digital com- bined instrument panel while the right displays shows the Analog combined instrument panel.
Coolant
Checking the level and topping up
When topping up the coolant, follow the instructions on the packaging. It is important that the mixture of coolant concentrate and water is correct for the prevailing weather con- ditions. Never top up with water only. The risk of freezing increases with both too little and too much coolant concentrate.
WARNING
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant requires topping up when the engine is at operating temperature, unscrew the expan- sion tank cap slowly to gently release the overpressure.
For capacities and for standards regarding water quality, see page 374.
Check the coolant regularly
The level must lie between the MIN and MAX
marks on the expansion tank. If the system is not filled sufficiently, high temperatures could occur, causing a risk of damage to the engine.
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment 09
333
IMPORTANT
A high content of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system.
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion agent as recommended by Volvo.
Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50% water and 50% coolant.
Mix the coolant with approved quality tap water. In the event of any doubt about water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo rec- ommendations.
When changing coolant/replacing cool- ing system components, flush the cool- ing system clean with approved quality tap water or flush with ready-mixed coolant.
The engine must only be run with a well- filled cooling system. Otherwise, tem- peratures that are too high may occur resulting in the risk of damage (cracks) in the cylinder head.
Brake and clutch fluid
Checking the level
Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser- voir. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks that are visible inside the reservoir. Check the level regularly.
Change the brake fluid every other year or at every other regular service.
For capacities and recommended fluid grade, see page 374. The fluid should be changed annually on cars driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent braking, such as driving in mountains or tropical climates with high humidity.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid. Volvo rec- ommends that the reason for the loss of brake fluid is investigated by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Filling
Brake fluid reservoir location.
The fluid reservoir is protected under the cover over the cold zone in the engine compartment. The round cover must be removed first before the reservoir cap can be reached.
1. Turn and open the cover located on the covering.
2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks, which are located on the inside of the reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Do not forget to refit the cap.
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment 09
334
Air conditioning system
Troubleshooting and repair
The air conditioning system contains fluores- cent tracing agents. Use ultraviolet light when looking for leaks.
Volvo recommends that you contact an author- ised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pres- surised refrigerant R134a. This system must only be serviced and repaired by an author- ised workshop.
09 Maintenance and service
Lamps 09
335
General
All bulbs are specified, see page 340. The fol- lowing list contains locations of bulbs and other light sources that are specialised or unsuitable for changing except at a workshop:
Active Xenon headlamps - ABL (Xenon lamps)
Side direction indicators, door mirrors1
Approach lighting, door mirrors
Side position, position lamps rear
Brake light above the rear windscreen
Interior and luggage compartment lighting
Glovebox lighting
LED lights, general
WARNING
On cars with Xenon headlamps, the replacement of Xenon lamps must be car- ried out at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Working with Xenon lamps demands extreme caution because the headlamp is equipped with a high voltage unit.
WARNING
The cars electrical system must be in key position 0 when replacing bulbs, see page 79.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease from your fingers is vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.
NOTE
If an error message remains after the broken bulb has been replaced then we recom- mend that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop.
Headlamps front
All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the engine compartment. Loosen and remove the whole headlamp.
Take out the tool (Torx 30) found under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
1. Lift out the bonnet stop.
1 Certain models
09 Maintenance and service
Lamps 09
336
2. Undo the screw using the tool (Torx 30).
3. Turn the locking pin anticlockwise.
Pull out the locking pin.
4. Release the headlamp by alternately tilting and pulling it out.
IMPORTANT
Take care when lifting out the headlamp so as not to damage any parts.
5. Press down the catch.
Unplug the connector.
Place the headlight on a soft surface so as not to scratch the lens.
IMPORTANT
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the con- nector.
6. Replace the relevant bulb as instructed.
The headlight must be fitted and the contact fitted correctly before switching on the lights or switching key position.
Cover for main/dipped beam lamps
1. Press the hooks together.
Angle out the cover.
2. Replace the relevant bulb as instructed.
Dipped beam2
1. Detach the headlamp, see page 335.
2. Undo the cover, see page 336.
3. Press the bulb holder upwards until it releases.
Pull out the bulb holder.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.
2 Cars with halogen headlights
09 Maintenance and service
Lamps 09
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 337
Main beam2
1. Detach the headlamp, see page 335.
2. Undo the cover, see page 336.
3. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
Pull out the bulb holder.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.
Additional main beam*3
1. Detach the headlamp, see page 335.
2. Undo the cover, see page 336.
3. Press the bulb holder upwards until it releases.
Pull out the bulb holder.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.
Direction indicators/flashers, front
1. Detach the headlamp, see page 335.
2. Undo the cover.
3. Push in the catch.
Pull out the bulb holder.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.
2 Cars with halogen headlights 3 Cars with xenon headlights
09 Maintenance and service
Lamps 09
338
Position/parking lamps4
1. Detach the headlamp, see page 335.
2. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
Pull out the bulb holder.
3. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.
Side marker lamps
1. Detach the headlamp, see page 335.
2. Undo the cover.
3. Pull down the bulb holder.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.
Daytime running lights5
1. Undo the cover.
2. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
Pull out the bulb holder.
3. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.
4 Not applicable to cars with xenon headlights as these are equipped with LED lamps. 5 Applicable only to daytime running lights with halogen lamps.
09 Maintenance and service
Lamps 09
339
Location of rear bulbs
Brake light (LED)
Position lamp
Brake light
Side marker lamps
Direction indicators
Reversing lamp
Rear fog lamp
Lamp housing, rear
Direction indicators, brake lights and rear lights are replaced from inside the cargo area.
1. Remove the hatch in the upholstery (1) on the same side as the defective bulb.
2. Press the catch sideways.
Pull out the bulb holder.
3. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in and turning anticlockwise.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.
Rear fog lamp
Insert (approx. 20 mm) a blunt, knife-like object, such as a table knife, at the triangle.
Carefully prise until the lug releases.
IMPORTANT
Take care not to damage any parts.
Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
Pull out the bulb holder.
09 Maintenance and service
Lamps 09
340
3. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.
Vanity mirror lighting
1. Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens and gently prize up the lug on the edge.
2. Carefully detach and lift aside the lamp lens.
3. Using needle-nose pliers, pull the bulb straight out to the side. Do not squeeze too hard with the pliers. Otherwise, the bulb glass could break.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.
Specification, bulbs
Lighting [W]A Type
Dipped beamB 55 H7 LL
Main beamB 65 H9
Additional main beamC
55 H7 LL
Front direction indicators
21 HY21W
Position lampB 5 W5W LL
Side marker lamps 5 WY5W LL
Daytime running lightsB
19 PW19W
Side direction indi- cators, door mir- rorsD
5 WY5W LL
Direction indica- tors, rear
21 PY21W LL
Brake light 21 P21W LL
Reversing lamp 21 P21W LL
Lighting [W]A Type
Rear fog lamp 21 H21W LL
Vanity mirror light- ing
1.2 T5 Socket W2x4.6d
A Watt B Cars with halogen headlights C Cars with xenon headlights D Certain models
09 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades and washer fluid 09
341
Wiper blades
Service position
Wiper blades in service position.
In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades (for scraping off ice from the windscreen, for example) they must be in service position.
IMPORTANT
Before placing the wiper blades in the serv- ice position, make sure that they are not fro- zen down.
1. Place the remote control key in the ignition lock1 and briefly press the START/STOP
ENGINE button to set the cars electrical
system to key position I. (For detailed infor- mation on key positions, see page 79.)
2. Briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE
button again to set the cars electrical sys- tem in key position 0.
3. Within 3 seconds, move the right stalk switch up and hold it in position for approx. 1 second. > The wipers then move to standing
straight up.
The wipers return to their starting position when you briefly press the START/STOP
ENGINE button to set the cars electrical sys- tem to key position I (or when the car is started).
IMPORTANT
If the wiper arms in the service position have been folded up from the windscreen, they must be folded back down onto the wind- screen before the wipers are allowed to return to their starting position. This is to avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet.
NOTE
Once the wiper arms have been in service position, the wipers must be activated and deactivated before the service position can be used again.
Replacing the wiper blades
1 Not necessary in cars with Keyless function.
09 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades and washer fluid 09
342
Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service position. Press the button located on the wiper blade mounting and pull straight out parallel with the wiper arm.
Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click" is heard.
Check that the blade is firmly installed.
4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the wind- screen.
The wipers return from service position to their starting position when you briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE button to set the cars electrical system to key position I (or when the car is started).
G 02
17 63
NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than on the passenger side.
WARNING
Since the car is equipped with airbag Pedestrian Airbag, Volvo recommends that genuine wiper arms are used and that you only use genuine parts for them.
Replacing the wiper blades, rear window
1. Fold out the wiper arm.
2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the arrow).
3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end position against the wiper arm as a lever to detach the blade more easily.
4. Press the new wiper blade into position. Check that it is firmly installed.
5. Lower the wiper arm.
Cleaning
For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see page 357 and onwards.
09 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades and washer fluid 09
343
IMPORTANT
Check the blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the service life of the wiper blades.
Filling washer fluid
The windscreen and headlamp washers share a common reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Use washer fluid with antifreeze during the winter to avoid freezing in the pump, reser- voir and hoses.
For capacities, see page 374.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery 09
344
Operation
The service life and function of the battery is influenced by factors such as the number of starts, discharging, driving style, driving con- ditions, climatic conditions etc.
Never disconnect the battery when the engine is running.
Check that the cables to the battery are correctly connected and properly tight- ened.
WARNING
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is con- nected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode.
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns.
If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention immediately.
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly.
The life of the battery is affected by several factors, including driving conditions and cli- mate. Battery starting capacity decreases gradually with time and therefore needs to be recharged if the car is not used for a longer time or when it is only driven short distances. Extreme cold further limits star- ting capacity.
To maintain the battery in good condition, at least 15 minutes of driving/week is recom- mended or that the battery is connected to a battery charger with automatic trickle charging.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a maximum service life.
IMPORTANT
A quick charger must never be used when charging the battery.
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed then the energy saving function for infotain- ment may be temporarily disengaged, and/ or the message in the information display about the main battery's state of charge may be temporarily inapplicable, following the connection of an external battery or bat- tery charger:
The negative battery terminal on the car's main battery must never be used for connecting an external battery or battery charger - only the car chassis
may be used as the grounding point. See the section "Start assistance" - for a description of how the cable clamps must be attached.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery 09
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 345
Symbols on the battery
Use protective goggles.
Further information in the owner's manual.
Store the battery out of the reach of children.
The battery contains cor- rosive acid.
Avoid sparks and naked flames.
Risk of explosion.
Must be taken for recy- cling.
NOTE
An expended battery must be recycled in an environmentally safe manner as it contains lead.
Replacing the main battery
Volvo recommends that you allow an author- ised workshop to replace the batteries - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. For more information on the car's main battery - see page 114
Eco Start/Stop DRIVe*
Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped with two 12 V batteries - one extra powerful battery for starting and one standby battery that helps during the Eco Start/Stop DRIVe function's starting sequence.
For more information on Start/Stop - see page 123.
For more information on the car's main battery - see page 114 and 379.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery 09
346
Battery Start Support
Cold start capacityA, CCA (A)
760 B
800 C 120B
180C
SizeD, LWH (mm)
278175190B
315175190C
15090106B
15090130C
Capacity (Ah)
70B
80C
8B
10C
A According to EN standard. B Manual gearbox. C Automatic gearbox. D Largest possible size.
IMPORTANT
When replacing batteries in cars with the Start/Stop function, the AGM1 type batter- ies must be fitted.
NOTE
The higher the current take-off in the car (extra cooling/heating, etc.) the more the batteries must be charged = increased fuel consumption.
When the capacity of the battery has fallen below the lowest permissible level then the Start/Stop function is disen- gaged.
Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due to high current take-off means:
The engine starts automatically2 without the driver depressing the clutch pedal (manual gearbox).
The engine starts automatically without the driver lifting his/her foot off the foot brake pedal (automatic gearbox).
Location of the batteries
A: Left-hand drive car. B: Right-hand drive car. 1. Battery for starting3 2. Support battery.
The support battery normally requires no more service than the normal battery that is used for starting. A workshop should be contacted in the event of questions or problems - an author- ised Volvo workshop is recommended.
1 Absorbed Glass Mat 2 Automatic starting can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position. 3 The battery for starting is described in detail on page 345.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery 09
347
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed then the Start/Stop function may temporar- ily cease to work after the connection of an external battery or battery charger:
The negative battery terminal on the car's main battery must never be used for connecting an external battery or battery charger - only the car chassis
may be used as the grounding point. See the section "Start assistance" - for a description of how the cable clamps must be attached.
NOTE
If the battery has become so discharged that everything is "black" and in principle the car does not have all the normal electri- cal functions and the engine is subsequently started using an external battery or battery charger, then the Start/Stop function will be activated. It will then be possible for the engine to be auto-stopped but in the event of an auto-stop the Start/Stop function may fail to auto-start the engine due to inade- quate capacity in the battery.
The battery must first be charged in order to ensure a successful auto-start after an auto- stop. At an outside temperature of +15 C the battery needs to be charged for at least 1 hour. At a lower outside temperature a charging time of 3-4 hours is recom- mended. The recommendation is that the battery is charged using an external battery charger.
If this is not possible then the recommen- dation is to temporarily deactivate the Start/Stop function until the battery has been adequately recharged.
For more information about recharging the battery, see the section "Battery" in the chapter "Maintenance and service".
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
348
General
All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to pro- tect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading.
If an electrical component or function does not work, it may be because the component's fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in the circuit. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for checking.
Changing
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause signifi- cant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.
Location, fuse boxes
Fuse box locations in a left-hand drive car. In a right-hand drive car the fuse box under the glo- vebox changes sides.
Engine compartment
Under the glovebox
Below right front seat
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 349
Engine compartment
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.
The fusebox also provides space for several spare fuses.
Positions
The label on the inside of the cover shows the positions of the fuses.
Fuses 7-18 are of "JCASE" type and should be replaced by a workshop1.
Fuses 19-45 and 47-48 are of "Mini Fuse" type.
Function A
ABS pump 40
ABS valves 30
Headlamp washers* 20
Ventilation fan 40
- -
Primary fuse for fuses 32-36 30
Function A
Starter motor actuator solenoid (not Start/Stop)
30
Electric windscreen, right side* 40
- -
Electric windscreen, left side* 40
Parking heater* 20
Windscreen wipers 20
1 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
350 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Function A
Central electronic module, refer- ence voltage, standby battery (Start/Stop)
5
Horn 15
Brake light 5
- -
Headlamp control 5
Internal relay coils 5
12 V socket, tunnel console front 15
Transmission control module 15
Solenoid clutch A/C 15
12 V socket, tunnel console rear 15
Climate sensor*; air intake throt- tle motors
10
Engine control module (5-cyl.) 5
Power seat, right* 20
Function A
Relay coil in cooling fan relay (4- cyl., 5-cyl. diesel); Lambda- sonds (4-cyl. petrol); Mass air flow meter (diesel), Bypass valve, EGR cooling (diesel); Regulator valve, fuel flow (5-cyl. diesel); Regulator valve, fuel pressure (5- cyl. diesel)
10
Relay coil in cooling fan relay (5- cyl. petrol); Lambda-sonds (5- cyl. petrol)
20
Mass air flow meter (4-cyl. pet- rol); EVAP valve (4-cyl. petrol); Injection valves (5-cyl. petrol); Control motor, turbo (4-cyl. die- sel); Regulator valve, fuel flow (4- cyl. diesel); Solenoid, piston cooling (5-cyl. diesel); Turbo reg- ulator valve (5-cyl. diesel); Oil level sensor (5-cyl. diesel)
10
Valves (petrol); Solenoids (petrol); Lambda probe (diesel); Crank- case ventilation heater (5-cyl.); Mass air flow meter (5-cyl. petrol)
10
Function A
Ignition coils (petrol) 10
Diesel filter heater; Glow plug control unit (5-cyl. diesel); Oil pump, automatic gearbox (5-cyl. diesel Start/Stop)
15
Engine control module (4-cyl.) 10
Engine control module (5-cyl.); Throttle unit (5-cyl. petrol)
15
ABS 5
Engine control module; Trans- mission control module; Airbags
10
Light height control* 10
Electric control servo 5
Central electronic module 15
- -
Coolant pump (Start/Stop) 10
Collision warning system 5
Accelerator pedal sensor 5
Charging point, standby battery -
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
351
Function A
- -
- -
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
352
Under the glovebox
On the inside of the cover for the fusebox in
the engine compartment there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.
The fusebox in the engine compartment also provides space for several spare fuses.
Replacing fuses
The fuses can be accessed when a protective cover has been removed from the fusebox.
Cover removal 1. Take hold of the recess and pull until the locking lugs in the lower edge of the cover are released from the fusebox.
2. Remove the cover.
NOTE
A relatively large amount of tensile force is required to release the locking lugs at the top edge of the cover from the electrical distribution unit.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 353
Cover refitting
1. Guide in the lower lugs.
2. Turn the cover upwards until the upper lugs engage.
NOTE
Make sure that the upper locking lugs are seated properly in the grooves of the elec- trical distribution unit.
Positions
The label on the inside of the cover shows the positions of the fuses.
The fuses are of "Mini Fuse" type.
Function A
Fuel pump 20
- -
Rear window wiper 15
Reserve position, interior lighting 5
Interior lighting; Power seats 10
Blind, glass roof* 10
Rain sensor*; Dimming, interior rearview mirror*; Moisture sen- sor*
5
Collision warning system* 5
- -
Unlocking, tailgateA 10
- -
Reserve position 3, constant voltage
5
Steering lock 15
Combined instrument panel 5
Function A
Central locking system, fuel filler flapB
10
Climate panel 10
Steering wheel module 7.5
Siren alarm*; Data link connector OBDII
5
Main beam 15
- -
Reversing lamp 10
Windscreen wipersC; Rear wind- screen wiperC
20
Immobiliser 5
Reserve position 1, constant voltage
15
Reserve position 2, constant voltage
20
Movement sensor alarm*; Remote receiver
5
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
354 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Function A
Windscreen wipersD; Rear wind- screen wiperD
20
Central locking system, fuel filler flapE
10
Unlocking, tailgateF 10
PTC element, air preheater*; Button, rear seat heating*
7.5
Airbags; Pedestrian airbag 10
Reserve position 4, constant voltage
7.5
- -
- -
A See also fuse 84. B See also fuse 83. C See also fuse 82. D See also fuse 77. E See also fuse 70. F See also fuse 65.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 355
Below right front seat
On the inside of the cover for the fusebox in
the engine compartment there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.
The fusebox in the engine compartment also provides space for several spare fuses.
Positions
The label on the inside of the cover shows the positions of the fuses.
Fuses 24-28 are of "JCASE" type and should be replaced by a workshop2.
Fuses 1-23 and 29-46 are of "Mini Fuse" type.
Function A
- -
Keyless* 10
Door handle (Keyless*) 5
Control panel, left front door 25
Function A
Control panel, right front door 25
Control panel, left rear door 25
Control panel, right rear door 25
- -
Power seat left* 20
- -
2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
356 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Function A
- -
Audio control unit (amplifier)* 5
- -
Telematics*; Bluetooth* 5
Audio; Infotainment control unit 15
Digital radio*; TV* 10
12 V socket, cargo area 15
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
Trailer socket 2* 20
Primary fuse for fuses 12-16: Infotainment
40
- -
Function A
Trailer socket 1* 40
Rear window defroster 30
- -
BLIS* 5
Parking assistance* 5
Parking camera* 5
- -
- -
Seat heating (driver's side) 15
Seat heating (passenger side) 15
- -
- -
- -
Seat heating, rear right* 15
Seat heating, rear left* 15
AWD control module* 15
Function A
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
09 Maintenance and service
Car care 09
357
Washing the car
Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo.
Remove bird droppings from the paintwork as soon as possible. Bird droppings con- tain chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork very quickly. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended for the removal of any discoloration.
Hose down the underbody.
Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt has been removed so as to reduce the risk of scratches from washing. Do not spray directly onto the locks.
If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on very dirty surfaces. Note that in this case, the surfaces must not be hot from the sun!
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water.
Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a water scraper. If you avoid allowing drops of water to dry in strong sunlight, you reduce the risk of water drying stains which may need to be polished out.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functional- ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for example.
Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents but use water and a non-scratching sponge instead.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time.
Cleaning the wiper blades
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair the service life of wiper blades.
For cleaning:
Set the wiper blades in service position, see page 341.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg- ularly with lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.
Do not use any strong solvents.
Automatic car washes
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way of washing the car, but it cannot reach everywhere. Handwashing the car is recom- mended for achieving optimum results.
NOTE
The car must only be washed by hand over the first few months. This is because the paint is more delicate when it is new.
High-pressure washing
When using high-pressure washing, use sweeping movements and make sure that the nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the surface of the car (the distance applies to all exterior parts). Do not spray directly onto the locks.
09 Maintenance and service
Car care 09
358 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Testing the brakes
WARNING
Always test the brakes after washing the car, including the parking brake, to ensure that moisture and corrosion do not attack the brake linings and reduce braking per- formance.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then when driving long distances in rain or slush. The heat from the friction causes the brake lin- ings to warm up and dry. Do the same thing after starting in very damp or cold weather.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers is recommended for the cleaning and care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim components, such as glossy trim mouldings. When using such a cleaning agent the instruc- tions must be followed carefully.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rub- ber, only rub with light pressure if it is nec- essary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.
Rims
Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by Volvo.
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the surface and cause stains on chrome-plated aluminium rims.
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or to give the paintwork extra protection.
The car does not need to be polished until it is at least one year old. However, the car can be waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax the car in direct sunlight.
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit.
More stubborn stains can be removed using fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq- uid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the packaging carefully. Many preparations con- tain both polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo should be used. Other treatment such as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or similar could damage the paint- work. Paintwork damage caused by such treatments is not covered by Volvo war- ranty.
Water-repellent coating*
Never use products such as car wax, degreaser or similar on glass surfa-
ces as this could ruin their water-repellent properties.
Take care when cleaning so as not to damage the glass surface.
To avoid damaging glass surfaces when removing ice only use plastic ice scrapers.
There is natural wear of the water-repellent coating.
Treatment with a special finishing agent avail- able from Volvo dealers is recommended in
09 Maintenance and service
Car care 09
359
order to maintain the water-repellent proper- ties. This should be used first after three years and then each year.
Rustproofing inspection and maintenance
The car received a thorough and complete rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body are made of galvanised sheet metal. The underbody is protected by a wear-resistant anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the exposed members, cavities, closed sections and side doors.
Under normal conditions the rustproofing does not require treatment for approximately 12 years. After this period, it should be treated at three-year intervals. Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop for assistance if the car needs further treatment.
Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it is important to keep the car clean. The car's rust- proofing needs to be checked regularly and touched-up if necessary in order for it to be maintained.
Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care prod- ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and follow the instructions included with the car care product.
Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents.
Carpets and cargo area
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.
Each inlay mat is secured with pins.
Take hold of the inlay mat at each pin and lift the mat straight up.
Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each pin.
WARNING
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat in the driver area is firmly affixed and secured in the pins in order to avoid getting caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
A special textile cleaner is recommended for stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor mats should be cleaned with agents recom- mended by your Volvo dealer!
Stains on fabric upholstery and roof
upholstery
A special fabric cleaning agent, available from authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of the upholstery.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery.
Treating stains on leather upholstery
Volvo's leather upholstery is chromium-free and is treated to preserve its original appear- ance.
Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beau- tiful patina over time. The leather is refined and processed so that it retains its natural charac- teristics. It is given a protective coating, but regular cleaning is required in order to maintain both characteristics and appearance. Volvo offers a comprehensive product for the clean- ing and treatment of leather upholstery which, when used in accordance with the instructions, preserves the leather's protective coating. After a period of use the natural appearance of the leather will nevertheless emerge, depend- ing more or less on the surface texture of the leather. This is a natural maturing of the leather and shows that it is a natural product.
09 Maintenance and service
Car care 09
360
To achieve best results Volvo recommends cleaning and the application of protective cream once to four times per year (or more if necessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is avail- able from your Volvo dealer.
IMPORTANT
Certain items of coloured clothing (for example, jeans and suede garments) may stain the upholstery.
Never use strong solvents. Such prod- ucts may damage fabric, vinyl and leather upholstery.
Washing instructions for leather
upholstery
1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.
2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular movements.
3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the stain. Do not rub.
4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and allow the leather to dry completely.
Protective treatment of leather
upholstery
1. Pour a small amount of the protective cream on the felted cloth and massage in a thin layer of cream with gentle circular movements on the leather.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes before use.
The leather has now been given improved pro- tection against stains and improved UV pro- tection.
Washing instructions for the leather
steering wheel
Remove dirt and dust with a soft pre-mois- tened sponge and neutral soap.
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the leather steering wheel with protective plas- tic.
Use natural oils. Volvo's leather care agents are recommended for best results.
If the steering wheel has stains:
Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat and blood)
Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5% ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use a solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.)
Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate)
1. Same procedure as for group 1.
2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth.
Group 3 (dry dirt, dust)
1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt.
2. Same procedure as for group 1.
Treating stains on interior plastic, metal
and wood parts
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly moistened with water, available from Volvo dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior parts and surfaces.
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong stain removers. A special cleaning agent avail- able from Volvo dealers can be used for more difficult cleaning.
Cleaning seatbelts
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special textile cleaning agent is available from your Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract.
09 Maintenance and service
Car care 09
361
Touching up minor paintwork damage
Paint is an important part of the car's rust- proofing and should therefore be checked reg- ularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately. The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips, scratches and marks on the edges of wings, doors and bumpers.
Materials
primer1 - a special adhesive primer in a spray can is available for e.g. plastic- coated bumpers
basecoat and clearcoat - available in spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks2
masking tape
fine sand paper1.
Colour code
Car colour code
It is important that the correct colour is used. For product decal location, see page 366.
Repair minor paintwork damage such as
stone chips and scratches
G 02
18 32
Before work is begun, the car must be clean and dry and at a temperature above 15 C.
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the damaged surface. Then remove the tape to remove any loose paint.
If the damage is down to the metal, use of a primer is appropriate. In the event of damage to a plastic surface, an adhesive primer should be used to give better results - spray into the lid of the spray can and brush on thinly.
1 If required. 2 Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.
09 Maintenance and service
Car care 09
362
2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a very fine polishing agent may be carried out locally if required (e.g. if there are any uneven edges). The surface is cleaned thoroughly and left to dry.
3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off with a basecoat and clearcoat once the primer has dried.
4. For scratches, proceed as above, but mask around the damaged area to protect the undamaged paintwork.
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated down to the meal and an undamaged layer of paint remains in place, fill in with basecoat and clearcoat as soon as the surface has been cleaned.
09 Maintenance and service
09
363
364
Type designations................................................................................. 366 Dimensions and weights....................................................................... 368 Engine specifications............................................................................ 371 Engine oil............................................................................................... 372 Fluids and lubricants............................................................................. 374 Fuel....................................................................................................... 376 Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure ......................................... 378 Electrical system................................................................................... 379 Type approval....................................................................................... 380 Symbols in the display.......................................................................... 392
SPECIF ICATIONS
10 Specifications
Type designations
10
366
Label location
10 Specifications
Type designations
10
367
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle identification and engine numbers can facili- tate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer regarding the car and when ordering spare parts and accessories.
Type designation, vehicle identification number, maximum permissible weights, codes for colour and upholstery and type approval number. The label is visible when the right rear door is opened.
Label for A/C system.
Label for parking heater.
Engine code and engine serial number.
Label for engine oil.
Gearbox type designation and serial num- ber.
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
Car's identification number. (VIN Vehicle Identification Number)
Further information on the car is presented in the registration document.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact rep- licas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your particular car is available on the respective decals for your car.
10 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
10
368
Dimensions
Dimensions mm
A Wheelbase 2647
B Length 4369
C Load length, floor, folded rear seat 1508
D Load length, floor 684
E Height 1445
F Load height 532
Dimensions mm
G Front track 1546A
1551B
1559C
H Rear track 1536A
1541B
1549C
I Load width, floor 960
J Width 1802
Dimensions mm
K Width including door mirrors 2041
L Width including folded-in door mirrors 1857
A Offset 46 mm. B Offset 50 mm. C Offset 52.5 mm.
10 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
10
369
Weights
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank 90% full and all fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories, and towball load (when a trailer is hitched, see table page 370) influences the payload and is not included in the kerb weight.
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight - Kerb weight.
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to cars in the standard version - i.e. a car with- out extra equipment or accessories. This means that for every accessory added the loading capacity of the car is reduced cor- respondingly by the weight of the acces- sory.
Examples of accessories that reduce load- ing capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/ Summum equipment levels, as well as other accessories such as Towbar, Load carrier, Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps, GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety grille, Car- pets, Luggage cover, Power seats, etc.
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer- taining the kerb weight of your own partic- ular car.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.
For information on decal location, see page 366.
Max. gross vehicle weight
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
Equipment level
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 75 kg.
10 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
10
370
Towing capacity and towball load
Engine Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
T3 Manual, B6 1300 75
T4 Manual, B6 1300 75
D2 Manual, B6 1300 75
D3 Manual, M66 1500 75
D3 Automatic, TF-80SD 1500 75
D4 Manual, M66 1500 75
D4 Automatic, TF-80SD 1500 75
Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg)
Engine Gearbox Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
T3 Manual, B6 650 50
T4 Manual, B6 650 50
D2 Manual, B6 650 50
D3 Manual, M66 700 50
D3 Automatic, TF-80SD 750 50
D4 Manual, M66 700 50
D4 Automatic, TF-80SD 750 50
10 Specifications
Engine specifications
10
371
Engine specifications
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
Engine Engine
codeA
Output (kW/rpm)
Output (hp/rpm)
Torque (Nm/ rpm)
No. of cylinders
Bore (mm)
Stroke (mm)
Swept volume (litres)
Com- pression
ratio
T3 B4164T3 110/5700 150/5700 240/16004000 4 79 81.4 1.596 10.0:1
T4 B4164T 132/5700 180/5700 240/16005000 4 79 81.4 1.596 10.0:1
D2 D4162T 84/3600 115/3600 270/1750-2500 4 75 88.3 1.560 16.0:1
D3 D5204T6 110/3500 150/3500 350/1500-2750 5 81.0 77.0 1.984 16.5:1
D4 D5204T4 130/3500 177/3500 400/1750-2750 5 81.0 77.0 1.984 16.5:1
A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 366.
10 Specifications
Engine oil
10
372
Adverse driving conditions
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor- mally high oil temperature or oil consumption. Below are some examples of adverse driving conditions.
Check the oil level more frequently for long journeys:
towing a caravan or trailer
in mountainous regions
at high speeds
in temperatures colder than -30 C or hot- ter than +40 C
The above also apply to shorter driving dis- tances at low temperatures.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse driving conditions. It provides extra protection for the engine.
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war- ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car- ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
10 Specifications
Engine oil
10
373
Engine oil grade
Engine Engine codeA Recommended oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres)
T3 B4164T3 Certified and factory-filled oil: Oil grade WSS-M2C925-A
options for service:
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
Viscosity: SAE 5W30
approx. 4.1
T4 B4164T approx. 4.1
D2 D4162T
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
Viscosity: SAE 5W30
When driving under adverse conditions, use ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.
approx. 3.8
D3 D5204T6 Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
Viscosity: SAE 0W30
approx. 5.9
D4 D5204T4 approx. 5.9
A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 366.
For filling engine oil, see page 329.
10 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
10
374
Coolant
Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by Volvo mixed with 50% water1, see the pack- aging.
EngineA Volume
(litres)
T3 B4164T3 7.0
T4 B4164T
EngineA Volume
(litres)
D2 D4162T 10.0
D3 D5204T6 8.0
D4 D5204T4
A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 366.
Other fluids and lubricants
Manual gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
B6 1.6 BOT 350M3
M66 1.9
Automatic gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
TF-80SD 7.0 AW1
1 Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
10 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
10
375
NOTE
Under normal driving conditions, the gear- box oil does not need to be changed during its service life. However, it may be neces- sary under adverse driving conditions, see page 372.
Fluid System Volume (litres) Prescribed grade
Brake fluid Brake system 0.6 DOT 4+
Washer fluid Cars with headlamp washing 5.5 Washer fluid recommended by Volvo - with frost protection during cold weather and below freezing point.
Cars without headlamp washing 3,2
Fuel T3, T4 approx. 62 Petrol: see page 291
D2 approx. 52 Diesel: see page 292
D3, D4 approx. 60
Compressor oil Air conditioning 0,11 PAG oil
Coolant Air conditioning 0,65 kg R134a
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pres- surised refrigerant R134a. This system must only be serviced and repaired by an author- ised workshop.
10 Specifications
Fuel
10
376
CO2 emissions and fuel consumption
T3 158 6.8 106 4.6 125 5.4
T4 164 7.0 109 4.7 129 5.5
D2A 105 4.0 88 3.4 94 3.6
D2B 110 4.2 93 3.6 99 3.8
D3 139 5.3 100 3.8 114 4.3
D3 179 6.9 112 4.3 136 5.2
D4 139 5.3 100 3.8 114 4.3
D4 179 6.9 112 4.3 136 5.2
A 94 g/km CO2 version, max tyre width 205. B 99 g/km CO2 version.
10 Specifications
Fuel
10
377
Explanation
gram/km
litre/100 km
Urban driving
Extra-urban driving
Combined driving
NOTE
If the consumption and emission data is missing then it is included in the enclosed supplement.
Fuel consumption and emissions of
carbon dioxide
Fuel consumption and emission values in the table above are based on specific EU cycles1, that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basic version and without extra equipment. The car's weight may increase depending on equipment.
This, as well as how heavily the car is loaded, increases fuel consumption and carbon diox- ide emissions.
There are several reasons for increased fuel consumption compared with the table's val- ues. Examples of this are:
The driver's driving style.
If the customer has specified wheels larger than those fitted as standard on the mod- el's basic version, then resistance increa- ses.
High speed results in increased wind resis- tance.
Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions, weather and the condition of the car.
Even a combination of the above-mentioned examples can result in significantly improved consumption. For further information, please refer to the regulations referred to1.
Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise in a comparison with the EU driving cycles1
which are used in the certification of the car and on which the consumption figures in the table are based.
To bear in mind
Tips that the driver can use in order to reduce consumption:
Drive gently and avoid unnecessary accel- eration as well as braking too hard.
Drive with the correct air pressure in the tyres and check this regularly - select ECO tyre pressure for best results, see the tyre pressure table on page 378.
Choice of tyres can affect fuel consump- tion - seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer.
See further information and more advice on pages 11 and 286.
See page 291 for general information on fuel.
1 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC (Euro 4), EU Regulation no 692/2008, 715/2007 (Euro 5) and UN ECE Regulation no 101.The regulations cover the driving cycles for city driving and driving on main roads. - City driving - the measurement starts with cold starting the engine. The driving is simulated. - Driving on main roads - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - Cars with manual transmission are started in 2nd gear. The value for combined driving, which is reported in the table, is a combination of city driving and driving on main roads, in accordance with legal requirements. CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.
10 Specifications
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
10
378
Approved tyre pressures
Engine Tyre size Speed
(km/h)
Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load ECO pressureA
Front
(kPa)B
Rear
(kPa)
Front
(kPa)
Rear
(kPa)
Front/rear
(kPa)
T3
T4
D2
195/65 R15
205/55 R16
205/50 R17
225/45 R17
225/40 R18
0 - 160 230 230 260 260 260
160 + 230 230 260 260 -
D3
D4
205/55 R16
205/50 R17
225/45 R17
0 - 160 230 230 260 260 260
160 + 290 240 310 270 -
225/40 R18 0 - 160 240 240 260 260 260
160 + 290 240 310 270 -
Temporary Spare Tyre max. 80 420 420 420 420 -
A Economical driving. B In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
NOTE
All engines, tyres or combinations of these are not always available in all markets.
10 Specifications
Electrical system
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 379
Electrical system
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator. The electrical system is single-pole and uses the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
The battery capacity is dependent upon the equipment level in the vehicle.
IMPORTANT
If the battery is replaced, take care to replace it with a battery with the same cold starting capacity and reserve capacity as the original battery (see the label on the bat- tery).
Battery
Engine Voltage (V) Cold start capacity,
CCA - Cold Cranking Amperes (A)
Reserve capacity
(minutes)
Petrol 12 520800 100160
Diesel 12 700800 135160
Petrol/Diesel with Start/Stop function 12 760A 135
A Battery type AGM (Absorbed Glass Mat) must be used in cars with the Start/Stop function.
NOTE
The battery's container size should be consistent with the original battery's dimensions.
The battery's height is different depend- ing on size.
Eco Start/Stop DRIVe*
For information on batteries in cars with Eco Start/Stop DRIVe, see page 345.
10 Specifications
Type approval
10
380
Remote control key system
Lock system, standard
Country
EU, China
Keyless lock system (Keyless drive)
Country
EU
Korea
Country
China
Hong Kong
Radar system
Country
Singapore
IDA: Infocomm Development Authority of Singapore.
Brazil
10 Specifications
Type approval
10
381
Bluetooth
Declaration of Conformity (Declaration of Conformity)
Country
Countries in the EU:
Exporting country: Japan
Manufacturer: Alpine Electronics Inc.
Type of equipment: Bluetooth device
For further information visit http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/rtte/faq.htm #informing
10 Specifications
Type approval
10
382
Country
Czech Republic:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. tmto prohlauje, e tento Bluetooth Module je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/ES.
Denmark: Undertegnede Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr Bluetooth Module overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Germany: Hiermit erklrt Alpine Electronics, Inc., dass sich das Gert Bluetooth Module in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
10 Specifications
Type approval
10
383
Country
Estonia: Kesolevaga kinnitab Alpine Electronics, Inc. seadme Bluetooth Module vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele.
UK Hereby, Alpine Electronics, Inc., declares that this Bluetooth Module is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Spain: Por medio de la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que el Bluetooth Module cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Greece: Alpine Electronics, Inc. Bluetooth Module 1999/5/.
France: Par la prsente Alpine Electronics, Inc. dclare que l'appareil Bluetooth Module est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Italy: Con la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. dichiara che questo Bluetooth Module conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latvia: Ar o Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklar, ka Bluetooth Module atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem.
Lithuania: iuo Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklaruoja, kad is Bluetooth Module atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.
Nether- lands:
Hierbij verklaart Alpine Electronics, Inc. dat het toestel Bluetooth Module in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Malta: Hawnhekk, Alpine Electronics, Inc., jiddikjara li dan Bluetooth Module jikkonforma mal- ti ijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti o rajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Hungary: Alulrott, Alpine Electronics, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a Bluetooth Module megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EC irnyelv egyb elrsainak.
10 Specifications
Type approval
10
384
Country
Poland: Niniejszym Alpine Electronics, Inc. owiadcza, e Bluetooth Module jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Portugal: Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que este Bluetooth Module est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovenia: Alpine Electronics, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta Bluetooth Module v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Slovakia: Alpine Electronics, Inc. tmto vyhlasuje, e Bluetooth Module spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.
Finland: Alpine Electronics, Inc. vakuuttaa tten ett Bluetooth Module tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Sweden: Hrmed intygar Alpine Electronics, Inc. att denna Bluetooth Module str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Iceland: Alpine Electronics, Inc. hereby certifies that this Bluetooth Module conforms to the essential characteristic requirements and other relevant regulations of directive 1999/5/EC.
Norway: Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklrer herved at utstyret Bluetooth Module er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
10 Specifications
Type approval
10
385
Country
China:
10 Specifications
Type approval
10
386
Country
Taiwan:
CCAB10LP0230T7
10 Specifications
Type approval
10
387
Country
South Korea: Volvo Car Korea
Alpine Electronics, Inc
Made in Japan
Volvo Car Korea
http://www.volvocars.com/kr
10 Specifications
Type approval
10
388
Country
Singa- pore:
The Uni- ted Arab Emirates:
Jordan: The product that contains the Bluetooth module is approved with the following certification number.
BT module certification number: TRC/LPD/2010/4.
BT module name: IAM2.1BT PWB EU
10 Specifications
Type approval
10
389
Country
South Africa:
Uruguay: This product contains URSEC approved transmitter [module name and model name (IAM2.1 BT PWB EU + BVJG905A, BVVE905A, BVLV905A)]
10 Specifications
Type approval
10
390
Country
Jamaica: Approved for use in Jamaica SMA EI: IAM2.1
Thailand: This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement.
Nigeria:
Mexico: Warning
"Este equipo opera a titulo secundario, consecuentemente, debe aceptar interferencias perjudiciales incluyendo equipos de la misma clase y puede no causar interferencias a sistemas operando a titulo primario."
Bluetooth module installation information
This module board is to be installed only by the professional line operator and used only for car audio produced by ALPINE ELEC- TRONICS, INC. When this Bluetooth Module Board is installed in the Car Audio, we shall consider the following points: 1. Since "IAM2.1 BT PWB US" owns its FCC ID/IC Number, we shall affix an exterior label on the outside of the product if the FCC ID is not visible. The exterior label shall use wording such as either "Contains Transmitter Module Board FCC ID: A269ZUA130 / IC: 700B- IAM2101" or "Contains FCC ID: A269ZUA130 / IC: 700B-IAM2101". 2. "IAM2.1 BT PWB US" complies with requirements of subsections 15.19(a)(3) in FCC Rules Part 15 Subpart C. The manual statement 15.19 (a)(3) is included in User Guide of the product.
COFETEL No. RCPALIA10-0353
10 Specifications
Type approval
10
391
Country
Bot- swana:
Croatia:
10 Specifications
Symbols in the display
10
392 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
There are a variety of different symbols in the display in the car. The symbols are divided into warning, indicator and information symbols. Shown below are the most common symbols with their meanings and a reference to where in the manual further information can be found. For more information on symbols and text messages, see pages 71 and 200 .
- Red warning symbol, illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and/or driveability of the car. At the same time an explanatory text is displayed in the information display.
- Information symbol, illuminates in combination with text in the information dis- play, when a deviation in any of the car's sys- tems has occurred. The yellow symbol infor- mation can also illuminate in combination with other symbols.
Symbols in the display
Warning symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol Meaning Page
Low oil pres- sure
73
Parking brake applied
73, 131
Parking brake applied, alter- native symbol
73
Airbags - SRS 17, 73
Seatbelt reminder
14, 73
Alternator not charging
73
Fault in the brake system
73, 130
Warning, safety mode
17, 28, 73, 119
Indicator symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol Meaning Page
Fault in the ABL system*
72, 91
Emissions sys- tem
72
Fault in the ABS system
72, 130
Rear fog lamp on 72, 92
Stability system, DSTC, Trailer stability assist*
72, 139, 304
Stability system, sport mode
72, 139
Engine pre- heater (diesel)
72
Low level in fuel tank
72, 224
Information, read display text
72
Main beam on 72, 89
10 Specifications
Symbols in the display
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 393
Symbol Meaning Page
Left-hand direc- tion indicators
72
Right-hand direction indica- tors
72
DRIVe - Start/ Stop*, engine auto-stopped
72, 123
Information symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol Meaning Page
Main beam with auto dimming - AHB*
89
Camera sensor* 89
Adaptive cruise control*
156
Adaptive cruise control*
149, 150, 156
Symbol Meaning Page
Adaptive cruise control*, Distance Warning* (Distance Alert)
150, 158
Adaptive cruise control*
156
Adaptive cruise control*
149
Adaptive cruise control*
149
Cruise control* 145
Radar sensor* 156, 160, 173
Start/Stop*, Adap- tive cruise control*
127, 156
Speed limiter 143
Symbol Meaning Page
Camera sensor*, Laser sensor*
165, 173, 178, 183
Auto Brake*, Dis- tance Warning* (Distance Alert), City SafetyTM, Colli- sion warning sys- tem*
160, 165, 173
G 02 51 02
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater*
224
ABL system* 91
Fuel filler flap, right- hand side
289
Low battery 224
Park Assist Pilot - PAP*
190
10 Specifications
Symbols in the display
10
394 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Symbol Meaning Page
Rain sensor* 99
Lane Keeping Aid* 182
Driver Alert System* 178
Driver Alert Sys- tem*, Lane Keeping Aid*
183
Driver Alert Sys- tem*, Time for a break
176, 178, 183
Gear indicator, manual gearbox
115
Automatic gear positions
116
Symbol Meaning Page
Registered speed information*
141
Oil level measure- ment
331
Information symbols in the roof console
display
Symbol Meaning Page
Seatbelt reminder 16
Airbag, passenger seat, activated
21
Airbag, passenger seat, deactivated
21
10 Specifications
10
395
11 Alphabetical Index
11
396
A
ACC Adaptive cruise control................. 147
Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 91
Active Park Assist.................................... 190
Active Xenon headlamps........................... 91
Adaptive cruise control............................ 147 fault tracing......................................... 155 radar sensor........................................ 154
Additional heater (Diesel)......................... 227
Adjusting headlamp pattern...................... 95 halogen headlamp................................ 96
Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 86
Airbag activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 20 driver's and front passenger side......... 18 key switch off........................................ 20
AIRBAG ..................................................... 18
Airbag system ........................................... 17
Air conditioning........................................ 219 general................................................ 212
Air conditioning, AC................................. 219
Air conditioning system repair................................................... 334
Air distribution.................................. 213, 221
Air quality system IAQS .......................... 220
Air vents................................................... 214
Alarm.......................................................... 61 alarm indicator...................................... 61 alarm signals......................................... 62 arming................................................... 61 checking the alarm............................... 45 deactivate............................................. 61 deactivating a triggered alarm.............. 61 reduced alarm level.............................. 62
Alcolock................................................... 108
Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 213
Approach light, duration...................... 44, 95
Audio settings............................................... 245 surround..................................... 240, 245
Audio system........................................... 240 functions............................................. 245 overview.............................................. 241
Audio volume .......................................... 241 phone.................................................. 270 phone/media player............................ 270 ring signal, phone............................... 270 speed/noise compensation................ 245
Auto climate control settings...................... 218
Automatic car washes............................. 357
Automatic gearbox.................................. 116 manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 117 towing and recovery........................... 305 trailer................................................... 300
Automatic locking...................................... 55
Automatic relocking................................... 54
Auxiliary heater........................................ 227
AUX input......................................... 241, 261
B
Backrest..................................................... 81 front seat, lowering............................... 81
Backrest rear seat, lowering...................... 84
Bag holder .............................................. 295
Battery............................................. 344, 379 maintenance....................................... 344 remote control ................................... 283 remote control key/PCC....................... 48 start assistance................................... 114 symbols on the battery....................... 345 warning symbols................................. 345
Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 195
BLIS......................................................... 194
11 Alphabetical Index
11
397
Bluetooth handsfree ........................................... 267 media ................................................. 264 microphone off .................................. 270 streaming audio ................................. 264 transfer call to mobile ........................ 270
Bonnet, opening...................................... 328
Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 333
Brake light.................................................. 92
Brakes...................................................... 129 anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 129 brake light............................................. 92 brake system...................................... 129 Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 129 emergency brake lights........................ 92 filling brake fluid.................................. 333 handbrake........................................... 131 symbols in the combined instrument panel................................................... 130
Bulbs, see Lighting.................................. 335
C
Calls incoming............................................. 269 operation............................................. 269
Camera sensor................................ 162, 171
Car care................................................... 357
Car care, leather upholstery.................... 359
Cargo area Cargo net............................................ 297 lighting.................................................. 94 loading................................................ 294 mounting points.................................. 295 Parcel shelf......................................... 298
Car upholstery......................................... 359
Car wash.................................................. 357
Catalytic converter................................... 291 recovery.............................................. 306
CD ........................................................... 257
Centre console........................................ 203
Checking and topping up the coolant..... 332
Checking the engine oil level................... 329
Children..................................................... 31 child safety locks.................................. 35 child seats and side airbags................. 22
location in the car................................. 31 safety.................................................... 31
Child safety locks...................................... 60
Child seat................................................... 31
Child seats................................................. 31 ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. . . 35 recommended...................................... 32 size classes for child seats with the ISO- FIX fixture system................................. 35 upper mounting points for child seats.. 38
Cigarette lighter socket............................ 235
City Safety............................................ 161
Cleaning automatic car washes......................... 357 car wash............................................. 357 rims..................................................... 358 seatbelts............................................. 360 upholstery........................................... 359
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)........ 213
Climate control........................................ 212 general................................................ 212 sensors............................................... 212
Clock, setting............................................. 75
CO2 emissions ........................................ 376
Collision..................................................... 28
11 Alphabetical Index
11
398
Collision warning............................. 167, 168
Collision warning system radar sensor........................ 154, 161, 167
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*......... 167
Colour code, paint................................... 361
Combined instrument panel.............. 69, 200
Comfort inside the passenger compart- ment......................................................... 234
Compass................................................. 107 calibration........................................... 107
Condensation in headlamps.................... 357
controls centre console ................................... 241
Controls centre console.................................... 203
Controls, lights........................................... 87
Control symbols......................................... 71
Cooling system........................................ 286
Corner Traction Control .......................... 138
Crash, see Collision................................... 28
Cruise control.......................................... 145
CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package)......... 213
D
DAB Radio............................................... 254
Daytime running lights............................... 88
Deadlock deactivation.......................................... 58 temporary deactivation......................... 58
Deadlocks.................................................. 58
Defroster.................................................. 219
Diesel....................................................... 292
Diesel particle filter.................................. 293
Dipstick, electronic.................................. 331
Direction indicators.................................... 93
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 118
Display lighting.......................................... 87
Distance Warning.................................... 158
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II.................... 240
Door mirrors............................................. 104
Driver Alert Control.................................. 176
Driver Alert System.................................. 175
Driving...................................................... 286 cooling system.................................... 286 with the tailgate open......................... 287 with trailer........................................... 299
Driving in water........................................ 286
Driving with a trailer towball load........................................ 369 towing capacity.................................. 369
DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 139
DVD ......................................................... 257
E
ECC, electronic climate control............... 215
EcoGuide................................................. 121
Economical driving.................................. 286
ECO pressure.......................................... 318
Eco Start/Stop DRIVe.............................. 123
Electrical socket...................................... 236 cargo area........................................... 296 front seat............................................. 236
Emergency equipment warning triangle.................................. 319
Emergency puncture repair..................... 320
Emissions of carbon dioxide................... 293
Engine overheating......................................... 299 starting................................................ 112
11 Alphabetical Index
11
399
Engine block heater fuel-driven........................................... 223
Engine compartment coolant................................................ 332 oil........................................................ 329 overview.............................................. 329
Engine drag control ................................ 138
Engine oil......................................... 329, 372 adverse driving conditions.................. 372 capacities........................................... 372 filter..................................................... 329 oil grade.............................................. 372
Engine specifications............................... 371
Environmental labelling, FSC, owner's manual....................................................... 11
Error messages Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 156 Driver Alert Control............................. 178 LKA..................................................... 183 see Messages and symbols............... 156
Error messages in BLIS........................... 197
Error messages in Distance Alert............ 160
ETC, electronic temperature control ....... 216
Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 15
External dimensions................................ 368
F
Fan........................................................... 217
Fault tracing for the camera sensor. 163, 172
First aid equipment.................................. 319
First aid kit .............................................. 319
Fluids, capacities..................................... 374
Fluids and oils.......................................... 374
Fog lamps rear........................................................ 92
Foot brake............................................... 129
Front seat head restraint........................................ 81
FSC, environmental labelling..................... 11
Fuel.......................................................... 291 fuel consumption................................ 376 fuel economy...................................... 318 fuel filter.............................................. 292
Fuelling fuel filler flap....................................... 289 fuel filler flap, locking............................ 57
Fuse box.................................................. 348
Fuses....................................................... 348 changing............................................. 348 engine compartment.......................... 349
general................................................ 348 under front right seat.......................... 355 under glovebox................................... 352
G
Gearbox................................................... 115 automatic............................................ 116 manual................................................ 115
Gear selector inhibitor............................. 118
Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disen- gagement................................................. 118
Geartronic................................................ 117
Glass laminated/reinforced........................... 102
Glass roof, roller blind.............................. 106
Global opening........................................ 212
Glovebox................................................. 236 locking.................................................. 56
Gross vehicle weight............................... 369
GSI - Gear selector assistance................ 115
11 Alphabetical Index
11
400
H
Handbrake............................................... 131
Hazard warning flashers............................ 92
Headlamp levelling.................................... 87
Headlamp pattern, adjusting..................... 95
Headlamp pattern adjustment Active Bending Lights .......................... 96
Headlamps............................................... 335
head restraint front seat............................................... 81
Head restraint centre seat, rear.................................... 83 lowering................................................ 84
Heating.................................................... 218 rearview and door mirrors.................. 105 rear window........................................ 105 seats................................................... 217
Heat-reflecting windscreen...................... 102
High engine temperature......................... 299
High-pressure headlamp washing........... 100
HomeLink .............................................. 132
Home safe lighting..................................... 95
Hoot........................................................... 86
Horn........................................................... 86
I
IAQS Interior Air Quality System........... 213
IC Inflatable Curtain................................ 24
Ignition keys............................................... 79
Immobiliser................................................ 43
Indicator lamps, PCC................................ 45
Inflatable curtain........................................ 24
Information button, PCC............................ 45
Information displays.................................. 69
Infotainment system ............................... 240 menus ................................................ 243 overview ............................................. 241 source buttons ................................... 241 voice control....................................... 275
Inlaid mats............................................... 236
Instrument lighting, see Lighting................ 87
Instrument overview left-hand drive....................................... 66 right-hand drive.................................... 68
Instruments and controls........................... 66
Interior lighting, see Lighting..................... 93
Interior rearview mirror............................. 106 automatic dimming............................. 106
Intermittent wiping..................................... 99
iPod , connection................................... 261
J
Journey statistics..................................... 232
K
Kerb weight.............................................. 369
Key............................................................. 42
Key blade................................................... 46
Keyless drive...................................... 50, 112
Keyless start (keyless drive)............... 50, 112
Keypad in the steering wheel................................. 86, 145, 204, 241
Key positions............................................. 79
11 Alphabetical Index
11
401
L
Labels...................................................... 366
Laminated glass....................................... 102
Lamps, see Lighting................................ 335
Lane keeping assistant - LKA.................. 180
Laser sensor............................................ 164
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 359
Lighting.................................................... 335 Active Xenon headlamps...................... 91 approach light, duration................. 44, 95 automatic lighting, passenger compart- ment...................................................... 94 bulbs, specifications........................... 340 controls................................................. 93 daytime running lights.......................... 88 display lighting...................................... 87 headlamp levelling................................ 87 home safe lighting................................ 95 in passenger compartment................... 93 instrument lighting................................ 87 main/dipped beam............................... 87 position/parking lamps......................... 92 rear fog lamp........................................ 92 tunnel detection.................................... 90
Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 335 daytime running lights........................ 338 dipped beam (cars with halogen head- lamps)................................................. 336 direction indicators, front.................... 337 main beam (cars with active xenon headlamps)......................................... 337 main beam (cars with halogen head- lamps)................................................. 337 position/parking lamps....................... 338 rear bulb holder: direction indicators, brake lamps and reversing lamps...... 339 rear fog lamps..................................... 339 side marker lamps, front..................... 338 vanity mirror........................................ 340
Light switches............................................ 87
LKA - Lane keeping assistant.................. 180
Loading cargo area........................................... 294 general................................................ 294 mounting points.................................. 295 roof load............................................. 294
Lock confirmation ..................................... 42
Locking/unlocking inside.................................................... 54 tailgate.................................................. 56
Locks automatic locking................................. 54 locking.................................................. 54 unlocking.............................................. 54
Lubricants................................................ 374
Lubricants, capacities.............................. 374
M
Main/dipped beam, see Lightning............. 87
Main beam, automatic activation.............. 89
Maintenance rustproofing........................................ 359
Making calls............................................. 269
Manual gearbox....................................... 115 GSI - Gear selector assistance........... 115 towing and recovery........................... 305
Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 117
Max. roof load ......................................... 369
Media, Bluetooth ................................... 264
media player ........................................... 257
Memory function in seats.......................... 82
Menu navigation, Infotainment ............... 243
Menus/functions...................................... 205
11 Alphabetical Index
11
402
Menus and messages.............................. 200
Menu system MY CAR............................ 203
Messages and symbols Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 156 Collision Warning with Auto Brake.......................................... 165, 173 Distance Alert..................................... 160 Driver Alert Control............................. 178 LKA..................................................... 183
Messages in BLIS.................................... 197
Messages in the combined instrument panel........................................................ 200
Messages in the information display....... 139
Meters fuel gauge............................................. 70 speedometer......................................... 70 tachometer........................................... 70
Microphone.............................................. 267
Misting..................................................... 219 attending to the windows................... 212 condensation in headlamps............... 357 remove with the air vents................... 221 timer function...................................... 220
Mobile phone connect............................................... 268 handsfree............................................ 267
register phone..................................... 268 voice control....................................... 275
Mood lighting............................................. 94
MY CAR................................................... 203
O
Oil, see also Engine oil............................. 372
Oil level low.............................................. 329
Overheating............................................. 299
Owner's manual, environmental labelling.. 11
P
PACOS....................................................... 20
PACOS, switch.......................................... 20
Paintwork colour code......................................... 361 damage and touch-up........................ 361
Panel lighting............................................. 87
Panic function............................................ 44
PAP - Active Park Assist.......................... 190
Parcel shelf.............................................. 298
Park assist camera.................................. 187
Parking assistance................................... 184 parking assistance sensors................ 186
Parking brake........................................... 131
Parking heater.......................................... 223 battery and fuel................................... 223 parking on a hill.................................. 223 time setting......................................... 225
Passenger compartment......................... 234
Passenger compartment filter................. 212
Passenger compartment heater fuel-driven........................................... 223
Passenger compartment lighting automatic.............................................. 94
PCC Personal Car Communicator functions............................................... 44 range............................................... 45, 46
Pedestrian protection.............................. 167
Petrol grade............................................. 291
Phone connect............................................... 268 handsfree............................................ 267 incoming calls..................................... 269 making calls........................................ 269 phone book......................................... 271
11 Alphabetical Index
11
403
phone book, shortcut......................... 271 receiving a call.................................... 270 register phone..................................... 268 voice control....................................... 275
Pocket park assist - PAP......................... 190
Polishing.................................................. 358
Position/parking lamps.............................. 92
Power....................................................... 121
Power seat................................................. 82
Powershift gearbox.......................... 119, 305
Power windows....................................... 102
Q
Queue Assist............................................ 152
Queue Assistant....................................... 152
R
Radar sensor........................................... 147 limitations........................................... 154
Radio ...................................................... 250 AM/FM ............................................... 250 DAB ................................................... 254
Rain sensor................................................ 99
Rear bulbs location............................................... 339
Rearview and door mirrors compass............................................. 107 door.................................................... 104 electrically retractable......................... 105 heating................................................ 105 interior................................................. 106
Rear window, defrosting.......................... 105
Recirculation............................................ 220
Recommendations during driving............ 286
Recommended child seats, table.............. 32
Recovery.................................................. 307
Refrigerant............................................... 334
Refuelling........................................... 57, 289 fuel filler flap, manual opening............ 289 refuelling............................................. 289
Relay/fuse box: see Fuses....................... 348
Remote control ....................................... 282 battery replacement ........................... 283
Remote control, HomeLink programmable ................................... 132
Remote control key................................... 42 battery replacement.............................. 48
detachable key blade........................... 46 functions............................................... 44 range..................................................... 45
Remote control key system, type appro- val............................................................ 380
Resetting the door mirrors....................... 105
Resetting the power windows................. 104
Retractable power door mirrors............... 105
Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 115
Rims cleaning.............................................. 358
Road sign information............................. 141
Roller blind for glass roof......................... 106
Roof load, max. weight ........................... 369
Rustproofing............................................ 359
S
Safety mode.............................................. 28
Seat, see Seats.......................................... 81
Seatbelt rear seat................................................ 16 seatbelt tensioner................................. 16
Seatbelt reminder...................................... 16
11 Alphabetical Index
11
404
Seatbelts.................................................... 14
Seats.......................................................... 81 head restraints, rear.............................. 83 heating................................................ 217 lowering the front backrest................... 81 lowering the rear backrest.................... 84 power seats.......................................... 82
Securing loads (Loading)......................... 295
Sensus....................................................... 77
Service position....................................... 341
Service programme................................. 328
Set time interval....................................... 158
Side airbags............................................... 22
Signal input, external....................... 241, 261
SIPS bags.................................................. 22
Soot filter................................................. 293
Soot filter full............................................ 293
Spare wheel............................................. 314
Speed limiter............................................ 143
Spin control............................................. 138
Spin control function............................... 138
Stability and traction control system....... 138
Stability system....................................... 138
Stains....................................................... 359
Start assistance....................................... 114
Steering force, speed related.................. 233
Steering force level, see Steering force... 233
Steering lock............................................ 113
Steering wheel........................................... 86 keypad.......................... 86, 145, 204, 241 keypad, adaptive cruise control......... 149 steering wheel adjustment.................... 86
Stone chips and scratches...................... 361
Storage spaces in the passenger compart- ment......................................................... 234
Surround.......................................... 240, 245
Symbols................................................... 139 indicator symbols................................. 71 warning symbols................................... 71
Symbols and messages Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 156 Collision Warning with Auto Brake.......................................... 165, 173 Distance Alert..................................... 160 Driver Alert Control............................. 178 LKA..................................................... 183
T
Tailgate locking/unlocking.................................. 56
Temperature actual temperature............................. 212
Temperature control................................ 218
Timer........................................................ 220
Total airing function........................... 55, 212
Towbar detachable, attachment ..................... 302 detachable, removal .......................... 303
Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 300
Towing..................................................... 305 towing eye.......................................... 306
Towing capacity....................................... 369
Towing equipment................................... 300 specifications...................................... 301
Towing eye.............................................. 306
Trailer....................................................... 299 cable................................................... 299 driving with a trailer............................ 299 snaking............................................... 304
Trailer stability assist .............................. 138
Trailer Stability Assist.............................. 304
11 Alphabetical Index
11
405
Transmission............................................ 115
Transponder............................................ 102
Trip computer.......................................... 229
Trip meter.................................................. 75
Troubleshooting Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 155
TSA - trailer stability assist ............. 138, 304
Tunnel detection........................................ 90
TV............................................................. 279
Type approval, remote control key sys- tem........................................................... 380
Type designation..................................... 366
Tyres direction of rotation............................ 310 driving characteristics......................... 310 maintenance....................................... 310 pressure.............................................. 318 puncture repair................................... 320 specifications...................................... 312 speed ratings...................................... 313 tread wear indicators.......................... 311 winter tyres......................................... 312
U
Unlocking from the inside...................................... 55 from the outside................................... 54
USB, connection...................................... 261
V
Vanity mirror...................................... 94, 236
Ventilation................................................ 213
Vibration damper..................................... 300
Voice control, mobile phone.................... 275
Volvo Sensus............................................. 77
W
Warning lamp adaptive cruise control....................... 147 collision warning system.................... 169 stability and traction control system. . 138
Warning lamps airbags SRS.......................................... 73 alternator not charging......................... 73 fault in brake system............................ 73
low oil pressure..................................... 73 parking brake applied........................... 73 seatbelt reminder.................................. 73 warning................................................. 73
Warning sound collision warning system.................... 169
Warning symbol, airbag system................ 17
Warning symbols....................................... 71
Warning triangle....................................... 319
Washer fluid, filling................................... 343
Washers rear window........................................ 100 washer fluid, filling.............................. 343 windscreen......................................... 100
Water and dirt-repellent coating.............. 102
Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 358
Waxing..................................................... 358
Weights kerb weight......................................... 369
Wheels changing............................................. 314 installation........................................... 316 rims..................................................... 311 snow chains........................................ 312 spare wheel........................................ 314
11 Alphabetical Index
11
406
Wheels and tyres..................................... 310
Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 25
WHIPS child seat/booster cushion................... 25 whiplash injury...................................... 25
Windows, rearview and door mirrors....... 102
Windscreen Heating....................................... 105, 219
Windscreen washing................................ 100
Windscreen wipers.................................... 99 rain sensor............................................ 99
Winter driving........................................... 287
Winter tyres.............................................. 312
Wiper blades............................................ 341 changing............................................. 341 cleaning.............................................. 342 replacing, rear window....................... 342 service position....
Related manuals for Volvo V40 Owners Manual 2013
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the V40 Volvo works, you can view and download the Volvo V40 Owners Manual 2013 on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Volvo V40 as well as other Volvo manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Volvo V40. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Volvo V40 Owners Manual 2013 is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Volvo V40 Owners Manual 2013 consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Volvo V40 Owners Manual 2013 free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Volvo V40 Owners Manual 2013, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Volvo V40 Owners Manual 2013 as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.